Virginia Commonwealth University
West Grace Street-West Broad Street
Housing
Project Code 236-TBD
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
March 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
This Guide Specification (Table of Contents) includes references to DIVISION 1-17 SECTIONS that are,
or may be, typically appropriate for a project of this type and scope. Not all Sections listed in the Table of
Contents are necessarily included herein. However, copies of various Sections within each Division are
included to convey and establish the level of design and quality standards required for this project.
It will be the Design Build Team’s responsibility to develop a complete set of construction
specifications specific to this project.
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
The following documents in this section are included herein by reference only unless otherwise indicated
in “italics”. The italicized documents are included elsewhere in the RPF.
Copies of Virgina Standard Forms can be obtained from the BCOM “Forms” web site.
2009 VUSBC Special Inspections – State Owned Buildings CO-6b
General Conditions of the Design Build Construction Contract CO-7 DB
Virginia Standard forms:
Contract between Owner and Design Build Contractor CO-9 DB Form
Worker’s Compensation Certificate of Coverage CO-9a
Standard Performance Bond CO-10
Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond CO-10.1
Instructions for Completing CO-11 and CO-11a Forms
Change Order Log
Contract Change Order CO-11
Change Order Justification CO-11a
Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment CO-12
Affidavit of Payment of Claims CO-13
Final Report of Special Inspections CO-13.1b
Certificate of Completion by Contractor CO-13.2
Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by Contractor CO-13.2a
LEED Credit references are indicated below to highlight those areas of work which directly impact
the LEED certification process.
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100 ........... SUMMARY
01150 ........... SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - LEED
01270 ........... UNIT PRICES
01310 ........... PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01330 ........... SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01400 ........... QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01420 ........... REFERENCES
01454 ........... MOCKUP REQUIREMENTS
01500 ........... TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01600 ........... PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01700 ........... EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01731 ........... CUTTING AND PATCHING
01770 ........... CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01810 ........... GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
01815 ........... COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02000 ........... GENERAL SITEWORK
02100 ........... SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION
 SSp1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention (Required)
 MRc2 Construction Waste Management (Required)
02140 ........... DEWATERING AND CONSTRUCTION SURFACE WATER
02200 ........... EARTHWORK
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
02220 ........... PAVEMENT SUBBASE AND BASE
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
02270 ........... EROSION CONTROL
 SSp1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention (Required)
02361 ........... TERMITE CONTROL
02400 ........... STORAGE DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02441 ........... IRRIGATION SYSTEM
 WEc1 Water Efficient Landscaping (Required)
02490 ........... TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUNDCOVERS
 WEc1 Water Efficient Landscaping (Required)
02495 ........... LANDSCAPE ACCESSORIES

SSc4.2 Alternative Transportation-Bicycle Storage & Changing Rooms (Housing only)
02500 ........... BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
02517 ........... DRY LAID BRICK PAVING
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
02525 ........... CURBING
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
02570 ........... SEWERAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
02610 ........... WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
02620………..SUBDRAINAGE
02821………..CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
02826 ........... ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
02832………..SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03250 ........... BENTONITE WATERSTOP
03300 ........... CAST- IN - PLACE CONCRETE
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
03301 ........... SITE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
03410 ........... PLANT PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required))
03450………..PLANT PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE (continued)
03542 ........... HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04720 ........... CAST STONE
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
04810 ........... UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 ........... STRUCTURAL STEEL
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
05210 ........... STEEL JOISTS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
05310 ........... STEEL DECK
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
05400 ........... COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
05500 ........... METAL FABRICATIONS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
05511 ........... METAL STAIRS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
05521………..PIPE AND TUBE RAILING
05522………..STRAND GUARDS
05700………..ORNAMENTAL METAL
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 ........... ROUGH CARPENTRY
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 MRc7 Certified Wood (Preferred)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.4 Low-Emitting Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products (Required)
06105………..MISCELLANEOUS CARENTRY
06160 ........... SHEATHING
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
06201 ........... EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 MRc7 Certified Wood (Preferred)
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS (continued)
06402 ........... INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 MRc7 Certified Wood (Preferred)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.4 Low-Emitting Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products (Required)
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07115 ........... BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07140………..WATERPROOFING
07170 ........... BENTONITE GEOTEXTILE WATERPROOFING
07210 ........... BUILDING INSULATION
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
07411 ........... METAL ROOF PANELS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 SSc7.2 Heat Island Effect – Roof (Required)
07415 ........... COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
07460 ........... SIDING
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
07511 ........... BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
 SSc7.2 Heat Island Effect – Roof (Required)
07533………..VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES
07620 ........... SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07716 ........... ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
07720 ........... ROOF ACCESSORIES
07811 ........... SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
07816 ........... INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
07841 ........... THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
07842 ........... FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
07920 ........... JOINT SEALANTS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08005 ........... DOOR SCHEDULE
08110 ........... STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)

MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS (continued)
08211 ........... FLUSH WOOD DOORS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 MRc7 Certified Wood (Preferred)
 EQc4.4 Low-Emitting Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products (Required)
08212 ........... STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 MRc7 Certified Wood (Preferred)
 EQc4.4 Low-Emitting Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products (Required)
08311 ........... ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08331 ........... OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
08411 ........... ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required))
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
08520 ........... ALUMINUM WINDOWS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
08665 ........... SLIDING PASS WINDOWS
08710 ........... DOOR HARDWARE
08716 ........... AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
08800 ........... GLAZING
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc8.1 Daylight and Views – Daylight (Required)
08830 ........... MIRRORS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
08911………..GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09111 ........... NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
09220 ........... PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
09250 ........... GYPSUM BOARD
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
09265 ........... GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES (continued)
09310 ........... CERAMIC TILE
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
09511 ........... ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
09651 ........... RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.3 Low-Emitting Flooring Systems (Required)
09652 ........... RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.3 Low-Emitting Flooring Systems (Required)
09653 ........... RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.3 Low-Emitting Flooring Systems (Required)
09681 ........... CARPET TILE
09681 ........... CARPET TILE
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.3 Low-Emitting Flooring Systems (Required)
09720 ........... WALL COVERINGS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
09770 ........... FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
09911 ........... EXTERIOR PAINTING
09912 ........... INTERIOR PAINTING
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10155 ........... TOILET COMPARTMENTS
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)
 MRc5 Regional Materials (Required)
10200 ........... LOUVERS AND VENTS
10431 ........... SIGNAGE
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
10522 ........... FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10523………..FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10550 ........... POSTAL SPECIALTIES
10801 ........... TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11132 ........... PROJECTION SCREENS
11451 ........... RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12356 ........... RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
 MRc4 Recycled Content (Required)MRc5 Regional Materials (Recommended)
 MRc6 Rapidly Renewable Materials (Required)
 MRc7 Certified Wood (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.4 Low-Emitting Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products (Required)
12484 ........... FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
12491 ........... HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS (See the Summary Finish Schedule for product info)
12494 ........... ROLLER SHADES (See the Summary Finish Schedule for product info)
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13100 ........... LIGHTNING PROTECTION
13845 ........... LIGHTING CONTROLS
13852 ........... FIRE ALARM
13915 ........... FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
13921 ........... ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14240 ........... HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
 EQc4.3 Low-Emitting Flooring System (Required)
 EQc4.4 Low-Emitting Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products (Required)
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15052 ........... COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
 WEp1 Water use Reduction (Required)
 WEc3 Water Use Reduction (Required)
 EAc3 On-Site Renewable Energy (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
15053 ........... COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAp2 Minimum Energy Performance (Required)
 EAp3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management (Required)
 EAc1 Optimize Energy Performance (Required/Preferred)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
 EAc4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management (Required)
 EQp1 Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance (Required)
 EQc1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
15057 ........... COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
15058 ........... COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
 EAp2 Minimum Energy Performance (Required)
 EAc1 Optimize Energy Performance (Required)
15061 ........... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15062 ........... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15074 ........... VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (continued)
15076 ........... IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
15077 ........... IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
15082 ........... PLUMBING INSULATION
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
15083 ........... HVAC INSULATION
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
15111 ........... GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15123 ........... EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15126 ........... METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
15140 ........... DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required if plastic piping)
15145 ........... DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
15150 ........... SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
15155 ........... SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
15160 ........... STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15165 ........... STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
15181 ........... HYDRONIC PIPING
15183 ........... REFRIGERANT PIPING
15183 ........... REFRIGERANT PIPING
15195 ........... FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
15410 ........... PLUMBING FIXTURES
 WEp1 Water Use Reduction (Required)
 WEc3 Water Use Reduction (Required)
15415 ........... DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
15441 ........... DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
15444 ........... PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
15446 ........... SUMP PUMPS
15485………..ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
15486 ........... FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS (See Statement of Needs for preferred Manufacturer)
15500 ........... MANUAL DRY STANDPIPE
15561 ........... DIRECT-FIRED H&V UNITS
15732 ........... PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
 EAc1 Optimize Energy Performance (Required)
 EAc4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management (Required)
 EQc1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring (Required)
15733 ........... ROOFTOP REPLACEMENT AIR UNITS
 EAc1 Optimize Energy Performance (Required)
 EAc4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management (Required)
 EQc1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring (Required)
15738 ........... SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
 EAc1 Optimize Energy Performance (Required)
 EAc4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management (Required)
 EQc1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring (Required)
15762 ........... UNIT HEATERS
 EAc1 Optimize Energy Performance (Required)
15764………..CONVECTION HEATING UNITS
15774 ........... RADIANT-HEATING ELECTRIC CABLES
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (continued)
15815 ........... METAL DUCTS
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
15817 ........... HVAC CASINGS
15820 ........... DUCT ACCESSORIES
15838 ........... POWER VENTILATORS
15840 ........... AIR TERMINAL UNITS
 EAc1 Optimize Energy Performance (Required)
 EQc1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring (Required)
15855 ........... DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
15900………..HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15940 ........... SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
15950 ........... TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
15995 ........... MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16020 ........... COORDINATION
16050 ........... BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAp2 Minimum Energy Performance (Required)
 EAc1 Optimize Energy Performance (Required)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required))
16055 ........... OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
16060 ........... GROUNDING AND BONDING
16072 ........... ELECTRICAL SUPPORT
16075 ........... ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
 EQc4.1 Low-Emitting Adhesives and Sealants (Required)
 EQc4.2 Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings (Required)
16120 ........... CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16121 ........... CONDUIT
16127 ........... MINERAL INSULATED CABLE (600 VOLT MAXIMUM)
16130 ........... BOXES
16131 ........... RACEWAYS
16139 ........... CABLE TRAYS
16140 ........... WIRING DEVICES
16160 ........... CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
16180 ........... EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
16199 ........... ELECTRIC UTILITY SERVICE
16231 ........... PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
16289 ........... TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
16410 ........... ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16411 ........... CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16412 ........... ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16415 ........... AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
16426 ........... CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL (continued)
16442 ........... PANELBOARDS
16461 ........... DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
16480 ........... MOTOR CONTROL
16481 ........... ENCLOSED STARTER MOTOR CONTROLS
16490 ........... MOTORS
16491 ........... FUSES
16511 ........... INTERIOR LIGHTING
16521 ........... EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16660 ........... GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEM
16720………..FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS
16762 ........... COMMERCIAL VISUAL DOOR INDICATOR SYSTEMS
16913 ........... MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING
16915 ........... CONVEYING EQUIPMENT WIRING
16995 .......... ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
16999 ........... ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENT AND TESTING
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
DIVISION 17 – TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
17000 ........... HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
 EQc1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring (Required)
17100 ........... COMMISSIONING
 EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems (Required)
 EAc3 Enhanced Commissioning (Required)
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
Work covered by the Contract Documents.
Regulatory requirements.
Type of contract.
Use of premises.
Subsurface analysis.
Specification formats and conventions.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Owner: Commonwealth of Virginia, Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, Virginia
B.
Owner’s Project Code: 236-17109.
1.3
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS (CODES)
A.
Design is predicated on the following:
1.
Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code" (2003 Edition) (VUSBC), Effective November
16, 2005, which incorporates and amends the following primary model codes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Governing Regulations: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be
familiar with governing regulations and the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction as
applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable governing regulations and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction are not reproduced in or bound with the Contract
Documents.
1.
C.
ICC International Building Code (IBC); 2003
ICC International Mechanical Code (IMC); 2003.
ICC International Plumbing Code (IPC); 2003.
NFPA 70, National Electric Code (NEC); 2002.
ICC International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC); 2003.
ICC International Energy Conservation Code (IECC); 2003.
Where copies of governing regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from the
publication source.
Other codes and standards referenced by the above model building codes, rules, regulations
and standards are applicable to the Work of this Project to the extent referenced; subject to
applicable published amendments of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Codes and standards are referenced by the Contract Documents to the extent that
requirements are regulatory. Where codes and standards include provisions that apply to
contractual relationships that conflict with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern.
1.4
TYPE OF CONTRACT
A.
1.5
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
Contractor's Use of Premises: During construction, Contractor shall have full use of site
indicated. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or
employ other contractors on portions of Project.
B.
Permits for Work in Streets and Alleys: If required by Contractor’s selection and determination
of construction means, methods and techniques, obtain and pay for necessary City of
Richmond permits to allow Contractor to temporarily occupy portions of the public rights-of-way
adjacent to project site for the conduct of construction operations.
C.
Fastenings and Attachments to Precast/Prestressed Concrete: Do not use drilled or powderactuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to precast/prestressed concrete units except
with the written permission, approval, and in accordance with the directions of the
precast/presetressed concrete fabricator.
1.6
SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING ANALYSIS
A.
1.7
A Preliminary Subsurface Exploration report has been prepared for this project by ECS. This
report is for informational purposes only and it is the responsibility of the DB to contract for any
additional exploration and/or analysis that the DB deems necessary to complete the design for
this project.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1.
2.
B.
Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers
are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the
Specifications.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
2.
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
01150 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - LEED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This project is designed to achieve all Prerequisites and no less than 50 points under the US
Green Building Council’s LEED® 2009 for New Construction and Major Renovations (LEED-NC
2009) Rating System for at least a LEED Silver-level Rating. Throughout this section, the term
LEED shall be used in place of LEED-NC 2009.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Required: Achievement of this credit is essential for certification of this project.
B.
Preferred: Achievement of this credit would be desirable but is not mandatory.
LEED CREDIT SUMMARY (this projects LEED summary score card is included elsewhere in the RFP)
1.3
A.
Sustainable Sites (SS)
1.
SS Prerequisite 1 Construction Activity Pollution Prevention
a.
Required: Create and implement an Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC)
Plan for all construction activities associated with the project. The ESC Plan shall
conform to “VCU’s Annual Standards for Erosion and Sediment Control, whichever
is more stringent.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
2.
SS Credit 1 Site Selection
a.
Required: Avoid development of inappropriate sites and reduce the environmental
impact from the location of a building on a site
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
3.
SS Credit 2 Development Density and Community Connectivity
a.
Required: Construct or renovate building on a previously developed site and in a
community with a minimum development density of 60,000 square feet per acre
net.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
4.
SS Credit 4.1 Alternative Transportation - Public Transportation Access (Required)
a.
Required: Project located within half mile walking distance (measured from a main
building entrance) of an existing or planned and funded commuter rail, light rail or
subway station.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
5.
SS Credit 4.2 Alternative Transportation – Bicycle Storage and Changing Rooms
a.
Preferred: (Housing only) Provide covered storage facilities for securing bicycles
for 15 percent or more of the building occupants.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
6.
SS Credit 4.3 Alternative Transportation – Low-Emitting and Fuel-Efficient Vehicles
(Preferred)
a.
Preferred: Provide preferred parking for low-emitting and fuel-efficient (LEV)
vehicles for 5 percent of the total vehicle parking capacity of the site.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
7.
SS Credit 4.4 Alternative Transportation – Parking Capacity
a.
Preferred: (Housing) OPTION 2 Provide no new parking.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
8.
SS Credit 5.2 Site Development - Maximize Open Space
a.
9.
10.
Required: Reduce the development footprint (defined as the total area of the
building footprint, hardscape, access roads and parking) and/or provide vegetated
open space within the project boundary such that the amount of open space
exceeds local zoning requirements 25 percent.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
SS Credit 7.1 Heat Island Effect – Non-roof
a.
Preferred: OPTION 1 For 50 percent of the site hardscape, provide shade and/ or
use hardscape materials with Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of at least 29 and/or
open-grid pavement system (at least 50 percent pervious).
b.
Preferred: OPTION 2 Provide minimum of 50 percent parking under cover. Any
roof used to shade or cover parking must have an SRI of at least 29, be a
vegetated roof, or covered by solar panels.
c.
Document for LEED Design Review.
SS Credit 7.2 Heat Island Effect – Roof
a.
Preferred: OPTION 1 Use roofing materials with a SRI equal to or greater than 78
for a Low-Sloped Roof and 29 for a Steep-Sloped Roof for a minimum of 75
percent of the roof surface. OR
b.
Preferred: OPTION 2 Install a vegetated roof that covers at least 50 percent of the
roof area. OR
c.
Preferred: OPTION 3 Install high albedo roof and vegetated roof in combination
per LEED credit criteria.
d.
Document for LEED Design Review.
B.
Water Efficiency (WE)
1.
WE Prerequisite 1 Water Use Reduction- 20 percent Reduction
a.
Required: Employ strategies that in aggregate use 20 percent less water than the
water use baseline calculated for the building (not including irrigation).
Calculations are based on estimated occupant usage and must include only the
following fixtures and fixture fittings (as applicable to the project scope): water
closets, urinals, lavatory faucets, showers, and kitchen sink faucets and pre-rinse
spray valves.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
2.
WE Credit 1 Water Efficient Landscaping
a.
Required: Reduce potable water consumption for irrigation by 50 percent from a
calculated mid-summer baseline case.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
3.
WE Credit 3 Water Use Reduction
a.
Preferred: Employ strategies that in aggregate use 30 percent less water than the
water use baseline calculated for the building (not including irrigation).
Calculations are based on estimated occupant usage and must include only the
following fixtures and fixture fittings (as applicable to the project scope): water
closets, urinals, lavatory faucets, showers, and kitchen sink faucets and pre-rinse
spray valves.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review
C.
Energy and Atmosphere (EA)
1.
EA Prerequisite 1 Fundamental Commissioning of the Building Energy Systems
a.
Required: Verify that the building’s energy-related systems are installed, calibrated
and perform according to the owner’s project requirements, basis of design, and
construction documents.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
2.
EA Prerequisite 2 Minimum Energy Performance
a.
Required: The project must establish an Energy Performance Rating goal for the
facility design using EPA's Target Finder rating tool.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
3.
EA Prerequisite 3 Fundamental Refrigerant Management
a.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Required: Zero use of CFC-based refrigerants in new base building HVAC&R
systems. When reusing existing base building HVAC equipment, complete a
comprehensive CFC phase-out conversion prior to project completion. Phase-out
plans extending beyond the project completion date will be considered on their
merits.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
EA Credit 1 Optimize Energy Performance
a.
Required: Demonstrate a percentage improvement in the proposed building
performance rating compared with the baseline building performance rating.
Calculate the baseline building performance according to Appendix G of
ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007 (with errata but without addenda) using
a computer simulation model for the whole building project. The minimum energy
cost savings is 24 percent.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
EA Credit 3 Enhanced Commissioning
a.
Required: Implement, or have a contract in place to implement, commissioning
process activities in addition to the requirements of EAp1 and in accordance with
the LEED Reference Guide.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
EA Credit 4 Enhanced Refrigerant Management
a.
Required: Select refrigerants and HVAC&R that minimize or eliminate the emission
of compounds that contribute to ozone depletion and global climate change. The
base building HVAC&R equipment must comply with the formula, which sets a
maximum threshold for the combined contributions to ozone depletion and global
warming potential in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
Materials and Resources (MR)
1.
MR Prerequisite 1 Storage & Collection of Recyclables
a.
Required: Provide an easily accessible dedicated area for the collection and
storage materials for recycling for the entire building. Materials must include at a
minimum paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics and metals.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
2.
MR Credit 2 Construction Waste Management
a.
Required: Recycle and/or salvage minimum 75 percent of nonhazardous
construction and demolition debris. Develop and implement a construction waste
management plan that, at a minimum, identifies the materials to be diverted from
disposal and whether the materials will be sorted on-site or comingled.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
3.
MR Credit 4 Recycled Content
a.
Required: Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer
recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer content constitutes minimum
20 percent (based on cost) of the total value of materials.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
4.
MR Credit 5 Regional Materials
a.
Required: Use building materials or products that have been extracted, harvested
or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for
minimum 20 percent (based on cost) of the total value of materials.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
5.
MR Credit 7 Certified Wood
a.
Preferred: Use minimum 50 percent (based on cost) of permanently installed
wood-based materials and products certified in accordance with the Forest
Stewardship Council’s (FSC) Principles and Criteria.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
E.
Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ)
1.
EQ Prerequisite 1 Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
a.
Required: Meet the minimum requirements of Sections 4 through 7 of ASHRAE
62.1-2007, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (with errata but without
addenda). Mechanical ventilation systems must be designed using the ventilation
rate procedure or the applicable local code, whichever is more stringent.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
2.
EQ Prerequisite 2 Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control
a.
Required: Prohibit smoking in the building. Prohibit on-property smoking within 25
feet from entries, outdoor air intakes and operable windows. Provide signage to
allow smoking in designated areas, prohibit smoking in designated areas or
prohibit smoking on the entire property.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
3.
EQ Credit 3.1 Construction IAQ Management Plan - During Construction
a.
Required: Develop and implement an IAQ management plan for the construction
and preoccupancy phases of the building as follows:
1)
During construction, meet or exceed the recommended control measures of
the SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction,
2nd Edition 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3).
2)
Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture
damage.
3)
If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration
media with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8 must be used
at each return air grille, as determined by ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999
(with errata but without addenda). Replace all filtration media immediately
prior to occupancy.
4)
Prohibit smoking inside the building and within 25 feet of building entrances
once the building is enclosed.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
4.
EQ Credit 4.1 Low Emitting Materials - Adhesives and Sealants
a.
Required: Field-applied adhesives and sealants applied within the waterproofing
envelope must comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District
(SCAQMD) Rule #1168. Aerosol Adhesives must comply with Green Seal
Standard for Commercial Adhesives GS-36 requirements in effect on October 19,
2000.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
5.
EQ Credit 4.2 Low Emitting Materials - Paints and Coatings
a.
Required: Field-applied paints and coatings applied within building waterproofing
envelope shall comply with the VOC Content limits as expressed in grams per liter,
less water and exempt compounds, of Standard GS-11 “Paints,” First Edition, May
20, 1993; Standard GC-03 “Anti-Corrosive Paints,” Second Edition, January 7,
1997; and SCAQMD Rule #1113 “Architectural Coatings,” January 1, 2004.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
6.
EQ Credit 4.3 Low Emitting Materials - Flooring Systems
a.
Required: All carpet installed in the building interior shall meet the testing and
product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s (CRI) Green Label Plus
(GLP) program. All carpet cushion installed in the building interior shall meet the
requirements of CRI GLP program. All hard surface flooring (vinyl, linoleum,
laminate flooring, wood flooring, ceramic flooring, rubber flooring and wall base)
must be certified FloorScore standard by an independent third-party. All carpet
adhesive, tile adhesive and grout shall meet the requirements of EQ Credit 4.1.
Concrete, wood bamboo and cork floor finishes such as sealer, stain and finish
must meet the requirements of EQ Credit 4.2.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
EQ Credit 4.4 Low Emitting Materials – Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products
a.
Preferred: Composite wood and agrifiber products used on the interior of the
building and laminating adhesives (on-site and shop-applied) must contain no
added urea-formaldehyde resins.
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
EQ Credit 6.1 Controllability of Systems – Lighting
a.
Required (Housing), Preferred (Deck): Provide individual lighting controls for
minimum 90 percent of building occupants. Provide lighting system controls for all
shared multi-occupant spaces.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
EQ Credit 6.2 Controllability of Systems – Thermal Comfort
a.
Required (Housing) Preferred (Deck): Provide individual comfort controls for
minimum 50 percent of building occupants. Provide comfort system controls for all
shared multi-occupant spaces.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
EQ Credit 7.1 Thermal Comfort - Design
a.
Required: Design HVAC systems and the building envelope to meet the
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55-2004, Thermal Environmental Conditions
for Human Occupancy (with errata but without addenda). Demonstrate design
compliance in accordance with the Section 6.1.1 documentation.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
EQ Credit 7.2 Thermal Comfort - Verification
a.
Required (Deck) NA (Housing): Agree to conduct a thermal comfort survey of
building occupants within six to 18 months after occupancy and to develop a plan
for corrective action if the survey results indicate that more than 20 percent of
occupants are dissatisfied with thermal comfort in the building.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
EQ Credit 8.1 Daylight and Views - Daylight
a.
Preferred (Deck) NA (Housing): Provide daylight for 75 percent of regularly
occupied spaces.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
EQ Credit 8.2 Daylight and Views - Views
a.
Required: Achieve a direct line of sight to the outdoor environment via vision
glazing between 30 inches and 90 inches above the finish floor for building
occupants in 90 percent of all regularly occupied areas.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
F.
Innovation and Design Process (ID)
1.
ID Credit 1.1 Innovation and Design - Green Cleaning
a.
Required: Implement a policy for the use of green cleaning that reduces exposure
of building occupants and maintenance personnel to potentially hazardous
chemical contaminants that adversely impact air quality, occupant well-being, and
the environment.
b.
Document for LEED Design Review.
2.
ID Credits 1.2-1.5 Innovation and Design
a.
Preferred: Exemplary Performance. AND/OR
b.
Preferred: Team defined strategy.
c.
Document for LEED Design Review.
3.
ID Credit 2 LEED Accredited Professional
a.
Required: At least one principal participant of the project team must be a LEED
Accredited Professional (AP).
b.
Document for LEED Construction Review.
G.
Regional Priority (RP)
1.
RP Credit 1: WEc3 (40 percent) – Preferred
2.
RP Credit 2: EAc2 (1 percent) – Preferred
3.
4.
1.4
RP Credit 3: MRc1 (55 percent) – Preferred
RP Credit 4: MRc2 (50 percent) – Required
MANAGEMENT PLAN SUBMITTALS
A.
Construction and Demolition Waste Management (CWM) Plan: 30 days prior to any waste
removal, submit for approval a detailed CWM Plan in accordance with by MR Credit 2.
1.
Analysis of estimated job-site waste to be generated, including types and quantities of
compostable, recyclable and salvageable materials.
2.
Description of means and methods to achieve 50 (75) percent diversion requirement for
compostable, recyclable, and salvageable materials, including those that may be donated
to charitable organizations.
3.
Identification of recycling contractors and haulers proposed for use in the project and
locations accepting construction waste materials or entities providing related services.
B.
LEED Materials Plan: Within 30 days of contract award, submit the plan based upon LEED
Credits pursued and Contractor’s approach to achievement of those credits. Calculate material
cost per LEED guidelines, excluding labor, installation equipment, mechanical, electrical and
plumbing components and specialty items such as elevators. Provide preliminary informational
submittals indicating the following:
1.
Provide a preliminary matrix, using LEED Online Form or spreadsheet, verifying that
credit requirements will be met based on identified materials and attributes. Identify each
material that will contribute to each credit, its source, and estimated cost.
a.
MR Credit 4: List of proposed materials with recycled content.
b.
MR Credit 5: List of proposed regionally manufactured and extracted, harvested, or
recovered materials.
c.
MR Credit 6: List of proposed rapidly renewable materials.
d.
MR Credit 7: List of proposed certified wood products.
C.
Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan, During Construction: Within 60 days
prior to scheduled building enclosure, in accordance with requirements of EQ Credit 3.1:
a.
Meet or exceed control measures of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s
National Association Indoor Air Quality.
b.
Protect stored on site and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
c.
Use filtration media with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8 at each
return grille, if permanently installed air handlers are used during construction.
d.
Prohibit smoking inside the building and within 25 feet of building entrances once
the building is enclosed.
1.5
MONTHLY REPORTS
A.
CWM Plan: With each application for payment, submit reports comparing total waste removed
and recycled, salvaged or donated waste. Provide updated information submittal using LEED
Online Form or spreadsheet, for MR Credit 2.
B.
LEED Materials Plan: With each application for payment, submit reports comparing actual
purchasing and construction activities. Provide updated information submittal using LEED
Online Form or spreadsheet for applicable MR credits.
C.
IAQ Management Plan: Provide photographs demonstrating compliance with EQ Credit 3.1, at
three significantly different times during construction.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
LEED Online: Final LEED Online Form and associated required documentation uploaded to
LEED Online Project Database for each LEED credit pursued, within 30 days of Substantial
Completion.
PROJECT MEETINGS
Status of LEED green building-related work shall be on the agenda of all required regularly
scheduled job-site meetings.
CONTRACTOR LEED COORDINATOR
Designate one LEED Accredited Professional as the Contractor LEED Coordinator for this
Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B.
Unit price is an amount proposed by the DB Team, stated on the RFP Pricing Form, as a price
per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum
by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents
are increased or decreased.
4.2
PROCEDURES
A.
Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
B.
Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specfied
in those Sections.
C.
Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D.
List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Setions referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each
unit price.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1
LIST OF UNIT PRICES
A.
Unit Price Bid Part C: Adjustment for removal of unsuitable soil material and replacement with
compacted satisfactory soil materials, in quantities above or below the quantity indicated for Bid
Part C on the bid form.
1.
2.
Description: Perform in accordance with Division 2 Section “Earthwork”.
Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of material excavated.
END OF SECTION 01270
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 7 - GENERAL
7.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
B.
7.2
Coordination Drawings.
Project meetings.
See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
C.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required obtaining the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Project closeout activities.
7.3
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within two Insert
number days of the meeting.
B.
Preconstruction Conference: See paragraph 50. (b) of the General Conditions.
C.
Monthly Pay Meetings: See paragraph 50. (c) and Article 36 of the General Conditions.
D.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at bimonthly intervals. One bimonthly meeting
will coincide with required monthly pay meeting.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
b.
Review schedule for next period.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
Requests for interpretations (RFIs).
Status of proposal requests.
16)
17)
18)
19)
3.
4.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Contractor shall record the meeting minutes.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 8 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 9 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 10 - GENERAL
10.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for
mockup requirements.
C.
See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties, project record
documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and demonstration and training.
10.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
10.3
A.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in General Conditions paragraph 24. (a) for list
of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction
activities.
C.
Legibility Requirements: Submittals are required to be legible and all printed material must be
formatted and of sufficient quality to allow for photocopying on standard xerographic
reproduction equipment.
1.
2.
3.
Do not submit copies of documents that have been transmitted by facsimile. Provide
original documents or legible xerographic copies.
When xerographic reproductions are not clearly legible due to publication techniques
used to produce the original document, submit required number of copies of original
copies of the document.
When original copies are required but are not available or otherwise suitable for
submission, prepare new information and submit as Shop Drawings.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Initial Reviews: Allow fourteen (14) days for initial review of each submittal as indicated
by discipline. Allow additional time for large submittals, multiple submittals, or if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow seven (7) days for review of each resubmittal.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval
stamp and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Project name.
State project code number.
Date.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
i.
j.
k.
l.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
06100.01.A).
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
F.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
G.
Indicate Contractor’s review using stamp required by paragraph 24. (g) of the General
Conditions. Submittals not bearing this stamp will be returned by the Architect without action.
H.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve
as final submittal.
1.
I.
Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from
sources other than Contractor.
J.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Make Corrections Noted and Do Not
Resubmit" or “No Exceptions Taken”.
K.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
L.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating actions of "Make
Corrections Noted and Do Not Resubmit" or “No Exceptions Taken” taken by Architect.
10.4
A.
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
General: At Contractor's request, copies of Architect's CAD files may be provided to Contractor
for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
1.
2.
Execution by the party requesting the files of the Architect’s standard agreement for
release of electronic data.
Payment by the party requesting the files of the Architect’s charges to process files.
PART 11 - PRODUCTS
11.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
4.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Number of Copies: Submit six copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document. Provide subsequent reproduction as required to meet project
requirements.
a.
Submit an additional copy of product data for mechanical, electrical and plumbing
work for the Owner’s use.
1)
C.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
3.
D.
Submit two additional copies of all fire suppression and fire alarm system
submittals.
Include the
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by
40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).
Number of Copies: Submit one reproducible copy and three opaque (bond) copies of
each submittal, unless the submittal needs review by another discipline (structure, MEP,
Landscape or civil), in which case provide another copy, which our consultant will keep.
Architect will return one copy. Stamped and marker-up reproducible will be returned to
the Contactror.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a.
5.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
a.
11.2
A.
Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project Record Sample.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B.
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
D.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names
of firms and personnel certified.
F.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
G.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
H.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
K.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
L.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project.
M.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
N.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
O.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
P.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance
and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations.
Include page numbers.
R.
Manufacturer's Instructions:
Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
S.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
3.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
T.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
U.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Compile MSDS information in duplicate for all products
proposed for use on the project. Organize information by specification section and bind in 3ring binders. Update and add new information as required as the project progresses.
1.
2.
3.
4.
11.3
A.
DELEGATED DESIGN
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
B.
MSDS shall be provided for every product specified prior to delivery or the product to the
jobsite. Where a product is clearly non-hazardous or where MSDS information is not
applicable or not published by the manufacturer, suppler or distributor, provide a note to
that effect and place it in the binders.
Maintain one copy at jobsite office, available for inspection at all times by anyone
performing duties in conjunction with their employment while on the project site.
Do not submit MSDS information to the Architect. If submitted to the Architect, Architect
will not review this information but will return it with no action taken
Submit one copy of all MSDS information directly to the Owner or the Owner’s
designated representative. Submission of Material Data Safety Sheets to the Owner is
solely for the purpose of Owner’s compliance with occupational safety and health
regulations as they apply to the Owner as an employer. Availability of Material Safety
Data Sheets or similar information to the Owner shall not give rise to a duty or
responsibility of the Owner to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment
suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of
the Work. The Contractor shall be fully and solely responsible for jobsite safety.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 12 - EXECUTION
12.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with the contractor’s review stamp required by
paragraph 24. (g). of the General Conditions.
12.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's review stamp and will
return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
D.
Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 13 - GENERAL
13.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
See Article 16 of the General Conditions.
C.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
D.
13.2
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements.
Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D.
Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
E.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
F.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
G.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
H.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
I.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
J.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to trades people of the corresponding generic name.
13.3
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
13.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
13.5
Date of issue.
Project title and state project code number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
G.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect three days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
13.6
A.
QUALITY CONTROL
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having
jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing.
D.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
13.7
A.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct
special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of
Owner, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
Refer to G.S. Form CO-6a, 2003 VUSBC Special Inspections – State Owned Buildings for
listing of required special inspections.
PART 14 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 15 - EXECUTION
15.1
A.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
2.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
PART 16 - GENERAL
16.1
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
16.2
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards:
Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1.
16.3
A.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
Government Agencies, Standard Organizations and Industry Organizations:
Where
abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall
mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of
Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."
PART 17 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 18 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01420
SECTION 01454 – MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
PART 19 - GENERAL
19.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative, procedural and physical requirements for mock-up panels.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
19.2
A.
19.3
A.
19.4
A.
DEFINITIONS
Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
SUBMITTALS
Board Samples: Prior to ordering exterior materials or constructing mock-ups, provide color
board sample consisting of actual samples of products proposed for use on exterior of building
for confirmation of initial product selections. Where products contain color variation or ranges
(e.g. brick) provide sufficient number of samples to exhibit full range of color for product being
proposed. Deliver and set up color board at project site in conjunction with scheduled jobsite
meeting for review and approval by Architect.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Divisions 02 through 16 Sections for specific systems and materials to be incorporated in
to the mockup panels.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect’s approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
Mockup Panel Requirements: Use materials and finishes in configuration as indicated on the
Drawings, include the following materials/systems:
1.
2.
Thin-brick veneer precast concrete panels, bituminous dampproofing, CSMU, cast stone
units, flashing, weeps and cavity drainage material.
Standard brick veneer with precast concrete backup with bituminous dampproofing, cast
stone, flashing, weeps and cavity drainage material.
PART 20 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 21 - EXECUTION
21.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of mockup, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and
finishes.
B.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01454
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
C.
See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements
for products in those Sections.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
USE CHARGES
A.
1.4
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Temporary Paving: Comply with requirements indicated. Provide maintenance during
construction period, including replacement if necessary. Restore, or remove if restoration is not
practical, prior to final paving installation.
B.
Site Fencing: At Contractor’s option, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
C.
2.2
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized
steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe
posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner
and pull posts, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chainlink fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts;
minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom
rails and galvanized barbed-wire top strand. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases
as standard with fence suppler for supporting posts.
Lumber and Plywood: Provide standard preservative treated materials, sized to withstand loads
encountered in intended use. Provide new materials on public or owner-occupied side of
fences and barriers.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds:
Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
Heating Equipment: Use permanent heating equipment if use is authorized by supplier or
installer prior to Owner acceptance, or electric resistance heaters. Do not use gasoline or
kerosene-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B.
3.2
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
B.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1.
Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1.
Do not use Owner’s toilet facilities in adjacent buildings or facilities.
E.
Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of
completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed.
F.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
H.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
I.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone linefor each field office.
1.
2.
At Contracator’s option, a pay phone may be provided for use of subcontractors and
material and equipment suppliers.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a.
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in
each field office.
3.
4.
J.
3.3
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire
departments Contractor's home office Architect's office Owner's office Principal
subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail in field office.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
B.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within
construction limits indicated on Drawings.
1.
C.
Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment
as required to minimize dust.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D.
Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. Parking is not permitted
in facilities reserved for Owner, faculty, student or visitor use.
E.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
F.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: See General Conditions Article 33.
1.
Provide signs required by authorities having jurisdiction for identification site entrances, to
provide direction to emergency personnel, to warn public of hazards, and for posting
emergency contact information. Obtain Owner’s approval of design and location.
G.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
H.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials.
1.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
I.
Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators.
J.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
K.
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering
of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
B.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy
rains.
D.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
E.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1.
2.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Provide Owner with three sets of keys.
F.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
G.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
H.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
I.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
See Article 26, “Equals”, of the General Conditions.
C.
See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
D.
See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Comply with paragraph 26. (c). of the General Conditions.
2.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 2 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will recommend to the Owner acceptance or rejection of a request for
substitution, and will notify Contractor of Owner’s acceptance or rejection of proposed
substitution within 15 Insert time days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
B.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
Use product specified if Owner cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated, or the substitution request is rejected.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 2 days of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information
or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b.
C.
1.4
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.6
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty:
Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
No asbestos containing materials shall be used on this project.
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
Products:
Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies
4.
5.
6.
7.
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions
in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a.
8.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a.
b.
2.3
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium
items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Conditions:
Architect will review Contractor's request for substitution and make a
recommendation to the Owner in accordance with the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities include compensation to Architect for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
8.
2.4
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
4.2
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
General installation of products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Requests for information.
See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,
and final cleaning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
B.
Final Property Survey: Submit 6 copies, sealed and signed by Land Surveyor, showing the
Work performed and record survey data.
4.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1.
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
2.
C.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.2
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move,
or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
6.3
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information (RFI) to Architect.
1.
B.
Do not submit requests for information without first reading and understanding the
Contract Documents. Owner reserves the right to charge Contractor for costs incurred as
a result of Architect’s repeated responses to Contractor’s requests for information where
the information is clearly discernable in the Contract Documents.
Include the following for each RFI;
1.
2.
Detailed description of problem encountered, including references to specific contract
documents applicable to the problem.
Priority of the request, in relation to other current outstanding RFIs.
3.
4.
6.4
Date when response is needed to avoid adversely impacting current construction
schedules.
Where apparent, recommendations for solving the problem.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name
and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
6.5
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
B.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
C.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real
property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that
principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the
survey.
1.
6.6
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
6.7
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures:
Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
6.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
Remove
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
6.9
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
6.10
A.
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 7 - GENERAL
7.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B.
See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
C.
See Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated
construction.
7.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 7 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
7.3
Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated
and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will
be disrupted.
Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity
to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a
visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 8 - PRODUCTS
8.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 9 - EXECUTION
9.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1.
2.
9.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied facilities.
9.3
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 01731
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 10 - GENERAL
10.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
10.2
A.
See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
the Work in those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
B.
Inspection procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Project record documents.
Operation and maintenance data.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Contact Owner’s separate security and access control contractor
Contact Owner’s locksmith to make final changeover to permanent lock cores and
distribute keys to facility user. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security
provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion in accordance
with paragraph 44 (a) of the General Conditions.
10.3
A.
FINAL COMPLETION
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
10.4
A.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Submit certified copy of list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list). The
certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise
resolved for acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance in accordance
with paragraph 44 (b) of the General Conditions. On receipt of request, Architect will
either proceed with inspection required by paragraph 44 (c) of the General Conditions or
notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
Architectural Punch List:
a.
b.
2.
Engineering Discipline Punch Lists:
a.
b.
10.5
A.
10.6
A.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Provide separate punch lists for each major design discipline, including but not
limited to civil engineering, landscape architecture, structural engineering, fire
suppression engineering, plumbing engineering, HVAC engineering, and electrical
engineering.
Organize lists according to each major element or system, proceeding in a logical
order of inspection for each major element or system.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
See paragraphs 23 (g) and 23 (h) of the General Conditions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
See article 49 of the General Conditions.
B.
Assemble two complete sets of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1.
Operation Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Maintenance Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
C.
10.7
Emergency instructions and procedures.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
Description of controls and sequence of operations.
Piping diagrams.
Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
Maintenance procedures.
Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
Maintenance record forms.
Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
Copies of maintenance service agreements.
Copies of warranties and bonds.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(215-by-280-mm) paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 11 - PRODUCTS
11.1
A.
MATERIALS
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 12 - EXECUTION
12.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Clean, polish and seal resilient flooring, leaving ready for continuation of normal
maintenance by Owner’s forces.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
SECTION 01810 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 13 - GENERAL
13.1
A.
13.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without
regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
13.3
Division 1 Section "Commissioning of HVAC" for commissioning process activities for
HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components.
DEFINITIONS
A.
BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product
selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards,
and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items
that support the design process.
B.
Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of
resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
C.
CxA: Commissioning Authority.
D.
OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a
project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals,
measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and
supporting information.
E.
Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or
separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
13.4
COMMISSIONING TEAM
A.
Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of
the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process
through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to,
representatives of each Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors,
installers, suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
B.
Members Appointed by Owner:
1.
2.
3.
13.5
CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates
the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage
the CxA under a separate contract.
Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel.
Architect and engineering design professionals.
OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and each Contractor for information and use.
B.
Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in
commissioning team activities.
C.
Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the CxA and
each Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation
and maintenance training plan.
13.6
A.
EACH CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Each contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and
shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
13.7
Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with
entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action.
Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log.
Attend commissioning team meetings held on a biweekly basis.
Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule.
Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA.
Complete paper construction checklists as Work is completed and provide to the
Commissioning Authority on a weekly basis.
Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the
Commissioning Authority.
Complete commissioning process test procedures.
CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Organize and lead the commissioning team.
B.
Provide commissioning plan.
C.
Convene commissioning team meetings.
D.
Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures.
E.
Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The sampling
rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to, equipment
submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests, and test
reports to verify compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the
requirement, the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log.
F.
Prepare and maintain the Issues Log.
G.
Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.
H.
Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component startup.
I.
Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual and
commissioning process report.
PART 14 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 15 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01810
SECTION 01815 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 16 - GENERAL
16.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and
equipment.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
16.2
Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning
process requirements.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.
B.
Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.
C.
Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.
D.
Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance
orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.
E.
Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.
F.
Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data
acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test
period.
16.3
CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for
actual HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and
installed as part of the construction contract.
B.
Direct commissioning testing.
C.
Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.
D.
Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.
16.4
A.
COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan:
1.
Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and
reports.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
16.5
Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including
design changes that occurred during the construction phase.
Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart
and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to
be verified and tested.
Certificate of readiness, signed by the Contractor, certifying that HVAC&R systems,
assemblies, equipment, components, and associated controls are ready for testing.
Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup
procedures have been completed.
Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and
associated controls are ready for testing.
Test and inspection reports and certificates.
Corrective action documents.
Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of readiness.
B.
Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.
PART 17 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 18 - EXECUTION
18.1
TESTING PREPARATION
A.
Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and
started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.
B.
Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated,
that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have
been recorded.
C.
Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective
work approved.
D.
Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal
shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power,
and alarm conditions).
E.
Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.
F.
Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during
each mode of operation.
G.
Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data
as directed by the CxA.
18.2
TESTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION
A.
Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms,
checklists, and certificates to the CxA.
B.
Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access
for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.
C.
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R
systems at the direction of the CxA.
1.
2.
3.
4.
18.3
The CxA will notify testing and balancing Contractor 10 days in advance of the date of
field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.
The testing and balancing Contractor shall use the same instruments (by model and
serial number) that were used when original data were collected.
Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent.
Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing,
adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall
result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.
Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be
performed.
GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of
the CxA.
B.
Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment for
heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space.
Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control
functions.
C.
Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or
emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers
and sensors.
D.
The CxA along with the HVAC&R Contractor, testing and balancing Contractor, and HVAC&R
Instrumentation and Control Contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and
checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.
E.
Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.
F.
Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to
test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments.
Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and
document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal
operating conditions.
G.
The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.
H.
The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or
simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.
I.
If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system,
document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule
tests.
J.
If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance
tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
18.4
HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES
A.
Boiler Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 15
boiler Sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and boiler certification to the
CxA.
B.
HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing
requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and
"Sequence of Operation." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.
C.
Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are
specified in Division 15 piping Sections. HVAC&R Contractor shall prepare a pipe system
cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating
plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested,
identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to
Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test
section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each
section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system
cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.
Description of equipment for flushing operations.
Minimum flushing water velocity.
Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,
flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.
D.
Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to
test performance of chillers, cooling towers, refrigerant compressors and condensers, heat
pumps, and other refrigeration systems. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and
testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.
E.
HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and
equipment to test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust;
and other distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.
F.
Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test
performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.
END OF SECTION 01815
PART 1 ECTION 02000 - GENERAL SITEWORK REQUIREMENTS
S
PART 2 PART 3 PART 4 ART 1 - GENERAL
P
PART 5 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies the general requirements for the site work included in the
Contract.
B.
These requirements supplement those contained in the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract and their Supplemental Conditions.
C.
References are included in this Section to Articles of the General Conditions to call
the Contractor's attention to frequently needed requirements.
PERMITS
A.
1.03
1.04
Unless otherwise provided owner shall obtain and pay for all construction permits
and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such
permits and licenses. Contractor may pay all charges and inspection fees necessary
for the prosecution of the Work, and may pay all charges of utility owners for
connections to the Work. Contractor may be reimbursed from owner for such
payments.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A.
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work.
B.
If Contractor performs any Work that is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor
shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
therefrom.
UTILITIES
A.
Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the
site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the
owners of such Underground Facilities or by others.
Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such
information or data; and
The cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract and Contractor shall
have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data,
(ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,
(iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during
construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities
and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.
Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous
to the site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, Contractor
shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing
conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except
in an emergency), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written
notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the
Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required
in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the
existence of the Underground Facility. If Engineer concludes that a change in the
Contract Documents is required, revised plans and specifications will be issued, to
reflect and document such consequences. During such time, Contractor shall be
responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.
B.
Contractor shall notify all municipal agencies and utility companies owning or
operating utilities, of proposed work affecting the utilities, or agencies.
C.
Contractor shall give written notification within the time period required by the
agency or company for advance notification. A copy of the notification shall be
furnished to the Engineer.
D.
Contractor shall notify Miss Utility, a minimum of 48 hrs before commencing any
work in the vicinity of existing subsurface utilities.
E.
Contractor shall secure in place existing utilities whose support is affected by the
work and cooperate and assist the agency or company operating the utility in
maintaining the utility services. Contractor shall correct any damage to the utilities
caused by construction operations by repair, or replacement, as required by the
utility Owner. When the repair or replacement is made by the utility Owner,
Contractor shall pay all costs assessed by the utility Owner for the work.
F.
If the existing utilities are found to conflict with the proposed work, the Contractor
shall protect and maintain the utilities and take measurements to determine the
location, type and dimensions of the utility. The information shall be furnished to the
Engineer who will determine the changes required in the proposed work or existing
utilities to resolve the conflict as soon thereafter as is reasonable.
G.
Contractor to verify the location, size, invert elevation and type of existing facilities at
all points of connection prior to ordering new utility materials.
1.05
1.06
SOILS INFORMATION
A.
Subsurface explorations have been conducted by the Owner. The boring logs are
included in the Contract. Jar soil samples may also available for inspection upon
written request to the Geotechnical Engineer.
B.
A geotechnical report by F & R Engineers on site soil conditions has been prepared
for the Owner and is available for inspection.
C.
The soils data is furnished for informational purposes only. The Owner does not
guarantee that the information is representative of all soils, rock and other materials
that may be encountered on the site.
D.
Contractor may make additional subsurface explorations upon written request to,
and upon approval by, the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
SOIL SUPPORT
A.
1.07
Contractor shall furnish and install excavation soil support devices or use soil
strengthening techniques required to perform excavations in accordance with the
current requirements of the Department of Labor, Occupational Health and Safety
Administration and all State and Municipal laws and regulations.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
References are made to technical societies, organizations and groups using the
following abbreviations. All work so referred shall conform to the current edition of
the referenced standard.
GENERAL REFERENCE STANDARDS
AASHTO
ACI
ACOE
AOAC
AGC
ANSI
ASTM
AWPA
AWWA
NEMA
NEWWA
OSHA
UL
American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials
American Concrete Institute
United States Army Corps of Engineers
Association of Official Agricultural Chemists
Associated General Contractors of America
American National Standards Institute
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Wood Preservers Association
American Water Works Association
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
New England Water Works Association
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Underwriters Laboratory
1.08
TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE
A.
Contractor shall maintain access to the site and through the work zones for
personnel and vehicles of emergency services, utility agencies, inspection services
and others authorized to enter, move about and work on the site.
B.
When work is required on public roadways, Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain
and remove all signs, drums, barricades, steel plates and other devices required by
the State or municipality to maintain and protect pedestrians and vehicular traffic.
C.
Protective measures shall be installed at site access points to prevent mud and
other debris from being deposited on the public roadways by construction traffic.
The public roadways shall be swept as required to remove any deposits.
END OF SECTION 02000
SECTION 02100 - SITE PREPARATION AND DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
Description
A.
This Section specifies requirements for site clearing and structure demolition.
B.
The work includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.02
A.
RELATED SECTIONS
Other specification Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
1.03
Protection of existing vegetation to remain
Clearing and grubbing
Selective clearing and thinning
Demolition of structures, retaining walls, signage, light standards, foundations and
appurtenances
Removal and abandonment of utilities
Filling or removal of underground tanks and piping
Disposal of material from clearing, grubbing, thinning and demolition in approved off-site
disposal areas
Filling of voids and excavations resulting from the work
Section 02200 - Earthwork
Section 02270 - Erosion Control
SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Site conditions existing during the bidding period will be maintained by the Owner insofar as
practical.
B.
Actual site condition variations that differ from those of the bidding period that affect site
preparation operations shall be brought to the attention of the Owner prior to the
commencement of any site work.
1.04
A.
SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following information to the Engineer for review before
commencing any site or demolition work:
1.
All permits and notices authorizing demolition
2.
3.
4.
5.
Certificates of utility service severances
Permits for transport and disposal of debris
Demolition procedures and operational sequence
Calculations
PART 2PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3EXECUTION
3.01
UTILITIES
A.
Notify all corporations, companies, individuals or local authorities owning, or having jurisdiction
over, utilities running to, through or across areas to be affected by demolition operations.
B.
Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect them from damage.
C.
Have all discontinued utility services disconnected in accordance with the requirements of the
utility owner.
3.02
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
Clearing shall include cutting, removal, and off-site disposal of trees, brush, shrubs, stumps,
fallen timber, refuse, trash, fencing and other incidental materials not required for reuse on the
site.
B.
The Contractor shall grub the area within the clearing limits to completely remove stumps and
root systems.
C.
Depressions, excavations and voids resulting from the removal of stumps or roots shall be
filled with suitable material and compacted as specified under Section 02300.
3.03
SELECTIVE CLEARING AND THINNING
A.
Selective clearing and thinning shall be completed as directed by the Landscape Architect.
Approximate limits of selective clearing and thinning are shown on the Drawings.
B.
The work shall include the removal of dead and diseased tree limbs and plants, and pruning
and removal of live vegetation that interferes with the growth of other trees and plants. Areas
of dense growth shall be thinned to provide room for healthy growth.
3.04
DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conduct demolition operations in a manner that will prevent damage to adjacent structures,
utilities, pavements and other facilities to remain.
B.
Cease operations immediately if any damage, settlement or other adverse effect on adjacent
structures occurs. However, if an obvious unsafe condition is created that would potentially
cause injury to persons or undue harm to properties, the Contractor shall take whatever
measures are warranted to prevent such injury or harm. Immediately notify the Engineer and
regulatory authorities. Do not resume operations until conditions are corrected, damage
repaired and approval has been received from the appropriate authorities and Owner’s
Representative.
C.
Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will
traverse, infringe upon or affect access to their property. Copies of the permission documents
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
D.
Provide hoses and water connections. Spray water on demolition debris to minimize dust.
E.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work.
F.
All hazardous waste removal shall be performed by a hazardous waste Contractor qualified
and duly licensed by the Commonwealth of Virginia to remove, transport and dispose of each
type of hazardous substance.
G.
Comply with state and local and/or state regulations pertaining to the crushing, processing,
and reuse of Asphalt, Brick and Concrete Rubble.
3.05
DEMOLITION
A.
Demolish buildings completely and remove from site, or remove intact, in accordance with the
approved permits, procedures and operational sequence.
B.
Locate demolition equipment and remove materials in a manner that prevents excessive
loading to supporting walls, floors, or framing.
C.
Remove all debris and other materials from basement areas.
D.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor may break up and leave in place concrete floor
slabs that are 4 or more feet below finished grade. Remove all concrete foundations and
floors within 4 feet of finished grade.
3.06
FILLING BASEMENT AND VOIDS
A.
Completely fill all voids including, but not limited to, basement areas, excavation areas, and
voids resulting from demolition or removal of structures including underground fuel storage
tanks, wells and cisterns with suitable material as specified in Section 02200.
B.
Areas to be filled shall be free of standing water, frost, frozen, and unsuitable material prior to
fill placement.
C.
Place and compact fill materials in conformance with the requirements of Section 02300.
D.
Grade filled area surface to match adjacent grades and slope to provide surface drainage.
3.07
A.
REMOVAL AND ABANDONMENT OF UTILITIES
All existing structures, utilities, and appurtenances of any kind shall be completely removed
within the limits of excavation for new building(s).
B.
Outside the limits of excavation for the new building(s), all abandoned utilities and utility
structures greater than 8 inches in diameter located at least 4 feet below bottom of finished
grade shall be sealed with concrete or brick masonry at the limit of excavation. All utilities
shall be entirely removed within 4 feet of finished grade.
C.
Manholes and catch basins designated to be abandoned shall have all lines plugged with brick
and mortar prior to filling with sand or gravel. The top 4 feet of these structures shall be
removed and the bottom slab broken up prior to filling.
D.
The Contractor shall remove frames, covers, and grates from manholes, catch basins and
gate valves and satisfactorily store and protect them until they are required for reuse in the
work. Existing frames, covers and grates determined by the Engineer to be unsuitable for
reuse shall be removed from the site.
3.08
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
Remove from site all materials resulting from demolition operations.
B.
No burning of any material will be allowed unless otherwise specified.
END OF SECTION 02100
SECTION 02140 - DEWATERING AND CONSTRUCTION SURFACE WATER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies the requirements for control of surface and subsurface water
within the site.
B.
The work includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.03
Control of surface water runoff to prevent flooding of excavations, trenches
and adjacent properties, and the loosening and saturation of soils.
Removal of subsurface water from excavations and trenches.
Provision of equipment and facilities to remove sediment and control the rates
and volumes of disposal of surface and subsurface waters removed from the
work areas.
Provisions for the protection of adjacent and down gradient environmental
resources.
Section 02100—Site Preparation and Demolition
Section 02200—Earthwork
Section 02400—Storm Drainage System
Section 02270A—Erosion Control
Section 02570—Sewerage Collection System
DEWATERING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Contractor shall design the dewatering systems to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure and lower the groundwater levels
to a minimum of 2 feet below the bottom of excavations or to a depth
specified or directed by the geotechnical engineer;
Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for the proposed work;
Prevent damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities and
other facilities;
Ensure that, after 12 hours of initial pumping, no soil particles will be present
in the discharge.
Retain all sediments on-site within the work area.
Locate dewatering facilities where they will not interfere with utilities and
construction work to be done by others.
C.
1.04
Modify dewatering equipment and procedures when operations threaten to cause
damage to new or existing facilities or adjacent areas not within the limit of work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Prior to installation of the dewatering system, submit working drawings and design
data for review by the Engineer with the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The proposed types of dewatering systems;
Arrangement, location and depths of system components;
Complete description of equipment and instrumentation to be used including
installation, operation and maintenance procedures;
Types and sizes of filters;
Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of the proposed system and
equipment; and
Provisions and methods of sediment removal and disposal of water.
All permits required for the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
SURFACE WATER CONTROL
A.
Intercept and divert surface water runoff away from excavations through the use of
dikes, curb walls, ditches, pipes, sumps or other approved means.
B.
Provide and maintain ditches of adequate size to collect and prevent surface and
subsurface water seepage from entering the excavations. Divert the water to
settling basins or other approved equipment required to reduce the amount of fine
particles before discharge into drainage pipes and natural water courses. If a
drainage system or water course becomes blocked due to dewatering operation, it
shall be cleaned by Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Any enforcement
actions or fines resulting from improper dewatering and/or discharge of turbid water
and sediment to protected areas shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
DEWATERING EXCAVATIONS
A.
Accomplish dewatering in accordance with the means and methods submitted as
required in Article 1.04 and approved by the Engineer. Keep the Engineer advised
of any changes required to accommodate field conditions and, on completion of the
dewatering system installation, revise and resubmit the information required to show
the installed system.
B.
Perform dewatering operations to lower the groundwater level in excavations as
required to provide a stable, dry subgrade for the prosecution of the proposed work.
C.
Maintain dewatering operations in a manner that prevents buildup of excessive
hydrostatic pressure and damage to structures, and the subgrade.
D.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Contractor shall provide and
maintain at all times ample means and devices to remove promptly, and to dispose
of properly, all water entering excavations and to keep them dry until the proposed
work is completed.
E.
Do not discharge water to protected environmental resources without treatment to
remove suspended solids and sediments.
F.
No pipe shall be laid in water. No masonry shall be laid in water, and no water shall
be allowed to inundate new concrete and new brick masonry within 48 hours after
installation. Contractor shall constantly guard against the possibility of flotation of
pipe or structures after installation. Backfill or other means shall be placed promptly
to prevent this occurrence.
END OF SECTION 02140
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment, appliances, transportation,
supervision, and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this
section, and as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Provisions of
the Contract Documents.
C.
A Geotechnical Report has been prepared in relation to the project, and if so, it is
made available to the Contractor. If a potential conflict exists between the
Geotechnical Report and these technical specifications, the Contractor shall,
immediately upon its discovery, request clarification from the Owner’s
Representative.
D.
The work of this section includes but is not necessarily limited to:
1.
Excavation, fill, and backfill, as indicated or required, including compaction.
2.
Excavation, as required, to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Excavation and offsite disposal of unsuitable or excess materials unless onsite locations are designated. Excavation shall include removal and
satisfactory disposal of all unclassified material encountered throughout the
site.
4.
Rough grading, including placement, moisture conditioning and compaction of
fills and backfill.
5.
Placement of base and subbase course materials under structures,
pavements, slabs and footings, including compaction.
6.
Trench excavation, bedding and backfill for structures, foundations, and
utilities, including compaction.
7.
The removal, hauling and stockpiling of suitable excavated materials for
subsequent use in the work. Stockpiling shall include protection to maintain
materials in a workable condition.
8.
Rehandling, hauling and placing of stockpiled materials for use in refilling,
filling, backfilling, grading and such other operations.
9.
Protect and preserve all existing buildings, pavements, and utilities to remain.
10.
Furnishing and installing all sheeting, shoring, and bracing of structural and
trench excavations and its satisfactory removal, unless otherwise directed to
have it remain in place.
1.02
Environmental controls.
12.
Providing products in sufficient quantities to meet the project requirements.
13.
Providing adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep the work area
sufficiently dry.
14.
Obtain all required permits, licenses, and approvals of appropriate municipal
and utility authorities, prior to commencing the work of this Section, and pay
costs incurred therefrom.
E.
Provide facilities, labor, materials, tools, equipment, appliances, and related work
necessary to provide and maintain erosion control during construction operations.
All erosion control measures shall be installed prior to earthwork operations and
shall be maintained according to plans and other sections of the specifications.
F.
Contractor shall be responsible for notifying all affected utility companies and Dig
Safe before starting work.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A.
1.03
11.
Work shall be accomplished in accordance with regulations of local, City and state
agencies and national or utility company standards as they apply.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The Owner may retain and pay for the services of an independent testing and
inspection firm and/or a Geotechnical Consultant to perform on-site observation and
testing during the various phases of the construction operations. The scope of
services will be determined by the Owner and the independent testing and
inspection firm and/or the Geotechnical Consultant and will be provided to the
contractor. The Owner reserves the right to modify or waive the services of the
independent testing and inspection firm and/or the Geotechnical Consultant. The
services of a Geotechnical Consultant/Inspection and testing firm may include, buy
not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1.
Observation during excavation and dewatering of building and controlled fill
areas.
2.
Observation during backfilling and compacting operations within that area
defined as building area or controlled fill area and other areas as appropriate.
3.
Laboratory testing and analysis of fill materials as specified herein and
proposed by the Contractor for incorporation into the Work.
4.
Observation of construction and performance of water content, gradation and
compaction tests at a frequency and locations that he shall select. The results
of these tests will be submitted to the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor on a
timely basis so that action can be taken to remedy indicated deficiencies.
During the course of construction, the Geotechnical Consultant will advise the
Owner in writing if at any time in his opinion the Work hereunder is of
unacceptable quality. Failure of Geotechnical Consultant to give notice, shall
not excuse the Contractor from latent defects discovered in his work.
B.
The contractor shall make provisions for allowing observations and testing of
contractor’s Work by the independent testing and inspection firm and/or the
Geotechnical Consultant.
The presence of the independent testing and inspection firm and/or the Geotechnical
Consultant does not include supervision or direction of the actual work of the
Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the independent
testing and inspection firm and /or the Geotechnical Consultant, nor any
observations and testing performed by them, nor failure to give notice of defects
shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work.
1.04
C.
Costs related to retesting due to unacceptable qualities of work and failures
discovered by testing shall be paid for by the Contractor at no additional expense to
Owner, and the costs thereof will be deducted by the Owner from the Contract Sum.
D.
Whenever floodplain compensation areas are designated on the plans, grading
elevations are to be considered critical to the floodplain volumetric calculations and
shall be constructed by the Contractor in strict conformance with the indicated
grades.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in an airtight container for the testing laboratory, a 50-pound sample of each
type of off-site fill material that is to be used at the site. Submit samples a minimum
of one week prior to use of proposed material at the site. Submit samples to the
testing laboratory and the Geotechnical Consultant (copy of these transmittal forms
shall be sent to Engineer) or if no testing and/or Geotechnical Consultant is
identified then the Engineer shall be the recipient of the samples. Use of these
proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval shall be at the
Contractor's risk.
B.
Submit the name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each
material. Any change in source throughout the job requires approval of the Owner
or Engineer.
C.
For use of fabrics or geogrids, submit manufacturer's literature for review by the
Engineer.
1.05
1.06
COORDINATION
A.
Prior to start of earthwork the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the
Engineer, the independent testing firm, and the Geotechnical Consultant for the
purpose of establishing the Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling
observation and testing procedures and requirements.
B.
As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the
Engineer prior to the start of earthwork operations requiring observation and/or
testing.
SUBSURFACE SOIL DATA
A.
A geotechnical engineering report has been prepared by Froeling & Robertson, Inc.
This report is available to bidders for informational purposes for use in preparing
their bids.
B.
Review logs of borings, jar soil samples, records of explorations and other pertinent
data for the site. After obtaining Owner's permission, take whatever additional
subsurface explorations deemed necessary at no expense to the Owner.
C.
Boring logs are appended to these specifications. Jar soil samples may be
examined upon written request to the Engineer.
D.
The above data are for general information and are accurate only at the particular
locations and times the subsurface explorations were made. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to make interpretations and to draw conclusions based on the
character of materials to be encountered and the impact of his work based on his
expert knowledge of the area and of earthwork techniques.
E.
The Drawings in the geotechnical report showing existing ground elevations are only
for whatever use the Contractor may make of them with no responsibility on the part
of the Surveyors, the Owner, and/or their Representatives for the accuracy and/or
the reliability of the information given.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Subgrade is the material in excavation (cuts) and fills located below: subbase, base
course layer for slabs, sidewalks, pavement, and other improvements.
B.
Common Fill/Ordinary Borrow shall be friable soil containing no stone greater than
two-thirds (2/3) the loose lift thickness with a maximum stone size of twelve (12)
inches in diameter. The material shall be essentially free of trash, ice snow, tree
stumps, roots, and organic materials. The soil shall contain no more than 15
percent passing the #200 sieve.
Gravel shall consist of inert material that is hard, durable stone and coarse sand,
free from loam, clay, surface coatings and deleterious materials, and shall conform
to the following gradation:
C.
Sieve
(ASTM D422)
*
1/2-inch
No. 4
No. 10
No. 40
No. 100
No. 200
*
D.
Percent
Passing
100
50-85
40-75
30-60
10-35
5-20
2-10
Four inches (4") where placed as base below slab and pavement; One and one
half inches (1 ½”) where placed as pipe bedding and backfill up to 24 inches
above pipe; and elsewhere two thirds (2/3) the loose lift thickness.
Sand shall consist of clean, inert, hard, durable grains of quartz or other hard,
durable rock, free from loam or clay, surface coatings and deleterious materials.
The allowable amount of material passing a No. 200 sieve as determined by AASHTO-T11
or ASTM D: 422 shall not exceed 10 percent by weight. The maximum particle size
shall be 1/4-inch (i.e., 100 percent passing the No. 4 sieve).
E.
Crushed Stone shall be composed of durable crushed rock consisting of angular
fragments, free from a detrimental quantity of thin, flat, elongated pieces or shall be
durable crushed gravel stone obtained by artificial crushing of gravel boulders or
fieldstone.
The crushed stone shall be free from clay, loam or deleterious material.
Crushed Stone shall conform to the following gradations:
Sieve Size
1 inch
3/4 inch
5/8 inch
1/2 inch
3/8 inch
No. 4
No. 8
Sieve Size
2 inch
1-1/2 inch
1-1/4 inch
1 inch
3/4 inch
1/2 inch
Percent Passing By Weight
1/2-Inch Stone
3/4-Inch Stone
----100
85-100
15-45
--0-5
100
90-100
--10-50
0-20
0-5
---
Percent Passing By Weight
1-1/2-Inch Stone
2-Inch Stone
100
95-100
--35-70
0-25
---
90-100
--25-50
--0-15
---
F.
Dense-graded Crushed Stone for subbase and base
Dense-graded Crushed Stone shall conform to the following gradation:
Percent Passing By Weight
2-Inch Stone
Sieve Size
2 inch
1-1/2 inch
3/4 inch
No. 4
No. 50
No. 200
G.
100
70-100
50-85
30-55
8-24
3-10
Structural Fill
1.
Structural Fill shall be free from ice and snow, roots, sod, rubbish and other
deleterious or organic matter. If not otherwise specified in the geotechnical
report, structural fill shall conform to the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
*
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
Percent Finer
By Weight
100
30-95
10-70
0-15
* Two thirds (2/3) of the loose lift thickness.
L.
Blast Rock Fill shall be well-graded blasted rock formed and processed when on-site
rock is removed by blasting or chipping methods, with a maximum size hereinafter
specified. Well-graded means that at least twenty-five percent (25%) is less than six
inches (6") in size, and at least ten percent (10%) is less than three-quarters inch
(3/4") in size. The Contractor shall vary drilling and blasting procedures as needed
and/or select materials sources in order to meet these gradation requirements.
Blast rock fill may be placed to within forty-two (42") of finish grade in pavement and
building floor slab areas and to within eighteen inches (18") of inverts or utility lines
and bottom of foundations. The first lift over the top of rock fill shall be a choke
stone layer eighteen inches (18") thick which shall be a well-graded mixture with a
maximum stone size less than nine inches (9"). Compaction shall be by minimum of
four (4) coverages of a self-propelled vibratory drum roller in each direction (i.e.,
north-south and east-west). The minimum weight of the drum shall be ten thousand
pounds (10,000 lbs.).
Rock shall not be placed within a five foot (5') horizontal distance on either side of
any proposed utility line. The intent is to leave a zone of Structural Fill that can later
be excavated for installation of utilities. Also, large rock fragments should be kept
away from the utility pipes.
M.
Choke Stone shall be hard, durable, clean, rock with a maximum rock diameter of 9
inches and shall conform to the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
9 inches
6 inches
2 inches
¾ inches
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
Percent Passing
By Weight
100
75-100
70-85
45-60
15-30
5-15
0-10
N.
Stone Fill shall be hard, durable, clean, washed rock with a minimum diameter of 11/2 inches and a maximum diameter of 3 inches with void ratio of 30 to 40 percent.
O.
Revetment shall consist of slope protection of the required type at the location
shown on the plans, and in conference with the lines and grades shown on the
plans.
1.
Channel Paving and Grouted Channel Paving. Channel Paving, of the type
specified, shall be placed as protective covering along the slopes around
culvert inlets or outlets, around foundations, structure and dikes.
Stones for Channel Paving and Grouted Channel Paving shall be sound,
approved quality angular blocks, as nearly rectangular or cubical as
practicable. Rounded stones or relatively thin slabs will not be acceptable. At
lease 75 percent of the volume shall consist of stones weighing at least 200
pounds each. The remainder of the stones shall be go graded that when
placed with the larger stones a compact mass will result.
P.
2.
Filter Layer. The Filter Layer of stone shall be used under Riprap, Stone for
Pipe Ends, Slope Paving, and Channel Paving (grouted or non-grouted). The
Filter Layer shall be minimum of 12-inches in thickness and shall be
constructed in two layers. The first layer shall consist of 6 inches of densegraded crushed stone for subbase and base, consolidated in place. The
second layer shall be one half (1/2) inch crushed stone consolidated in place.
3.
Filter fabric used with riprap, stone for pipe ends, slope paving, or channel
paving (grouted or ungrouted) shall be as specified in VDOT’s Road and
Bridge Standards for Filter Fabric under stone or Riprap. See VDOT Road
and Bridge Standards and VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications (latest
edition)
Filter Fabric/Geotextiles:
1.
Geotextile Fabric shall be used to prevent soil intrusion into drains and/or
assist in stabilizing soil subgrades to be laid on approved soil subgrades prior
to placement of fill materials.
a.
Q.
Contractor shall use Geotextile Filter Fabric as specified in VDOT’s Road
and Bridge Specifications (Latest Eddition) or equivalent filter fabric in
drainage recharge systems, underdrain systems between crushed stone
and granular soils, leaching areas or where indicated on the plans.
Controlled Low Strength Material or Controlled Density Fill
Controlled low strength material or controlled density fill shall be a cement concrete backfill
material that flows like a liquid, supports like a solid when cured, and levels without
tamping or vibrating to reach 100 percent compaction. The material shall be used
primarily as a backfill in lieu of compacted fill. The material shall be proportioned to
yield a 28—day minimum compressive strength of 200 pounds per square inch. The
material shall be produced and installed in accordance with ACI 229R, and ACI
116R, with a mix formulation to be approved prior to placement of the material in the
project.
S.
Topsoil/Loam (Unless otherwise specified under the landscape project
specifications):
1.
Topsoil (stripped from site) or Loam (supplied from off-site) shall be a sandy
loam or loam soil classification as defined by the USDA Soil Conservation
Service, Soil Classification System consisting of a fertile, friable, natural
topsoil/loam typical of locality, without admixture of subsoil, refuse or other
foreign materials, shall be obtained from a well-drained arable site, and shall
meet ASTM D5268. It shall be such a mixture of sand, silt and clay particles
as to exhibit sandy and clayey properties in about equal proportions. It shall
be free of stumps, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 3/4-inch in
diameter, lumps, coarse sand, noxious weeds, sticks, brush or other litter, and
shall have the following mechanical analysis:
Textural Class
Sand 0.05 - 2.0mm dia. Range
Silt 0.002 - 0.05mm dia. Range
Clay less than 0.002mm dia. Range
a.
b.
% of Total
Weight
Average
%
45 to 75
15 to 35
5 to 25
60
25
25
95 percent of Topsoil shall pass a 2.0mm sieve.
Topsoil/Loam shall have a pH value range of 6.0 to 7.0. If Topsoil/Loam
material does not fall within the required pH range, limestone or
aluminum sulfate shall be added to bring the pH within the specified limit.
2.02
2.
Prior to stripping, the topsoil shall demonstrate, by the occurrence upon it of
healthy crops, grass or other vegetative growth, that it is reasonably well
drained and that it does not contain toxic amounts of either acid or alkaline
elements.
3.
Loam and topsoil shall contain not less than 4 percent nor more than 20
percent organic matter as determined by the loss on ignition of oven-dried
samples. Test sample shall be oven-dried to a constant weight at a
temperature of 230F 9.
4.
In other portions of this specifications, the words “loam” and “topsoil” are used
interchangeably.
USE OF MATERIALS
Use of materials shall be as described below and as shown on the plans. Further details can
be found in the project plans. Combinations or layering of materials may be necessary in
certain instances such as for detention embankments, subsurface disposal areas, and riprap
walls as examples.
G.
A.
Common/Ordinary Fill: Use common/ordinary fill for general grading, as backfill,
embankment fill in areas outside the building and pavement limits. [Stones larger
than twelve inches (12") shall be removed prior to compaction.]
B.
Gravel: Use for pipe bedding backfill and backfill below pavement and slab as base
course layer. Use for material placed "in the wet". Use for backfill behind retaining
walls and retaining structures. Use for pipe and utility bedding.
C.
Sand: Use for conduit bedding and initial backfill, and gas line bedding and backfill.
Use for bedding and backfill of direct burial cables and/or flexible piping.
D.
Crushed Stone: Use crushed stone as a filter material around perforated pipe, as
bedding for piping under wet subgrade conditions.
E.
Dense-Graded Crushed Stone: Use dense-graded crushed stone for sub-base and
base material.
Structural Fill: Use structural fill below subgrade elevation in building areas such as beneath
floor slabs, foundations, and in other soil bearing situations. Structural fill shall also be used for
backfill against building foundations and frost walls. Use structural fills below pavement gravel
base course.
G.
Blast Rock Fill: Refer to Section 2.01 for definition and use.
H.
Stone Fill: Use stone fill as additional storage medium for underground stormwater
exfiltration trenches or pits.
I.
Filter Fabric/Geotextiles: To be used as filter barriers between drainage recharge
systems, underdrain systems, wastewater absorption systems, and between natural
earth material and backfill or other materials to assist in stabilizing soil subgrades.
J.
Channel Paving and Grouted Channel Paving: Use stone for Channel Paving and
Grouted Channel Paving in and around water courses to prevent erosion, scour and
instability of the channel bottom and side slopes.
K.
Filter Layer: Use filter stone layer under riprap, stone for pipe ends, slope paving,
channel paving and grouted channel paving or where indicated.
L.
Controlled Low Strength Material or Controlled Density Fill: Shall be used for trench
backfill, anti-floatation bases, and/or lightweight backfill.
M.
Topsoil/Loam: Use as fill in designated landscape and lawn areas, if off-site material
is required Loam shall be furnished and installed. Topsoil maybe used as fill in
landscape and lawn areas, if an excess of topsoil exists on-site.
N.
Wetland Soil/Organic Materials: Use a wetland soils in wetland replication areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
Strip all topsoil, subsoil and other unsuitables to its full depth within the Contract
limits. In building areas, limits of excavation are defined in Section 3.03 B.
B
Under pavement areas, unsuitable materials shall be removed and disposed of by
the Contractor in an Approved location, or if no Approved location exists on site to
an Approved off site location and replaced with structural fill. Treatment of existing
fill and removal of topsoil, subsoil and stumps are defined in Section 3.03 B.8.
These materials shall be processed to remove all roots, stones larger than 3/4 inch
in diameter and other deleterious materials. Stockpile as approved by the Engineer.
Protect the topsoil from contamination by other materials.
C.
Remove all topsoil, subsoil, vegetative matter, and non-soil materials and, after
screening out the roots, rocks greater than ¾ inch in size, and deleterious debris,
separately stockpile the topsoil and subsoil materials.
DEWATERING
A.
Provide, operate and maintain site and subsurface drainage and dewatering in an
acceptable manner as required to complete the work throughout the course of the
project.
3.03
B.
Remove, by pumping or other means, water accumulated in excavations and within
two (2) feet below subgrade until earthwork, utilities, concrete, and other work
operations are complete. Dewatering shall be considered incidental to the defined
work items and costs for performing same shall be included in the bid price(s) and
no separate payment shall be made to the Contractor for dewatering operations.
C.
Provide, maintain, and operate wells, pumps and related equipment, including
stand-by equipment, of sufficient capacity to maintain excavations and trenches free
of water 24 hours per day to enable all work to be conducted in-the-dry and to
protect bearing surfaces from disturbance.
D.
Water from excavations shall be disposed of in such manner as will not cause injury
to public health, public and private property, existing work, work to be completed or
in progress, roads, walks, and streets, or cause any interference with use of same
by public. Concrete or fill shall not be placed in excavations containing free water.
E.
Construction may require excavation below water level in
soil. The Contractor shall complete this work in-the-dry to maintain the undistributed
condition of the bearing soil.
F.
Maintain groundwater at least 12 inches below lowest exposed subgrade level. If
the dewatering methods have not been adequate and the bearing soils are
disturbed, remove disturbed soil and replace with compacted Structural Fill or lean
concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.
G.
Sumps shall be surrounded by suitable filter media to minimize the fines removed
during pumping.
H.
Pumped groundwater and surface water runoff shall be initially pumped to a settling
basin to remove suspended solids prior to discharge. The Contractor shall furnish
all treatment systems that are necessary for pretreatment of groundwater prior to
discharge in accordance with all applicable permits and regulations.
I.
Discharge of pumped water, either surface water runoff or groundwater, shall be in
compliance with discharge criteria contained in permits issued by governing
agencies, and all legal requirements and regulations. All permits shall be obtained
by the Contractor.
EXCAVATIONS
A.
1.
General Definitions
Unclassified Materials
Unclassified excavation includes the satisfactory removal and disposal of all
materials (except contaminated materials defined below) encountered
regardless of the nature of the materials and shall be understood to include,
but not be limited to, blastrock, bedrock, earth, hardpan, fill, foundations,
pavements, curbs, piping, railroad track and ties, cobblestones, footings,
bricks, concrete, abandoned drainage and utility structures, and debris.
Drilling, blasting, excavation and disposal of rock shall be considered
unclassified excavation and shall be included as a part of the contract price,
with no separate payment items for its excavation and handling.
2.
Contaminated Materials:
a.
The Contractor shall be familiar with the Virginia Department of
Environmental Quality (DEQ) Hazardous Waste Regulations when
conducting earthwork operations.
b. In general, a hazardous waste (contaminated with oil or hazardous
materials) is a waste or combination of wastes which, because of its
quantity, concentration, physical, chemical or infectious characteristics,
may cause, or significantly contribute to, an increase in mortality or an
increase in serious irreversible or incapacitating reversible illness or pose
a substantial present or potential hazard to human health, safety, or
welfare, or to the environment when improperly stored, treated,
transported, or disposed of, or otherwise managed.
c.
The Contractor shall immediately halt soil movement activities and notify
the Owner if visual, olfactory or other evidence suggests that soils may
be contaminated with oil or hazardous materials. Contractor shall
provide reasonable assistance to Owner and to Owner’s representative
for access to potential contamination areas for proper assessment of
hazardous conditions.
d.
Unless testing has been previously performed, the Owner shall contact
an environmental professional (such as a Licensed Site Professional) to
test any earth materials suspected of containing hazardous waste. The
Owner shall inform the Contractor of the laboratory test results as soon
as possible and discuss the possible soil management, disposal,
recycling options available. Contaminated soils shall be managed and
handled in compliance with the referenced state/federal regulations,
guidelines and policies. Time and expenses associated with
contaminated soils shall be negotiated between the Contractor and the
Owner prior to the start of the soil management, disposal, recycling work.
Owner reserves the right to negotiate and contract with other entities for
remedial and, in that event, this Contractor shall make reasonable
accommodations for other entities to perform this work.
e.
There is a possibility of the presence of oil or hazardous material wastes
on this site. Appropriate testing, as recommended by an environmental
professional, shall be accomplished to assess the potential presence of
oil or hazardous material. Earth material shall not be removed from the
site unless on-site reuse is not possible.
f.
g.
Proper documentation of legal disposal of hazardous materials handled
by this contractor shall be provided by the Contractor to the Owner,
Engineer, and review authorities.
Unless specifically identified as contaminated material under referenced
statues and as defined above, as judged by the engineer, excavated
materials shall be considered unclassified as defined in item 1. above.
B.
Site General Requirements
1.
Control the grading so that ground is pitched to prevent water from running to
excavated areas, damaging other structures, or adjacent properties.
2.
Where soil has been softened or eroded by flooding, equipment, traffic, or
placement during unfavorable weather, or such other conditions, it shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor with suitable material, and at no cost
to the Owner.
3.
Exercise care to preserve the material below and beyond the lines of
excavation. Where excavation is carried out below indicated grade or beyond
the lines of excavation, Contractor shall backfill and compact the over
excavation with structural fill to the indicated grade, at no additional cost to
the Owner and at the direction of the Engineer.
4.
Provide sheeting, shoring and bracing to complete and protect all excavated
areas, as required for safety and compliance with OSHA. Costs for sheeting,
shoring, and bracing shall be included as a part of the contract price for
completing the work and Owner shall make no separate payment for this
work.
5.
Excavated materials unsuitable for reuse, surplus excavated rock and surplus
excavated soil not used to fulfill requirements of the Contract, shall become
the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site in
accordance with the regulations and requirements of all municipalities or
agencies having jurisdiction over the disposal sites and the route between the
project and the disposal sites.
6.
Limits of excavation are such that all unsuitable material will be removed to
firm natural ground in the manner specified below. In building areas,
unsuitable materials shall be removed to a distance of five feet (5’) beyond
the building lines or within the area defined by a one horizontal to one vertical
(1h:1v) line sloping down from outside bottom edge of exterior footings to firm
natural ground, whichever is greater. Limits of unsuitable material excavation
also apply to areas below exterior column footings. All abandoned pipes
within building areas are to be removed and the excavations are to be
properly backfilled.
7. In addition to unsuitable material identified in the geotechnical report, unsuitable
materials are classified as organics such as peat, trash, fill, stumps, debris,
material determined to be hazardous, and topsoil and subsoil when determined
by Engineer to be unacceptable for incorporation into the work.
8.
Under pavement areas, existing fill will be densified in place and will not be
excavated. Topsoil need not be excavated from pavement areas if located
more than three feet (3’) below finish pavement grades. Trees are to be cut
flush with ground and stumps shall be left in place if the existing ground
surface is located more than six feet (6’) below finish grades. Abandoned
pipes, that are buried more than four feet (4’) from finish grade to the top of
the pipe and that do not interfere with utilities to remain or to be installed, shall
be grouted and left in place. Abandoned pipes less that four feet from finish
grade shall be removed and the trench appropriately backfilled with structural
fill.
C.
9.
All suitable material, as determined by the Engineer, may be reused on the
site, provided it meets the gradation requirements for the given materials in
the information of fill sections, enbankments, subgrades, backfills, etc.
10.
Do not over excavate below proposed design grades for the purpose of
obtaining borrow for use off-site.
Proof-rolling
1. Prior to placing compacted fills, the Contractor shall proof roll the natural grades
to remain. Where materials of low density are indicated by rutting or weaving
under the compactor, the Contractor may be required to make up to three (3)
additional complete coverages of the area with the compactor as determined by
the Engineer. The cost of all proof rolling shall be included in the Contract Sum.
If materials of low density are encountered that cannot be compacted to the
extent necessary to support the proposed embankment fills as determined by
the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove those materials and replace them with
compacted fill.
2. Alternately, an initial layer of fill may be allowed to form a working platform. The
need, manner of construction, and thickness of such a layer shall be subject to
approval of the Engineer and the layer will be permitted only where the lack of
support is, as determined by the Engineer, not due to deficient ditching, grading
or drainage practices, or where the embankment could be constructed in the
approved manner by the use of different equipment or procedures. Thickness of
up to eighteen (18) inches may be permitted for such a layer.
3.05
PREPARATION OF EXCAVATION BOTTOMS
A.
B.
General Site Areas
1.
Rock surfaces to receive backfill shall have a maximum slope of four (4)
horizontal to one (1) vertical.
2.
Rock excavations carried below design grade and clearances shall be
backfilled with lean concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 1500
psi.
Building and Pavement Areas
1.
Loose rock is covered with 6 inches of crushed stone or choke stone; and
2.
Prior to placing crushed or choked stone, the area is rolled with at least four
passes of a heavy vibratory roller
3.
Proofroll subgrade with a vibratory roller or by minimum three passes of a fully
loaded ten-wheeled dump truck. Soft and other objectionable material
(stumbs, wood, organics) shall be excavated and backfilled with compacted
structural fill.
4.
Prior to the placement of blast rock fill over a bedrock subgrade, voids in the
rock surface shall be choked off with appropriately graded crushed stone or
Compacted Structural Fill placed on filter fabric to prevent migration of fines
into fractures, as directed by the Owner’s Representative.
C.
Subgrades under proposed landscape areas.
1.
D.
Depth to rock under planting areas shall be a minimum of 48 inches below
subgrade elevations. Backfill to subgrade shall be with topsoil/loam materials.
Trenches
1.
Compaction equipment used in open areas where space permits shall consist
of vibratory rollers weighing at least 15,000 pounds, fully loaded ten-wheel
dump trucks, pneumatic compactors or other similar equipment.
3. Compaction equipment for fill against foundation walls and in other confined
areas shall be accomplished by means of drum-type, power-driven, hand-guided
vibratory compactors operating at 2,000 cycles per minute, or by hand-guided
vibratory plate tampers.
3.06
BACKFILLING AND PLACEMENT OF FILL MATERIALS
A.
Site
1.
Dewater subgrade areas prior to filling.
2.
Compaction by puddling or jetting is prohibited.
3.
Control groundwater and surface runoff to minimize disturbance of exposed
natural ground surface, previously placed and compacted fill and material
being placed.
4.
Soil fill moisture shall be maintained at an acceptable working range to allow
for proper compaction.
5.
Do not place fill on frozen ground.
6.
Do not place frozen fill.
7.
Place fill in uniform horizontal layers and compact immediately after
placement. Where the horizontal layer meets a rising slope, the layer shall be
keyed into the slope by cutting a bench during spreading of preceding lift.
8.
To the extent that is practical, each layer of fill shall be compacted to the
specific density the same day it is placed.
9.
Slope fill surfaces at the end of each day to provide for free surface drainage.
10.
Protect structures and pipes from damage during backfilling operations.
Repair damage at no cost to owner.
11.
Placement of fill shall not begin prior to observation and approval of subgrade
conditions by Engineer.
B.
C.
12.
Protect foundations, footings, and waterproofing during backfilling. Repair
damage at no cost to Owner.
13.
Prior to backfilling between foundation wall and sheeting, remove unsuitable
material, including rubbish, organic materials or other debris. Do not
commence filling operations until conditions have been observed by Engineer.
14.
Backfill shall not be placed against walls until they are braced or have cured
sufficiently to develop strength necessary to withstand, without damage,
pressure from backfilling and compacting operations.
15.
Provide shoring, sheeting, and bracing of excavations as required to assure
complete safety against collapse of the earth at the site of excavations.
Alternatively, lay back excavations to suitable slope.
16.
Upon completion of the work, the final ground surface shall be left in a firm,
unyielding, true, uniform condition free from ruts. Repair disturbed areas
caused equipment traffic at no cost to Owners.
Equipment
1.
Compaction equipment used in open areas where space permits shall consist
of vibratory rollers weighting at least 15,000 pounds, fully loaded ten-wheel
dump trucks, pneumatic compactors of other similar equipment.
2.
Compaction equipment for fill against foundation walls and in other confined
areas shall be accomplished by means of drum-type, power-driven, handguided vibratory compactors operating at 2,000 cycles per minute, or by
hand-guided vibratory plate tampers.
Blast Rock Backfill – Structure and Foundation Backfilling and Compacting
1.
Prior to the placement of blast rock fill over a bedrock subgrade, voids in the
bedrock surface shall be choked off with appropriately graded crushed stone
or choke stone to prevent migration of fines into fractures as approved by the
Owner’s Representative.
2.
Blast rock fill and crushed stone shall be placed and compacted as indicated
below:
a.
Maximum lift thickness prior to compaction is 24 in.
b.
Material shall be dumped 25 feet behind the fill face and pushed forward
to allow mixing and removal of oversized rock and backfilling voids.
c.
Should the maximum size of blast rock exceed 18 inches; then use a
rock rake with teeth spaced at 18 inches or other means to separate and
remove oversized rock.
d.
Provide a minimum of eighteen-inch thick transition zone of choke stone
between blast rock fill and granular fill materials. All blastrock fill shall be
choked with a transition zone of choke stone, where structural fill is to be
placed above or adjacent to it.
D.
e.
Compact each lift of blast rock fill with a minimum of eight passes of a
vibratory drum roller that imparts a minimum dynamic force equal to
20,000 lbs.
f.
Crushed Stone and choke stone placement shall not exceed a maximum
lift thickness of 12 inches prior to compaction.
Placing Fill
1.
Fill sections and embankments shall be constructed of earth, rock or a
mixture of earth and rock deposited in successive lifts. Except as hereinafter permitted,
the loose thickness of each lift shall not be more than eight (8) inches before compaction.
2.
Rock fill may be used in deep fill areas, placed to the levels and under the conditions
described in Section 2.01 L.
3.
No rock in excess of six (6) inches in its largest dimension shall be incorporated in the top
two (2) foot layer of embankment immediately below the subgrade.
4.
During fill and embankment construction operations, earth moving equipment shall be
routed as evenly as possible over the entire width of the work.
5.
At the close of each day’s work the working surface shall be crowned, shaped, and rolled
with smooth steel or pneumatic tired rollers to ensure proper drainage.
6.
Prior to placing compacted Structural Fill below the slab, the surface of natural ground,
shall be proof-rolled with at least four passes of a heavy vibratory drum roller. Hard and
soft spots shall be excavated and replaced with Structural Fill or other material
acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.
7.
Where excavations for slab-on-grade extend to weathered fractured, or blasted bedrock,
the Owner’s Representative shall assess the rode surface for the presence of voids and
may require placement of a 2 to 18 inch layer of choke stone or crushed stone prior to
placement of structural fill.
E. Fills under Parking Areas
1.
Paved area subgrades shall be excavated to a minimum of 12 inches beneath
required subgrade elevation or existing grade, whichever is lower.
2.
Proofroll subgrade with a vibratory roller or by minimum of two passes of a fully
loaded ten-wheeled dump truck. Soft or hard areas and other objectional material
(stumps, wood, organics) shall be excavated and backfilled with compacted
common fill.
3.
Where excavations for pavements extend to weathered, fractured, or blasted
bedrock, prepare surface as indicated in Section 3.05 B for building and pavement
areas.
4.
A minimum of 12 inches of gravel base course shall be provided between subgrade
and the bottom of the bituminous surface.
F.
Subgrades Under Proposed Landscape Areas
1.
G.
Fills under tree and shrub planting areas shall be back filled with topsoil/loam
materials.
Buildings
1.
Prior to the placement of blast rock fill over a bedrock subgrade, voids in the
rock surface shall be choked off with appropriately graded crushed stone or
Compacted Structural Fill placed on filter fabric to prevent migration of fines
into fractures, as directed by the Owner's Representative.
Blast rock fill and crushed stone shall be placed and compacted as indicated
below.
2.
3.
Blast Rock Fill Placement and Compaction:
a.
Maximum lift thickness prior to compaction is 24 in.
b.
Material shall be dumped 25 feet behind the fill face and pushed forward
to allow mixing and removal of oversized rock and backfilling voids.
c.
Should the maximum size of blast rock exceed 18 in., then use a rock
rake with teeth spaced at 18 in. or other means to separate and remove
oversized rock.
d.
Provide a minimum of one-foot thick transition zone of crushed stone
between blast rock fill and granular fill. All blast rock fill shall be choked
with a transition zone of crushed stone, where granular fill is to be placed
above it.
e.
Compact each lift of blast rock fill with a minimum of eight passes of a
vibratory drum roller that imparts a minimum dynamic force equal to
20,000 lbs.
Crushed Stone Placement and Compaction:
a.
4.
H.
Maximum lift thickness prior to compaction is 8 inches
Structural Fill: A minimum of 24 inches of compacted structural fill shall be
placed in maximum 8-inch loose lifts lifts immediately below the slabs.
Revetments
1.
General
a.
Areas to be protected by revetment shall be free of brush, trees, stumps
and other organic material and be dressed to a smooth surface. All soft
or spongy material shall be removed to the depth shown on the plans or
as directed by the Engineer and replaced with approved materials.
b.
A toe trench shall be dug and maintained until the revetment is placed.
3.07
c.
Protection for structure foundations shall be provided as early as the
foundation construction permits.
d.
The area to be protected shall be cleaned of waste materials and the
surface to be protected prepared as shown on the plans.
e.
Where shown on the plans, a foundation filter bed shall be placed on the
area before the stone is placed. The foundation filter bed will be six
inches of dense graded crushed stone and six inches of one half inch
crushed stone and at least 12 inches in total thickness.
TRENCH BACKFILLING
A.
General
1.
Trenches shall be backfilled as soon as practicable with suitable approved
materials. All trench backfilling shall be done with special care, in the following
manner and as the Engineer may direct from time to time.
2.
Backfill material for pipe bedding shall be deposited in the trench, uniformly
on both sides of the pipe, for the entire width of the trench to the springline of
the pipe. The backfill material shall be placed by hand shovels, in layers not
more than 6 inches thick in loose depth, and each layer shall be thoroughly
and evenly compacted by tamping on each side of the pipe to provide uniform
support around the pipe.
3.
Trench backfilling shall be placed so as not to disturb the previously installed
pipes, utilities, concrete, and other work within and near the trench. The
moisture content of the backfill material shall be such that proper compaction
will be obtained. Backfill of trenches within areas of pavement construction
shall be made in controlled compacted lifts extending to grades required to
establish the proper pavement base courses.
4.
In backfilling trenches, each layer of backfill material shall be adequately
compacted in such a manner as to provide the required bearing value, so that
paving can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed.
5.
Any trenches or excavations improperly backfilled, or where settlement
occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then
refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade and
condition, at no additional expense to the Owner.
6.
During filling and backfilling operations, pipelines will be checked to determine
whether any displacement of the pipe has occurred. If the inspection of the
pipelines shows poor alignment, displacement of pipe, or any other defects,
the condition shall be remedied by removal, realignment, and backfill of the
pipe, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer at no additional cost to the
Owner.
B.
Embedment
The type of materials to be used in bedding and backfilling shall conform to the details
shown on the Drawings and the following:
1.
Embedment materials are those used for bedding, haunching and initial
backfill. ASTM D-2321 classifies the soils. Unified soil classification. The
following will describe the soils:
a.
Class I -- Angular crushed stone or rock, dense or open graded with little
or no fines (3/4 inch stone size) (to be used in wet conditions or where
shown on the Drawings)
b.
Class II - Clean, coarse grained gravel, with a maximum stone size of the
1-1/2 inches
c.
Embedment materials shall be free from lumps of frozen soil or ice when
placed. Embedment materials shall be placed and compacted at
optimum moisture content.
2.
Foundation: A stable utility foundation of Class I or II material must be
provided to insure proper line and grade is maintained. Unsuitable
foundations such as organics, soft clay, and other soft materials must be
removed and the material stabilized. Unsuitable or unstable foundation
materials shall be undercut and replaced with a suitable bedding material of
Class I or Class II (see 3.08 B5), placed in 6" lifts. The Engineer may approve
other methods of stabilization, such as geotextiles.
3.
Bedding: Provide a stable and uniform bedding for the pipe and any
protruding features of its joints and/or fittings. The bedding for the middle 1/3
of the pipe outside diameter should be loosely placed so that the pipe
conforms to the trench. The remainder of the bedding at the base of the
trench shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent modified proctor
density as determined by ASTM Test method D1557. Class I, or II materials
are suitable for use as bedding.
4.
Haunching: Proper haunching provides a major portion of the pipe's strength
and stability. Care must be exercised to insure placement and compaction of
the embedment material in the haunches. For larger diameter pipes (> 30"),
embedment materials should be worked under the haunches by hand.
Haunching materials may be Class I, or II and must be placed and compacted
in 6-inch maximum lifts, compacted to 95 percent modified proctor density.
5.
Initial Backfill: Initial backfill materials are required for a minimum of 3/4 of the
pipe diameter. The initial backfill shall be from the springline to 24 inches
above the pipe to provide protection for the pipe from construction operations
during placement of the final backfill and protect the pipe from stones or
cobbles in the final backfill.
a.
Class I materials must be used in wet trenches and Class I bedding and
haunching materials shall be used.
3.08
b.
Class II materials shall be used unless noted otherwise or wet conditions
are encountered. The material shall be compacted in 6 inch lifts to 95
percent modified proctor density (ASTM D1557).
c.
Flooding or jetting as a procedure for compaction are not allowed.
6.
Controlled Low Strength Materials (CLSM) or Controlled Density Fill (flowable
fills) are acceptable backfill materials. Several considerations should be
accounted for when using CLSM/CDF backfill. Provisions to prevent floatation
of the pipe during placement of the CLSM/CDF must be used. This can
include anchoring the pipe by placing flowable fill at the each joint and
allowing the fill to partially cure prior to placing the flowable fill along the entire
length of the pipe. Also, mechanical anchors such as bent rebar driven into
competent soil or precast weights, may be used at each joint to prevent
floatation. When using CLSM/CDF, the fill should always be placed to
completely encase the pipe.
7.
Backfill. Backfill from 2 feet above the top of the pipe to subgrade elevations
shall be structural fill material. Generally, the excavated trench material may
be used as this backfill. This backfill shall be placed in 12-inch maximum lifts
and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent modified proctor density to
prevent excessive settlement at the surface. Stones larger than 12 inches in
size shall be removed prior to backfill placement.
8.
Vehicular and Construction Loads: Pipe installation shall be suitable to carry
H-25 live loads (40,000 lbs. Axle - legal load) with 24 inches of cover.
BACKFILLING AGAINST STRUCTURES
A.
Backfilling against masonry or concrete shall only be done when approved. The
Contractor shall not place backfill against or on structures until they have attained
sufficient strength to support the loads (including construction loads) to which they
will be subjected, without distortion, cracking or other damage. As soon as
practicable after the structures are structurally adequate and other necessary work
has been satisfactorily completed, any leakage tests or other testing of the
structures shall be made by the Contractor, as required by the Engineer, at the
Contractor's expense.
After the satisfactory completion of leakage tests and the satisfactory completion of any
other required work in connection with the structures, the backfilling around the
structures shall proceed using suitable and approved excavation material. The best
of the backfill material shall be used for backfilling within 2 feet of the structure. Just
prior to placing backfill, the areas shall be cleaned of all excess construction material
and debris and the bottom of excavations shall be in a thoroughly compacted
condition.
B.
Symmetrical backfill loading shall be maintained. Special care shall be taken to
prevent any wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structures.
During backfilling operations, care shall be exercised that the equipment used will
not overload the structures in passing over and compacting these fills. Except as
otherwise specified or directed, backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 12
inches in loose depth and each layer of backfill shall be compacted thoroughly and
evenly using approved types of mechanical equipment. Each pass of the equipment
shall cover the entire area of each layer of backfill.
3.09
C.
In compacting and other operations, the Contractor shall conduct his operations in a
manner to prevent damage to structures due to passage of heavy equipment over
and adjacent to structures. Repair damage made by the Contractor, at no additional
expense to the Owner.
D.
After backfilling the Contractor shall maintain the surfaces of backfill areas in good
condition so as to present a smooth surface at all times level with adjacent surfaces.
The Contractor shall repair any subsequent settling over backfilled areas
immediately, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, and such maintenance shall
be provided by the Contractor for the life of this Contract, at no additional expense to
the Owner.
E.
The finished subgrade of the filled excavations upon which pavements are to be
constructed shall not be disturbed by traffic of other operations and shall be
maintained in a satisfactory condition until the finished courses are placed. The
storage or stockpiling of materials on finished subgrade will not be permitted.
F.
Uniformly smooth grading of all areas to be graded, as indicated including excavated
sections and all areas disturbed as a result of the Contractor's operations, shall be
accomplished. The finished surfaces shall be reasonably smooth, compacted and
free from surface irregularities.
COMPACTION
A.
Compaction Requirements
1.
The degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry
density at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM Test D1557,
Method C. The compaction requirements are as follows:
Minimum
Area Degree of Compaction
Below footings
Below slabs 95%
Detention basin berms
Pavement base course
Pavement subbase
General fill below pavement subbase
Trench backfill
Lawn areas 90%
95%
95%
95%
95%
90%
92%
2.
B.
Compaction percentages are based on the laboratory derived Maximum
Density Values.
Moisture Control
1.
Fill that is too wet for proper compaction shall be harrowed, or otherwise dried
to a proper moisture content to allow compaction to the required density. If fill
cannot be dried within 24 hours of placement, it shall be removed and
replaced with drier fill.
2.
Fill that is too dry for proper compaction shall receive water uniformly applied
over the surface of the loose layer. Sufficient water shall be added to allow
compaction to the required density.
3.
C.
D.
In no case shall fill be placed over material that is frozen. No fill material shall
be placed, spread or rolled during unfavorable weather conditions. When
work is interrupted by heavy rains, fill operations shall not be resumed until
the moisture content and the density of the previously placed fill are as
specified.
Lift Thickness of Material
1.
Structural Fill and Sand Borrow. Place in layers not to exceed 8inches in
thickness when utilizing heavy compaction equipment, and 6 inches loose
thickness when utilizing light hand-operated compaction equipment.
2.
Common Fill. Place in layers not to exceed 12 inches in thickness when
utilizing heavy compaction equipment, and 8 inches when utilizing light
hand-operated compaction equipment.
3.
Crushed Stone, Gravel, Dense, Graded Crushed Stone for Subbase. Place in
layers not to exceed 8 inches in thickness when utilizing heavy compaction
equipment, and 6 inches loose thickness when utilizing light hand-operated
compacted equipment. Compact with a minimum of 4 coverages of
acceptable compaction equipment.
Placing Fill
1.
Fill sections and embankments shall be constructed of earth, rock, or a
mixture of earth and rock deposited in successive lifts. Except as hereinafter
permitted, the loose thickness of each lift shall not be more than eight (8)
inches loose thickness before compaction.
2.
Rock fill may be used in deep fill areas.
3.
No rock in excess of six (6) inches in its largest dimension shall be
incorporated in the top two (2) foot layer of embankment immediately below
the subgrade.
4.
During fill and embankment construction operations, earth moving equipment
shall be routed as evenly as possible over the entire width of the work.
5.
At the close of each day's work the working surface shall be crowned,
shaped, and rolled with smooth steel or pneumatic tired rollers to ensure
proper drainage.
E.
F.
Protection of Fill
1.
Protection of compacted fill shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Newly graded areas shall be protected from the actions of the elements and
traffic. Any settlement or washing that occurs prior to acceptance of the work
shall be repaired and grades shall be established to the required elevations
and slopes. Damage to any compacted lift (including those lifts previously
tested and approved by the Engineer) occurring at any time during the course
of construction, which is caused by equipment, moisture entering the
embankment, or from any other cause, shall be fully repaired by the
Contractor prior to placement of overlying materials, at no additional cost to
Owner and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.
In the event of and prior to the commencement of heavy rains, the Contractor
shall suspend fill operations immediately and shall take all necessary steps to
keep the site as well drained as possible. Fill operations shall not be resumed
until the moisture content of the fill is such as to permit compliance with the
Specifications.
3.
All corrective work or operations necessary to maintain proper moisture
control of the fill material shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Finish
Upon completion of the work, ground surface shall be left in a firm, unyielding, true, uniform
condition, free of ruts.
3.10
SHEETING AND BRACING
A.
General
1.
Whenever sheeting and bracing will be required, it shall be furnished and
installed by the Contractor in accordance with the recommendations of
Structural and Geotechnical Engineers engaged by the Contractor.
2.
The Contractor shall engage licensed professional Structural and
Geotechnical Engineers. These Engineers shall be licensed in the state
where the work is occurring and they shall prepare designs for the sheeting
and bracing.
3.
Submit the sheeting and bracing designs to the Owner and the Engineer for
the project record. The sheeting and bracing plans and calculations shall
bear the professional seals and signatures of the Contractor’s Engineers.
These plans and calculations shall be submitted prior to the start of work.
4.
The Contractor shall furnish and install the required sheeting and bracing in
accord with the submitted designs. The Contractor shall include the costs for
this work in his bid price for the project. No additional or separate
compensation shall be allowed.
END OF SECTION 02200
SECTION 02220 - PAVEMENT SUBBASE AND BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies requirements for the preparation of the subgrade for and
placement of granular pavement subbase and base materials.
B.
The work includes:
1.
2.
1.02
Fine grading and compaction of pavement subgrade.
Furnishing, placing and compacting of subbase and base materials.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Other specification Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
3.
Section 02200 — Earthwork
Section 02525 — Curbing
Section 03301 — Site Cast-in-Place Concrete
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GRAVEL SUBBASE AND BASE
A.
2.02
Gravel shall conform to the requirements of Earthwork Section 02200, Article,
2.01(C) Gravel.
DENSE GRADED CRUSHED STONE SUBBASE AND BASE
A.
Dense graded crushed stone shall conform to the requirements of Earthwork
Section 02200, Article, 2.01(G) Dense-graded Crushed Stone for subbase and base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A.
All subsurface utility construction shall be completed before fine grading is begun.
B.
The pavement and curb subgrade shall be fine graded to the location, elevations
and cross slope shown on the Drawings.
C.
Subgrades in in-situ soils in excavation areas and in embankment areas shall be
compacted during fine grading to 90 percent of maximum dry density in
conformance with Section 02200, Article 3.05B.
SUBBASE MATERIAL PLACEMENT
A.
Subbase material shall not be placed until the inspecting Engineer has approved the
fine grading, compaction and condition of the subgrade.
B.
Subbase material shall be placed and spread on the approved subgrade in layers
not exceeding eight inches in thickness by approved self spreading equipment. Any
displacement of the compacted subgrade material by the equipment shall be
restored to the required grade and recompacted before placement of the subbase
material.
C.
Subbase material shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum dry density in
conformance with Section 02200, Article 3.09A.
D.
The surface of the subbase material shall be fine graded to the location, elevations
and cross slope shown on the Drawings during final layer compaction operations.
BASE MATERIAL PLACEMENT
A.
Base material shall not be placed until the inspecting Engineer has approved the
fine grading, compaction and condition of the subbase material.
B.
Base material shall be spread on the approved subbase in layers not exceeding four
inches in thickness by approved self spreading equipment. Any displacement of the
subbase material by equipment shall be restored to the required grade and
recompacted before placement of the base material.
C.
Base material shall be compacted to 95 percent of dry density in conformance with
Section 02200, Article 3.09A.
D.
The surface of the base material shall be fine graded to the proposed location,
elevations and cross slope shown on the Drawings during final layer compaction
operations.
END OF SECTION 02220
SECTION 02270 - EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description
1.02
A.
This Section specifies requirements for temporary erosion control provisions.
B.
The work includes:
1.
Assuming responses likely for the maintenance of existing erosion control
measures from prior contract remaining in place at start of work.
2.
Providing and maintaining all temporary erosion control measures shown on
the Drawings and required by the Engineer, City of Richmond erosion control
inspector or engineer and required by Virginia Department of Conservation
and Recreation erosion control inspector or engineer during the life of the
Contract to control soil erosion and water pollution.
3.
The installation and maintenance of additional silt fence, berms, ditches,
sedimentation basins, construction exits, fiber mats, catchbasin filters, straw,
netting, gravel, trenches, mulches, grasses, slope drains and other approved
erosion control devices or methods, needed to protect any areas on or off site
in accordance with the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan required by the
DEQ.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
1.03
Section 02210 Site Preparation and Demolition
Section 02200 Earthwork
DEFINITION AND COORDINATION OF EROSION CONTROL PROVISIONS
A.
Permanent erosion control measures are defined as those elements that are to be
incorporated into the final project product, including but not necessarily limited to,
such items as; finish paving and landscape, detention basin forebays, sedimentation
control structures, swales and ditches, berms, and other such items.
B.
Temporary erosion control measures are defined as those elements that are
required by permit approvals and necessary to be installed by the Contractor to
meet Federal, State and Local regulations for the construction program, including,
but not necessarily limited to, such items as; silt fences, berms, portable
sedimentation basins, haybales, check dams, and other such items, all of which
shall be removed by the Contractor after installation of permanent erosion control
measures, stabilization of the site, and prior to final completion of the project.
C.
The temporary control provisions shall be coordinated with the permanent erosion
control features to the extent practical to ensure economical, effective and
continuous erosion control throughout the construction and post-construction period.
1.04
1.05
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A.
Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook regulations are hereby
incorporated into these specifications.
B.
Compliance with the VSMP Virginia Stormwater Management Program Permit and
Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
A. Prior to the start of the construction, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer:
schedules for the construction of required stormwater detention basins, temporary and
permanent erosion and sediment control work, clearing and grubbing, grading, structures
at watercourses, construction, and paving. No work shall be started until control
schedules and methods of operations have been submitted to the Engineer.
B. Schedule a pre-construction meeting with the Engineer and the reviewing authority.
1.06
CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
A.
When in the opinion of the Engineer it becomes necessary, the Engineer will inform
the Contractor of construction procedures and operations that jeopardize erosion
and sedimentation control provisions. If these construction procedures and
operations are not corrected promptly, the Owner may suspend the performance of
any or all construction until corrections have been made, and such suspension shall
not be the basis of any claim by the Contractor for additional compensation from the
Owner nor for an extension of time to complete the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Materials
A.
B.
Temporary erosion control seed for quick growing grasses such as wheat, rye or
oats shall be planted when permanent grasses cannot be planted due to the
growing season. All permanent grass areas planted with temporary erosion control
seed shall be replaced with permanent seed. Apply seed mixture at a rate specified
on the Contract Drawings for the appropriate planting dates.
Erosion Control Blanket/Fabric Netting shall meet the material specifications of the
Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook for Treatment 1: Soil Stabilization
Blanket.
C.
Silt fence fabric shall meet or exceed the minimum material specifications of the
Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.
D.
Filter fabric at construction entrance shall be equal to 600X, as manufactured by
Mirafi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MATS
A.
Erosion control mats shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
B.
Areas to receive mats shall be smooth graded and compacted. Remove all rocks,
dirt clods, vegetation and other obstructions that may cause damage to the mats.
C.
Unroll mats parallel to the direction of water flow and lay flat against the ground.
Overlap roll ends 1 to 2 feet with upslope mat on the top to prevent uplift of mat end
by water flow. Overlay adjacent edges of mat by six inches. Extend mat 2 to 3 feet
above the crest of steep slopes and anchor by excavating a 6 inch deep trench, and
secure end of mat in trench, backfill and compact. Secure mat to the ground using
staples or pins furnished by manufacturer of mat.
SILT FENCE
A.
Silt fence shall be installed at locations as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Supporting posts shall be spaced 6 feet on center, and driven at least one foot into
the ground. Posts shall be 2 inch diameter if oak, 4 inch diameter if pine. Steel
posts must have a minimum weight of 1.33 pounds per linear foot. All posts must be
a minimum of 5 feet in length.
C.
Fabric shall be anchored in a 4-inch deep trench dug on the upslope side of the
posts. The trench shall be at least 4 inches wide. The fabric shall be laid in the
trench, backfilled and compacted.
D.
Fabric rolls shall be spliced at posts. The fabric shall be overlapped 6 inches, folded
over and securely fastened to posts.
E.
Silt fences shall be inspected immediately after each storm event and at least daily
during prolonged rainfall.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS - TEMPORARY SEDIMENT CONTROL
A.
The Contractor shall construct all permanent erosion and sediment control features
at the earliest practical time as outlined in the accepted schedule. Temporary
erosion and sediment control measures shall be used to correct conditions that
develop during construction which were unforeseen, but are needed prior to
installation of permanent control features, or that are needed temporarily to control
erosion or sedimentation which develops during construction operations.
B.
Where erosion is likely to be a problem, clearing and grubbing operations shall be
scheduled and performed so that grading operations and permanent erosion and
sediment control features can follow immediately thereafter, if conditions permit;
otherwise, temporary control measures will be required between successive
construction stages.
C.
Contractor shall be responsible for controlling erosion within the project area and
retaining sediment on-site away from sensitive environmental resources. Any fines,
construction delays, remedial actions, or incarceration resulting from the
Contractor’s failure to comply with these provisions shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and not the Owner.
3.04
D.
Failure by the Contractor to control erosion, pollution, and siltation shall be cause for
the Owner to employ outside assistance to provide the necessary corrective
measures. The cost of such assistance, including engineering costs, will be charged
to the Contractor and appropriate deductions made to the Contractor's monthly
progress payment request.
E.
The Contractor shall remove and properly dispose of sediment from control facilities
as required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall modify and improve erosion and
sedimentation control facilities and replace deteriorated hay bales and other devices
as required by the Engineer.
F.
Minimum temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures
are shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the minimum
provisions shown. Additionally, temporary measures shall be selected and
constructed by the Contractor in consultation with the Engineer to accommodate
changing field conditions that develop during construction.
G.
The temporary sedimentation traps shall be maintained from the start of construction
until construction of the permanent detention basins and/or stormwater system is
completed and perimeter areas are stabilized. A temporary outlet shall be
constructed above the expected sediment levels. Construction of the basins shall
be sequenced so that the temporary outlet is installed and basin embankment is
constructed with the material available from the initial site excavations.
MAINTENANCE OF EROSION CONTROL MEASURES
A.
The Contractor shall check the condition of erosion and sedimentation control
devices daily and maintain them in good operating condition. Hay bales shall be
replaced when deteriorated.
B.
The Contractor shall inspect the condition of diversion dikes and ditches, filter
berms, interceptor dikes, sediment basins and other erosion and sedimentation
control devices after each rainstorm and during major storm events. Repairs shall
be made as necessary.
C.
During construction, temporary outlets of the drainage systems shall direct the flow
to temporary or permanent sedimentation basins.
D.
Temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be removed and
adjacent areas outside the limits of grading restored upon completion of the work or
when required by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 02270
SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Soil treatment with termiticide.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure
process.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less
than five years against infestation of subterranean termites.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For termiticide.
1.
Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.
B.
Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product manufacturer.
C.
Qualification Data: For Installer of termite control products.
D.
Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report
for Owner's record information, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Date and time of application.
Moisture content of soil before application.
Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
Areas of application.
Water source for application.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where
Project is located.
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
Registered Label.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products through one source.
1.6
Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or
frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the
EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting
operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Termiticides:
Bayer Corporation; Premise 75.
Dow AgroSciences LLC; Dursban TC.
Syngenta; Demon TC.
SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide
quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide
concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work,
landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.
1.
3.2
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control
treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such
as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from
soil within and around foundations.
B.
Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide
manufacturer.
1.
3.3
Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
3.4
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Slabs-on-Grade : Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building
slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete
footings and slabs are placed.
Foundations and Below Grade Walls: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside
perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing
pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers,
and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of
footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.
Masonry: Treat voids.
Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B.
Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C.
Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until groundsupported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label
instructions.
D.
Post warning signs in areas of application.
E.
Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 02361
SECTION 02400 - STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies requirements for furnishing and installing the site storm
drainage system.
B.
The work includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.02
Site storm drainage system.
Connection of building drains from a point five feet outside of the foundations.
Subdrains, headwalls, flared end sections and underground stormwater
detention facilities.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings
1.
2.
1.04
1.05
Section 02140—Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
Section 02200—Earthwork
Section 02570—Sewerage System
Section 02610—Water Supply System
Section 03301—Site Cast-in-Place Concrete
Materials list of items proposed for the work.
Shop drawings or descriptive literature, or both, showing dimensions, joint
and other details of all materials proposed for the work. Shop drawings shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering material.
COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION
A.
Coordinate the work with the termination of storm drain connections at buildings,
connections to municipal systems, and trenching operations.
B.
The contractor shall field verify and survey the size, location and elevations of all
existing pipe and utility lines prior to ordering of materials for this utility system. A
report of the findings of the verification survey shall be submitted to the engineer
for information and comment.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
All materials shall be adequately protected from damage during transit. Pipes shall
not be dropped.
1.06
B.
All pipe and other appurtenances shall be inspected before placement in the work
and any found to be defective from any cause, including damage caused by
handling, and determined by the Engineer to be unrepairable, shall be replaced at
no cost to the Owner.
C.
Storage and handling of pipes, manholes, catchbasins, oil-grit separators, treatment
units and other system appurtenances shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
INSPECTION
A.
The manufacturer/supplier is responsible for the provision of all test requirements
specified for each type of pipe. In addition, any pipe may be inspected at the plant
for compliance with these specifications by an independent testing laboratory
selected and paid by the Owner. The Contractor shall require the manufacturer’s
cooperation in these inspections.
B.
Inspection of the pipe may also be made after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to
rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the specification
requirements, even though pipe samples may have been accepted as satisfactory at
the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall be marked for
identification and shall be removed from the site at once.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
2.02
All materials for storm drainage system shall be new and unused.
PIPE
A.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Pipe shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C76.
All pipe 18 inches and smaller shall be Class V. All other pipe shall be Class III
unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
Joints for the reinforced concrete pipe shall be the tongue and groove or bell and
spigot type with rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C443.
B.
Corrugated Aluminized Steel Pipe: Aluminized steel pipe, Type 2, 16ga., shall meet
AASHTO M-274-791 and shall be metallic coated and manufactured to meet the
requirements of AASHTO M36.
Corrugated aluminized steel pipe shall be round pipe, pipe arch or slotted drain as
indicated on the Drawings. Slotted drain pipe shall have 1.75-inch wide drain
waterway opening and solid WEB spacer at 6 inches on center.
Pipe shall be as manufactured by Contech Construction Products, Inc., or approved
equivalent.
C.
Perforated Steel Pipe Underdrain shall meet the requirements of AASHTO
Designation M36, Type III, Classes I, II or III and shall be ARMCO aluminized steel
Type 2 (Hel-Cor) as manufactured by Contech Construction Products, Inc. or
approved equivalent.
Fully perforated pipe shall be perforated with 3/8-inch diameter holes meeting the
requirements of AASHTO M-36 Class 2.
D.
Slotted Corrugated Plastic Pipe for Subdrain: Materials, dimensions, physical
properties and fabrication of pipe or tubing, couplings and fittings shall be in
conformance with AASHTO-M252.
Piping and fittings (3 to 6 inches in diameter) shall conform to ASTM F-405.
Piping and fittings over 6 inches in diameter shall conform to ASTM F-667.
E.
Filter Fabric shall be according to VDOT Road and Bridge Specification (Latest
Eddition).
G.
High Density Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings with smooth interior shall
meet the requirements of ASTM D3350. Four-inch through 10-inch diameter pipe
corrugated polyethylene drainage tubing shall meet the requirements of AASHTO
M252. Twelve-inch through 60-inch diameter corrugated polyethylene pipe shall
meet the requirements of AASHTO M294, Types S. Standard 45 Degree "Y"
connections shall be fabricated to sizes shown on the Drawings.
Pipe joints and fittings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M252 or
AASHTO M294: Coupling bands shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications.
Couplers shall cover not less than one corrugation on each section of pipe.
H.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Pipe and fittings shall comply with the requirements
of ASTM D3034, rated SDR 40. Pipe shall be continually marked with
manufacturer's name, pipe size, cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D3034
classification.
Pipe joints shall be integrally molded bell ends in accordance with the requirements
of ASTM D3034, with factory supplied elastomeric gaskets and lubricant.
I. Ductile Iron Pipe: Pipe shall be ductile iron pipe, Class 52, meeting the requirements of
ANSI 21.51. Joints shall be push-on type with synthetic rubber or neoprene gaskets
conforming to ANSI A21.11.
2.03
STORM DRAIN MANHOLES
A.
Precast Units
1.
Structure: 48-inch minimum inside diameter, precast concrete units (4,000
psi minimum compressive strength) with eccentric cone section tapering to
24-inch diameter and monolithic base section meeting the requirements of
ASTM C478. All structures shall be designed for HS-20 loading.
2.
Precast Unit Joint Seals: Butyl rubber O-ring type seals meeting the
requirements of ASTM C990.
3.
Openings for pipe and materials to be embedded in the walls of the manholes
sections for joint seals shall be cast in the sections at the required locations
during manufacturer. Sections with incorrectly cast and patched pipe
openings will be rejected.
4.
B.
2.04
Masonry Units
1.
Brick shall conform to Sewer Brick (Made from Clay or Shale), ASTM
designation C32, Grade MS or Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from
Clay or Shale), ASTM C62, Grade SW.
2.
Concrete block shall be solid block and shall conform to the Specifications for
Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes,
ASTM designation C139.
3.
Mortar shall be in conformance with ASTM C270, Type M. The mortar shall
be composed of Portland cement hydrated lime, and sand, in the proportions
of 1 part cement to 1/4 part hydrated limit to 3-1/2 parts sand by volume.
4.
Cement shall be Type I or II Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150,
Standard Specification for Portland Cement. Where masonry is exposed to
salt water, Type II shall be used.
5.
Hydrated lime shall be Type S conforming to ASTM D207.
6.
Sand for masonry mortar shall conform to the gradation requirements of
ASTM C144.
C.
Steps for manholes shall be Steel Reinforced Copolymer Polypropylene plastic step
with at least a 14-inch wide stepping surface conforming to ASTM C478 and A615.
D.
Manhole Frame and Cover: Shall be in accordance with City of Richmond
requirements. Frame and cover to contain air tight non leak gaskets.
CATCH BASINS AND DROP INLET
A.
2.05
Openings shall be cast into the manhole sections to receive entering pipes
during manufacture. The openings shall be sized to provide a uniform 2 inch
maximum annular space between the outside of the pipe wall and the opening
in the riser. After the pipe is in position, the annular space shall be solidly
filled with nonshrink mortar. Care shall be taken to assure that the openings
are located to permit setting of the entering pipe at its correct elevation.
Precast catch basins and drop inlets shall be manufactured in accordance with City
of Richmond Standards, but as a minimum, ASTM Designation C478 (4,000 psi
minimum compressive strength) to the diameters and depths shown on the
Drawings. All structures shall be designed for HS-20 loading. Precast unit joints
shall be sealed with butyl rubber in accordance with ASTM 990.
STORM WATER MANAGEMENT STRUCTURE
A.
Storm water management facility shall be a “StormTrap” precast concrete modular
storm water detention facility as shown on the Drawings or approved equal.
B.
Follow manufactures installation instructions and specifications.
C.
The storm water management facility shall be designed for the following loads and
possible combinations thereof:
1.
2.
3.
D.
H-20 loading, manhole riser with frame and cones, plus the weight of soil
above.
Weight of precast concrete structure
Initial handling and erection loadings.
Manhole riser sections, manhole steps, frames and covers shall conform to the
requirements in Article 2.03.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Contractor to verify the location, size invert and type of existing pipes at all points of
connection prior to ordering new utility materials.
B.
All pipe shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades shown on the drawings and
in conformance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
C.
As soon as the trench is excavated to the normal grade of the bottom of the trench,
the Contractor shall immediately place the bedding material in the trench. The pipe
shall be firmly bedded in the compacted bedding material accurately to the lines and
grades shown on the Drawings.
D.
Laying Pipe: Each length of pipe shall be laid with firm, full and even bearing
throughout its entire length, in a prepared trench. Pipe shall be laid with bells
upgrade unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Every length of pipe shall be inspected and cleaned of all dirt and debris before
being laid. The interior of the pipe and the jointing seal shall be free from sand, dirt
and trash. Extreme care shall be taken to keep the bells of the pipe free from dirt
and rocks so that joints may be properly lubricated and assembled. No pipe shall be
trimmed or chipped to fit.
No length of pipe shall be laid until the proceeding lengths of pipe have been
thoroughly embedded in place, to prevent movement or disturbance of the pipe
alignment.
E.
Notch under pipe bells and joints where required to provide for uniform bearing
under entire length of pipe.
F.
Excavation, backfilling and compaction shall be as specified in Section 02200.
G.
Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required
compaction density.
H.
Pipe Extension: Where an existing pipe is to be extended, the same type of pipe
shall be used, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
I.
Full Lengths of Pipe: Only full lengths of pipe shall be used in the installation except
that partial lengths of pipe may be used at the entrance to structures, and to
accommodate the required locations of service connection fittings.
J.
Pipe Entrances to Structures: All pipe entering structures shall be cut flush with the
inside face of the structure, and the cut ends of the pipe surface within the structure
shall be properly rounded and finished so that there will be no protrusion, ragged
edges or imperfections that will impede or affect the hydraulic characteristics of the
stormwater flow. The method of cutting and finishing shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
K.
Protection During Construction: The Contractor shall protect the installation at all
times during construction, and movement of construction equipment, vehicles and
loads over and adjacent to any pipe shall be performed at the Contractor’s risk.
At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, all open ends of pipes shall be
closed by approved temporary watertight plugs. If water is in the trench when work
is resumed, the plug shall not be removed until the trench has been dewatered and
all danger of water entering the pipe eliminated.
L.
Water Pipe – Drain Pipe Separation: When a drain pipe crosses above or below a
water pipe, the following procedures shall be utilized:
1.
Relation to Water Mains
a.
b.
Horizontal Separation: Whenever possible drains shall be laid at a
minimum at least 5 feet, horizontally, from any existing or proposed
water main. Should local conditions prevent a lateral separation of 5
feet, a drain may be laid closer than 5 feet to a water main if:
i.
It is laid in a separate trench, or if
ii.
It is laid in the same trench with the water mains located at
one side on a bench of undistributed earth, and if
iii.
In either case the elevation of the top (crown) of the drain is at
least 12 inches below the bottom (invert) of the water main.
Vertical Separation: Whenever drains must cross under water mains,
the drain shall be laid at such an elevation that the top of the pipe is at
least 12 inches below the bottom of the water main. When the
elevation of the drain cannot be varied to meet the above
requirements, the water main shall be relocated to provide this
separation or reconstructed with mechanical-joint pipe for a distance
of 10 feet on each side of the drain. One full length of water main
should be centered over the drain so that both joints will be as far
from the sewer as possible.
When it is impossible to obtain horizontal and/or vertical separation as
stipulated above, both the water main and drain shall be constructed of
mechanical-joint cement lined ductile iron pipe or other equivalent based on
water tightness and structural soundness. Both pipes shall be pressure
tested by an approved method to assure water tightness.
3.02
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPES
The type of materials to be used in bedding and backfilling and the method of placement shall
conform to the requirements of Section 02200, Earthwork, the details shown on the Drawings
and the following.
A.
Embedment materials are those used for bedding, haunching and initial backfill
around pipes as illustrated on the drawings.
All embedment materials should be free from lumps of frozen soil or ice when
placed. Embedment materials should be placed and compacted at optimum
moisture content
B.
Trench Bedding: Material must be provided to insure proper line and grade is
maintained. Unsuitable or unstable materials shall be undercut and replaced with a
suitable bedding material, placed in 6” lifts. Other methods of stabilization, such as
geotextiles may be appropriate and their use must be approved by Owner’s
Representative.
Provide a stable and uniform bedding for the pipe and any protruding features of its
joints and/or fittings. The middle of the bedding equal to 1/3 of the pipe outside
diameter should be loosely placed, with the remainder compacted to a minimum of
95 percent standard proctor density.
C.
Haunching: Proper haunching provides a major portion of the pipe’s strength and
stability. Exercise care to insure placement and compaction of the embedment
material in the haunches. For larger diameter pipes (>30”), embedment materials
should be worked under the haunches by hand. Haunching materials shall be
placed and compacted in 6 inch maximum lifts, compacted to 95 percent modified
proctor density.
D.
Initial Backfill: The initial backfill shall be from the springline to 24 inches above the
pipe to provide protection for the pipe from construction operations during placement
of the final backfill and protect the pipe from stones or cobbles in the final backfill.
Compact initial backfill per Section 02200.
Flooding or jetting as a procedure for compaction are not allowed.
E.
Final Backfill: The final backfill should be the same material as the proposed
embankment or surface finishes. Generally, the excavated material may be used as
final backfill. Placement should be as specified for the embankment. In lieu of a
specification, the final backfill should be placed in 12 inch maximum lifts and
compacted to a minimum 95 percent modified proctor density to prevent excessive
settlement at the surface. Compaction should be performed at optimum moisture
content.
F.
Vehicular and Construction Loads: During construction, avoid heavy equipment
loads (> 40,000 lbs. per axle over the pipe. Additional temporary cover should be
placed over the pipe for heavy construction load crossings. Hydrohammers or hoepak compactors may not be used over the pipe until at least 48 inches of cover have
been provided.
3.03
3.04
MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, AND DROP INLETS-PRECAST
A.
Manholes Catch Basins and Drop Inlets shall be constructed at the locations and to
the lines, grades, dimensions and design shown on Drawings or as required by the
Engineer.
B.
Precast concrete Units shall be installed in a manner that ensures watertight
construction and all leaks in precast concrete structures shall be sealed. If required,
precast concrete structures shall be repaired or replaced to obtain watertight
construction.
C.
Stubs shall be short pieces of pipe cut from the bell ends of the pipe. Stubs shall be
plugged with brick masonry unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
D.
Manhole Inverts shall conform accurately to the size of the adjoining pipes.
1.
Unless noted otherwise, Manhole inverts shall be constructed of 3,500 psi
concrete as shown the Drawings.
2.
Inverts shall be laid out in smooth diameter curves of the longest possible
radius to provide uniform flow channels.
3.
Invert shelves shall be graded with a 1-inch drop per 1-foot length sloped from
the manhole walls.
E.
Manhole steps shall be accurately positioned and embedded in the concrete when
the section is cast. Precast-reinforced concrete manhole sections shall be set
vertical and with sections and steps in true alignment.
F.
All holes in sections used for their handling shall be thoroughly plugged with rubber
plugs made specifically for this purpose or with mortar. The mortar shall be one part
cement to 1-1/2 parts sand, mixed slightly damp to the touch, hammered into the
holes until it is dense and an excess of paste appears on the surface, and finished
smooth and flush with the adjoining surfaces.
J.
Precast sections shall be level and plumb with approved joint seals. Water shall not
be permitted to rise over newly made joints until after inspection and acceptance. All
joints shall be watertight.
L.
Openings which have to be cut in the sections in the field shall be carefully made to
prevent damage to the riser. Damaged risers will be rejected and shall be replaced
at no additional cost to the Owner.
BRICK MASONRY
A.
Brick masonry structures shall be watertight. All leaks in brick masonry structures
shall be sealed. All brick masonry shall be laid by skilled workmen.
B.
All beds on which masonry is to be laid shall be cleaned and wetted properly. Brick
shall be wetted as required to be damp, but free of any surface water when placed in
the work. Bed joints shall be formed of a thick layer of mortar which shall be
smoothed or furrowed slightly. Head joints shall be formed by applying a full coat of
mortar on the entire brick end, or on the entire side, and then shoving the mortar
covered end or side of the brick tightly against the bricks laid previously. The
practice of buttering at the corners of the brick and then throwing the mortar or
crappings in the empty joints will not be permitted. Dry or butt joints will not be
permitted. Joints shall be uniform in thickness and approximately 1/4 inch thick.
3.05
C.
Brickwork shall be constructed accurately to the required structure dimensions and
tapered at the top to the dimensions of the flanges of the cast-iron frames, as shown
on the Drawings.
D.
Joints on the inside face of walls shall be tooled slightly concave with an approved
jointer when the mortar is thumbprint hard. The mortar shall be compressed with
complete contact along the edges to seal the surface of the joints.
E.
All castings to be embedded in the brickwork shall be accurately set and built-in as
the work progresses.
F.
Water shall not be allowed to flow against brickwork or to rise on the masonry for 60
hours after it has been laid, and any brick masonry damaged in this manner shall be
replaced as directed at no additional cost to the Owner. Adequate precautions shall
be taken in freezing weather to protect the masonry from damage by frost.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
3.06
3.07
Concrete masonry units shall be soaked in water before laying. As circular concrete
block walls are laid-up, the horizontal joints and keyways shall be flushed full with
mortar. As rectangular blocks are laid-up, all horizontal and vertical joints shall be
flushed full with mortar. Plastering of the outside of block structures will not be
required. No structure shall be backfilled until all mortar has completely set.
MANHOLE STEPS
A.
Steps shall be cast into the precast walls during manufacture.
B.
Steps in brick masonry and concrete units shall be installed as the masonry courses
are laid.
CASTINGS
A.
Cast-iron frames for grates and covers shall be well bedded in cement mortar and
accurately set to the proposed grades.
B.
All voids between the bottom flange and the structure shall be completely filled to
make a watertight fit. A ring of mortar, at least one-inch thick and pitched to shed
water away from the frame shall be placed over and around the outside of the
bottom flange. The mortar shall extend to the outer edge of the masonry all around
its circumference and shall be finished smooth. No visible leakage will be permitted.
C.
Structures within the limits of bituminous concrete pavement shall be temporarily set
at the elevation of the bottom of the binder course. After the binder course has been
compacted, the structures shall be set at their final grade. Backfill necessary around
such structures after the binder course has been completed shall be made with
3,500 psi concrete.
3.08
3.09
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES
A.
General Requirements: The contractor shall make all required connections of the
proposed drainage system into existing drainage system, where and as shown on
the Drawings.
B.
Compliance with Requirements of Owner of Facility: Connections into existing
drainage system facilities shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
the Owner of the facility. The Contractor shall comply with all such requirements,
including securing of all required permits, and paying the costs thereof.
MANHOLE CONNECTIONS
A.
3.10
Manhole pipe connections for precast manhole bases may be accomplished by any
method described below. The Contractor shall make sure that the outside diameter
of the pipe is compatible with the particular pipe connection used.
1.
A tapered hole filled with non-shrink waterproof grout after the pipe is
inserted. This connection method will not be allowed when connecting pipe to
manholes.
2.
The LOCK JOINT Flexible Manhole Sleeve cast in the wall of the manhole
base. The stainless steel strap and exposed sleeve shall be protected from
corrosion with a bitumastic coating.
3.
PRESS WEDGE II gasket cast into the wall on the manhole base. The rubber
wedge shall only be driven into the V slot from the outside of the manhole.
4.
The RES-SEAL, a cast iron compression ring which compresses a rubber “O”
ring gasket into a tapered hole in the wall of the manhole base. Exposed
metal shall be protected from corrosion with a bitumastic coating.
5.
KOR-N-SEAL neoprene boot cast into the manhole wall. The stainless steel
clamp shall be protected from corrosion with a bitumastic coating.
ROOF DRAIN OR SIMILAR CONNECTIONS
A.
General Requirements: The Contractor shall make all required connections of the
building drainage system pipes into the site drainage system at locations and at
distances from the buildings as shown on the drawings. If stubs are constructed for
later connection to the building pipes, the ends shall be sealed with watertight plugs
and marked with 2 x 4 risers for later location
B.
Coordination with Building Contractor: The Contractor shall coordinate the work with
the work of the Building Contractor to determine the exact location and elevation of
the point of entry into the building.
C.
3.11
3.12
Connections: Roof drain connections to the site drainage system shall be made with
fittings supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
TRENCH DRAINS AND SLOTTED DRAINS
A.
Trench drain and slotted drain installation methods shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and the details shown on the Drawings.
B.
The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's written instructions for installation
prior to installation, as required in Article 1.03.
CLEANING AND REPAIR
A.
The Contractor shall clean the entire drainage system of all debris and obstructions.
This shall include, removal of all formwork from structures, concrete and mortar
droppings, construction debris and dirt. The system shall be thoroughly flushed
clean and the Contractor shall furnish all necessary hose, pumps, pipe and other
equipment that may be required for this purpose. No debris shall be flushed into
existing drains, storm recharge chambers, storm drains and/or streams.
B.
The Contractor shall make the necessary repairs or replacements required to
permanently provide an o pen and structurally sound drainage system capable of
supporting the anticipated loading from all sources throughout the year.
END OF SECTION 02400
SECTION 02441 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, apply to
work of this section.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A. Provide an underground irrigation system for the site as shown and specified.
includes:
The work
1. Automatic irrigation system including piping, fittings, sprinkler heads, and accessories.
2. Valves and fittings.
3. Controller, control wire.
4. Testing.
5. Excavating and backfilling irrigation system work.
6. Pipe sleeves.
7. Backflow preventer.
B. Related work:
1. Section 02490: Trees, Shrubs, and Ground Covers.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to applicable codes for piping and component requirements.
B. Materials, equipment, and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes and
standards:
1. Henrico County, Public Utilities and Public Works Standards.
2. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): National Electrical Code.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).
4. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF).
5. The Irrigation Association, (IA).
C. Excavating, backfilling, and compacting operations: Comply with Section 02200 requirements
and as specified.
D. Obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of installed and tested irrigation system prior to
installing backfill materials.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each of the system
components including but not limited to:
1. Sprinkler heads,
2. Valves and valve access boxes.
3. Controller.
4. Piping and fittings.
5. Wire connectors and sealer.
B. Upon irrigation system acceptance, submit written operating and maintenance instructions.
Provide format and contents as directed by the Landscape Architect.
C. Provide irrigation system record drawings:
1. Legibly mark drawings to record actual construction.
2. Indicate a measured distance triangulated to locate each installed valve-automatic,
manual, quick-coupling type, and sprinkler.
3. Identify field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by Change Order, if
any.
4. Submit As-Built drawings to the owner on base drawings provided by the irrigation
designer.
5. As-Builts shall also indicate control valve wiring routing paths, wire splice locations and
controller location.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturer's original undamaged and unopened
containers with labels intact and legible.
B. Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends, both
threaded or plain.
C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration.
D. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinkler heads, and similar components that can
not be immediately replaced, to prevent installation delays.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the drawings.
B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part of
the final landscape work.
C. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by irrigation system work
operations. Cost of repairs at Contractor's expense.
D. Promptly notify the Landscape Architect of unexpected sub-surface conditions.
E. Irrigation system layout is diagrammatic. Exact locations of piping, sprinkler heads,
valves, and other components shall be established by Contractor in the field at time of
installation.
1. Space sprinkler components as indicated.
2. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to clear existing fixed
obstructions. Final system layout shall be acceptable to the Landscape Architect.
E. Cutting and patching:
1. Cut through concrete and masonry with core drills. Jack hammers not permitted.
2. Materials and finishes for patching shall match existing cut surface materials and finish.
Exercise special care to provide patching at openings in exterior walls water tight.
3. Methods and materials used for cutting and patching shall be acceptable to the
Landscape Architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Provide only new materials, without flaws or defects and of the highest quality of their
specified class and kind.
2. Comply with pipe sizes indicated. No substitution of smaller pipes will be permitted.
Larger sizes may be used subject to acceptance of the Landscape Architect. Remove
damaged and defective pipe.
3. Provide pipe continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name or
trademark, size schedule and type of pipe, working pressure at 73 degrees F. and
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approval.
B. Plastic pipe, fittings, and connections:
1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe: ASTM D2241, rigid, unplasticized PVC, extruded from virgin
parent material. Provide pipe homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks,
holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles, and dents.
a. 1" diameter and under: SDR 21, Class 200.
b. Over 1" diameter: SDR 26, Class 160.
2. Polyethylene pipe: ASTM D2239 flexible polyethylene pipe rated at 100 PSI minimum
working pressure.
3. PVC pipe fittings: ASTM D2241 schedule 40 PVC molded fittings suitable for solvent
weld, slip joint ring tight seal, or screwed connections. Fittings made of other materials
are not permitted.
4. Insert fittings: ASTM D2466 insert type fittings.
a. Saddle and cross fittings not permitted.
C. Sprinkler heads, pumps, valves, and associated equipment: Provide manufacturers data on
each type of equipment to obtain Landscape Architect's approval.
1. Outlets:
a. Spray Type Sprinkler Head: Pop-up head with patterns necessary to perform
as indicated. 12" pop-up as indicated.
2. Valves:
a. Automatic remote control valves (RCV) shall be as specified on drawings.
RCV's shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be
rated for pressure and flow as required. RCV's shall be low voltage.
b. Manual isolation valves shall be brass or bronze with non-rising stem.
c.
Electric solenoid: Normally closed pressure compensating valves.
3. Quick coupler valves:
a. Heavy duty brass quick couplers with metal cover. Provide one key and
swivel. Size: ¾” .
b. Quantity: two. Location to be determined in field.
4. Wire:
a. Control wire shall be #14 gauge UL/UF, direct burial, sized as required by
valve and controller manufacturers' charts.
b. All wire splices below grade, shall be made water proof with wire splice
connectors, made for direct burial and rated for minimum of 30 volts.
c.
Provide 4 spare wires to be coiled and terminated in the valve box furthest
from the controller.
d. Wire shall be color coded as follows:
i. Common wire: White
ii. Zone valve wire: Red
iii. Spare wire: Blue
5. Controller:
a. Controller shall be as indicated, UL approved for indoor or outdoor
installation as required, with low voltage output, and lockable cabinet.
b. Controller to be grounded, per manufacturers' specifications.
6. Backflow preventer:
a. Backflow preventer shall be a reduced pressure assembly type. Size as
indicated on the drawings.
7. Sleeves:
a. Sleeves shall be schedule 40 PVC.
2.02
ACCESSORIES
A. Drainage fill: 1/2" or 3/4" washed gravel.
B. Fill: Clean soil free of stones larger than 2" diameter foreign matter, organic material, and
debris.
1. Provide imported fill material as required to complete the work. Obtain rights and pay
all costs for imported materials.
2. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate the irrigation system work may
be used as fill material subject to the Landscape Architect's review and acceptance.
C. Paint: Flat Black, rust inhibitive paint.
D. Clamps: Stainless steel, worm gear hose clamps with stainless steel screws or ear type
clamps.
E. Low voltage wire connectors: Socket seal type wire connectors and waterproof sealer.
F. Backflow preventer enclosure: Lockable aluminum enclosure w/ stainless steel hardware sized
to accommodate backflow preventer. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.
G. Valve access boxes: Tapered enclosure of rigid plastic material comprised of fibrous
components chemically inert and unaffected by moisture corrosion and temperature changes.
Provide lid of same material brown in mulched areas.
1. 10” x 16” approx. top dimension x necessary depth.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Examine final grades and installation conditions. Verify that field measurements are as shown
on drawings. Do not start irrigation system work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Verify the location of utilities, plant materials, and shrub bed lines.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location and ready for use.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prior to excavation, utility companies shall be notified in accordance with local codes and
ordinances.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing utilities and structures due to negligence
and/or misuse by his crews or equipment.
C. Layout and stake the location of each pipe run and all sprinkler heads and sprinkler valves.
Obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of layout prior to excavating.
D. Strip sod for pipe trenches with a mechanical sod stripper uniformly 1" to 1-1/2" thick with clean
cut edges.
E. Place sleeves as necessary for installation of piping and control wire. All piping under walks
and walls shall be within a PVC sleeve.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Excavating and backfilling:
1. All excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation and include all materials
encountered.
2. Excavation shall include all materials encountered, except materials that cannot be
excavated by normal mechanical means.
a. Rock excavation: Submit a unit cost per foot of trench for rock excavation.
Include in price additional backfill materials required to replace excavated
rock.
3. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and
installation of pipe and fittings.
4. If the pulling method is used, the pipe "plow" shall be a vibratory type. Starting and
finishing holes for pipe pulling shall not exceed a 1'-0" by 3'-0" opening.
5. Excavate to depths required to provide 2" depth of earth fill or sand bedding for piping
when rock or other unsuitable bearing material is encountered.
6. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Place and
compact fill in layers not greater than 8" depth.
a. Provide approved earth fill or sand to a point 4" above the top of pipe.
b. Fill to within 6" of final grade with approved excavated or borrow fill materials
free of lumps or rocks larger than 3" in any dimension.
c.
Provide clean topsoil fill free of rocks and debris for top 6" of fill.
7. Provide 1 cu. ft. of drainage fill aggregate around each pop-up impact type sprinkler
head to permit drainage of water from the sprinkler case.
8. Install irrigation lines with a minimum cover of 12" based on finished grades.
9. Excavate trenches and install piping and fill during the same working day. Do not
leave open trenches or partially filled trenches open overnight.
10. Replace stripped sod in sufficient time to allow for satisfactory sod recovery and
growth. Water stripped and reinstalled sod until irrigation system is placed in operation.
B. Plastic pipe:
1. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide
for thermal expansion and contraction.
2. Saw cut plastic pipe. Use a square-in-sawing vise, to ensure a square cut. Remove
burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation.
3. Make plastic to plastic joints with solvent weld joints or slip seal joints. Use only
solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Install plastic pipe fittings in
accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall make arrangements
with pipe manufacturer for all necessary field assistance.
4. Make plastic to metal joints with plastic male adapters.
5. Make solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
6. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system.
7. Uncoil poly-pipe and insert fitting full depth. Secure poly-pipe to insert fittings with
stainless steel clamps. Double clamp pipe over 1-1/4" diameter.
8. Polyethylene pipe shall be used only on non-constantly pressurized lines.
9. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by acceptable
methods when pipe installation is not in progress.
10. Thrust blocks shall be provided for pipes when 2 1/2" or greater in size.
a. Thrust blocks will be provided on the thrust side whenever the PVC main:
i.
Changes direction.
ii.
Stops - as at a dead end.
iii. Has valves where thrust may be expected.
b. Thrust blocks are to be made of concrete and are to be installed between
the fittings and the undisturbed soil of the adjacent trench wall.
c.
Use rebar pins in loose soils. Drive pins into hard soil on thrust side of fitting
and pour concrete around fitting.
C. Sprinklers, fittings, valves, and accessories:
1. Install fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, risers, and accessories in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Set sprinkler heads perpendicular to finished grades, except as otherwise indicated.
3. Provide pop-up spray heads with a flex-swing pipe or an adjustable double swing joint
riser assembled by the use of at least 3 standard 90 degree ells. Fabricate double
swing joint risers of schedule 80 PVC nipples and schedule 40 PVC elbows.
4. Obtain Landscape Architect's review and acceptance of height for proposed sprinkler
heads and valves prior to installation.
5. Locate sprinkler heads to assure proper coverage of indicated areas. Do not exceed
sprinkler head spacing distances indicated.
6. Install risers for spray heads in shrub or flower bed areas and planters of sufficient
height to prevent interruption of the stream by the plant material.
a. Provide risers of 1/2" SDR 21 class 200 PVC pipe with schedule 40 PVC
b. male adapters.
c.
Paint exposed plastic risers with 1 coat flat black paint.
d. Set risers in a row with top level and in-line.
7. Install quick-coupling valves with an adjustable double swing joint riser assembled by
the use of at least 3 standard 90 degree elbows. Fabricate double swing joint risers of
schedule 80 PVC nipples and schedule 40 PVC elbows.
8. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
9. Install valve access boxes on a suitable base of gravel to provide a level foundation at
proper grade and to provide drainage of the access box.
10. Automatic valves shall be installed plumb within valve access box with all valve
handles, bolts, connections and electrical splices accessible through the valve box
opening.
11. Seal threaded connections on pressure side of control valves with teflon tape or
approved plastic joint type compound.
D. Control wiring:
1. Install electric control cable in the piping trenches wherever possible. Place wire in
trench adjacent to pipe. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal expansion and
contraction. Expansion joints in wire may be provided at 200-foot intervals by making
5-6 turns of the wire around a piece of 1/2" pipe instead of slack. Where necessary to
run wire in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover of 12".
2. Provide sufficient slack at site connections at remote control valves in control boxes,
and at all wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or splice to the surface without
disconnecting the wires when repair is required.
3. Connect each remote control valve to one station of a controller except as otherwise
indicated.
4. Connect remote control valves to a common ground wire system, independent of all
other controllers.
5. Make wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of wire in the field,
using waterproof wire connectors and sealing cement in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Make wire splices in accessible splice or valve
boxes.
6. Provide tight joints to prevent leakage of water and corrosion build-up on the joint.
7. When control wiring is in common trench with main line, wiring shall bebelow main line
with 6" of fill dirt between pipe and wire.
8. Above-ground wire is to be installed in conduit and/or in accordance with electrical
codes.
9. All materials and methods of installation shall conform to local electrical codes.
E. Sleeves:
1. Provide new sleeves for all locations where existing sleeves are not indicated. Install
new sleeves prior to paving installation where ever possible.
2. Install pipe sleeves under existing concrete or asphalt surface by jacking, boring, or
hydraulic driving of the sleeve. Remove and replace existing concrete and asphalt
surfaces where cutting is necessary. Obtain Landscape Architect's permission before
cutting existing concrete and asphalt surfaces. Where piping is shown under paved
areas which are adjacent to turf areas, install the piping in the turf areas.
3. Sleeve Material: Sch. 40, PVC.
F. Quick-Coupling Valves
1. Quick-coupling valves: install downstream from backflow preventer. When used as an
outside blow-out point, install as close to the Point of Connection as possible. Install
on rigid swing joint assembly.
2. When installed in lawn area, provide a 10" valve box for location. Stabilize the valve
with a stake and gravel. If installed in shrub area, set box top level with mulch. Install
pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Flushing, testing, and adjustment:
1. After sprinkler piping and risers are installed and before sprinkler heads are installed,
open control valves and flush out the system with full head of water.
2. Prior to backfilling, test system for leakage for whole system to maintain 100 air
pressure for one hour. System acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure occurs
during test period.
3. Perform system testing upon completion of each section. Make necessary repairs and
retest repaired sections as required.
4. Adjust sprinklers after installation for proper and adequate distribution of the water over
the coverage pattern. Adjust for the proper arc of coverage.
5. Tighten nozzles on spray type sprinklers after installation. Adjust sprinkler adjusting
screw on lateral line or circuit as required for proper radius. Interchange nozzles
patterns as directed by the Landscape Architect, to give best arc of coverage.
6. Adjust all electric remote control valve flow control stems for system balance.
7. Test and demonstrate the controller by operating appropriate day, hour and station
selection features as required to automatically start and shut down irrigation cycles to
accommodate plant requirements and weather conditions.
H. Service:
1. When requested, return to the site during the subsequent fall season and winterize the
system. Drain all water from the system or blow out the system with compressed air.
2. When requested, return to the site during the subsequent spring season and
demonstrate to the Landscape Architect the proper procedures for the system start-up,
operation, and maintenance.
3.04
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials, including unsuitable
excavated materials, rock, trash, and debris.
B. Maintain disposal route clear, clean, and free of debris.
3.05
ACCEPTANCE
A. Test and demonstrate to the Landscape Architect the satisfactory operation of the system free
of leaks.
B. Instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of the system, including adjustment
of sprinklers, controller(s), valves, pump controls, and moisture sensing controls.
C. Upon acceptance the Owner will assume operation of the system.
3.06
GUARANTEE
A. The contractor shall guarantee all workmanship, material, fixtures and equipment covered by
the specifications to be free of defects for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance
of the project. He shall replace any part of parts found to be defective within the period of
guarantee at no cost to the owner, except repairs or replacement necessitated by damage by
others.
B. Backfilling of all excavation shall be guaranteed. If, at any time during the one year guarantee
period, trenches should settle, the irrigation contractor shall repair any settling at no cost to the
owner.
3.07
CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove
from site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from
irrigation system installation.
END OF SECTION 02441
SECTION 02490 - TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Provide trees, shrubs, and ground covers as shown and specified. The work includes:
1. Soil preparation.
2. Trees, shrubs, and ground covers.
3. Planting mixes.
4. Mulch and planting accessories.
5. Maintenance.
B. Related work:
1. Section 02441: Irrigation System.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Plant names indicated; comply with "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by the latest
edition of the American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature. Names of varieties not
listed conform generally with names accepted by the nursery trade. Provide stock true to
botanical name and legible tagged.
B. Comply with sizing and grading standards of the latest edition of "American Standard for
Nursery Stock". A plant shall be dimensioned as it stands in its natural position.
C. All plants shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the
project for a minimum of 2 years.
D. Stock furnished shall be at least the minimum size indicated. Larger stock is acceptable, at no
additional cost, and providing that the larger plants will not be cut back to size indicated.
Provide plants indicated by two measurements so that only a maximum of 25% are of the
minimum size indicated and 75% are of the maximum size indicated.
E. Provide "specimen" plants with a special height, shape, or character of growth. Tag specimen
trees or shrubs at the source of supply. The Landscape Architect will inspect specimen
selections at the source of supply for suitability and adaptability to selected location. When
specimen plants cannot be purchased locally, provide sufficient photographs of the proposed
specimen plants for approval.
F. Plants may be inspected and approved at the place of growth, for compliance with specification
requirements for quality, size, and variety.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following material samples:
1. Mulch.
2. Planting accessories.
B. Submit the following materials certification:
1. Topsoil source and pH value.
2. Peat moss.
3. Plant fertilizer.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fertilizer materials in original, unopened, and undamaged containers showing weight,
analysis, and name of manufacturer. Store in manner to prevent wetting and deterioration.
B. Take all precautions customary in good trade practice in preparing plants for moving.
Workmanship that fails to meet the highest standards will be rejected. Spray deciduous plants
in foliage with an approved "Anti-Desiccant" immediately after digging to prevent dehydration.
Dig, pack, transport, and handle plants with care to ensure protection against injury. Inspection
certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment invoice or order to stock and on
arrival, the certificate shall be filed with the Landscape Architect.
C. Protect all plants from drying out. If plants cannot be planted immediately upon delivery,
properly protect them with soil, wet peat moss, or in a manner acceptable to the Landscape
Architect. Water heeled-in plantings daily. No plant shall be bound with rope or wire in a
manner that could damage or break the branches.
D. Cover plants transported on open vehicles with a protective covering to prevent windburn.
E. Provide dry, loose topsoil for planting bed mixes. Frozen or muddy topsoil is not acceptable.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Work notification: Notify Landscape Architect at least 7 working days prior to installation of
plant material.
B. Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by landscaping
operations.
C. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of sizes, quantities, and other requirements is
shown on the drawings. In the event that quantity discrepancies or material omissions occur in
the plant materials list, the planting plans shall govern.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Warrant plant material to remain alive and be in healthy, vigorous condition for a period of 1
year after completion and acceptance of entire project.
1. Inspection of plants will be made by the Landscape Architect at completion of planting.
B. Replace, in accordance with the drawings and specifications, all plants that are dead or, as
determined by the Landscape Architect, are in an unhealthy or unsightly condition, and have
lost their natural shape due to dead branches, or other causes due to the Contractor's
negligence. The cost of such replacement(s) is at contractor's expense. Warrant all
replacement plants for the balance of the original warranty period.
C. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of trees, plants, or ground covers caused by fires,
floods, freezing rains, lightning storms, or winds over 75 miles per hour, or acts of vandalism.
D. Remove and immediately replace all plants, as determined by the Landscape Architect, to be
unsatisfactory during the initial planting installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Plants: Provide plants typical of their species or variety with normal, densely developed
branches and vigorous, fibrous root systems. Provide only sound, healthy, vigorous plants free
from defects, disfiguring knots, sunscald injuries, frost cracks, abrasions of the bark, plant
diseases, insect eggs, borers, and all forms of infestation. All plants shall have a fully
developed form without voids and open spaces. Plants held in storage will be rejected if they
show signs of growth during storage.
1. Dig balled and burlapped plants with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full
recovery of the plant. Provide ball sizes complying with the latest edition of the
"American Standard for Nursery Stock". Cracked or mushroomed balls are not
acceptable.
2. Container-grown stock: Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for the root
system to have developed to hold its soil together, firm and whole.
a. No plants shall be loose in the container.
b. Container stock shall not be pot bound.
3. Provide tree species that mature at heights over 25'-0" with a single main trunk. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape are not acceptable.
4. Plants planted in rows shall be matched in form.
5. Plants larger than those specified in the plant list may be used when acceptable to the
Landscape Architect.
a. If the use of larger plants is acceptable, increase the spread of roots or root
ball if proportion to the size of the plant.
6. The height of the trees, measured from the crown of the roots to the top of the top
branch, shall not be less than the minimum size designated in the plant list.
7. No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than 1" and such wounds
must show vigorous bark on all edges.
8. Shrubs and small plants shall meet the requirements for spread and height indicated in
the plant list.
a. The measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level to the
average height of the top of the plant and not the longest branch.
b. Single stemmed or thin plants will not be accepted.
c.
Side branches shall be generous, well twigged, and the plant as a whole
shall be full to the ground.
d. Plants shall be in a moist, vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises,
or other root or branch injuries.
2.02
ACCESSORIES
A. Topsoil for Planting Beds: Fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy character, without admixture
of subsoil material, obtained from a well-drained arable site, reasonably free from clay, lumps,
coarse sands, stones, plants, roots, sticks, and other foreign materials, with acidity range of
between pH 6.0 and 6.8.
1. Identify source location of topsoil proposed for use on the project.
2. Provide topsoil free of substances harmful to the plants that will be grown in the soil.
B. Peat Moss: Brown to black in color, weed and seed free granulated raw peat or baled peat,
containing not more than 9% mineral on a dry basis.
1. Provide ASTM D2607 sphagnum peat moss with a pH below 6.0 for ericaceous plants.
C. Fertilizer:
1. Plant Fertilizer Type "A": Commercial type approved by the Landscape Architect,
containing 12% nitrogen, 12% phosphoric acid, and 12% potash by weight. 1/4 of
nitrogen in the form of nitrates, 1/4 in form of ammonia salt, and 1/2 in form of organic
nitrogen.
2. Plant Fertilizer Type "B": Approved acid-base fertilizer.
D. Anti-Desiccant: Protective film emulsion to provide a protective film over plant surfaces and
allow transpiration. Mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Mulch: 6 month old well rotted shredded native hardwood bark mulch not larger than 4" in
length and 1/2" in width, free of woodchips and sawdust.
F. Water: Free of substances harmful to plant growth. Hoses or other methods of transportation
furnished by contractor.
G. Stakes for Staking: Hardwood, 2" x 2" x 8'-0" long.
H. Stakes for Guying: #4 rebar, 18” long.
I.
Guying/Staking Strapping: 1/2” wide nylon.
J.
Staking and Guying Hose: Two-ply, reinforced garden hose not less than 1/2" inside diameter.
K. Twine: Two-ply jute material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Examine proposed planting areas and conditions of installation. Do not start planting work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Time of planting:
1. Evergreen material: Plant evergreen materials between September 1 and November 1
or in spring before new growth begins. If project requirements require planting at other
times, plants shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant prior to planting operations.
2. Deciduous material: Plant deciduous materials in a dormant condition. If deciduous
trees are planted in-leaf, they shall be sprayed with an anti-desiccant prior to planting
operation.
3. Planting times other than those indicated shall be acceptable to the Landscape
Architect.
B. Planting shall be performed only by experienced workmen familiar with planting procedures
under the supervision of a qualified supervisor.
C. All plant bed edges and trees shall be clearly staked for review by landscape architect and for
coordination with irrigation contractor.
D. Locate plants as indicated or as approved in the field after staking by the Contractor. If
obstructions are encountered that are not shown on the drawings, do not proceed with planting
operations until alternate plant locations have been selected.
E. Excavate circular plant pits with sloped sides, except for plants specifically indicated to be
planted in beds. Provide shrub pits at least 12" greater than the diameter of the root system
and 24" greater for trees. Depth of pit shall accommodate the root system. Remove
excavated materials from the site.
F. Provide topsoil planting mixture for use around the balls and roots of the plants with 1/2 lb.
plant fertilizer Type "A" for each cu. yd. of mixture.
G. Provide pre-mixed ground cover bed planting mixture consisting of and 1/2lb. plant fertilizer
Type "A" per cu. yd. Provide beds a minimum of 6" deep.
H. Provide pre-mixed planting mixture for use around the balls and roots of ericaceous plants
consisting of topsoil and 1/2 lb. plant fertilizer Type "B" per cu. yd. of mixture.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Set plant material in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. Set plants upright, plumb,
and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to each other or adjacent structure. Set
plant material 2"-3" above the finish grade. No filling will be permitted around trunks or stems.
Backfill the pit with planting mixture. Do not use frozen or muddy mixtures for backfilling. Form
a ring of soil around the edge of each planting pit to retain water.
B. After balled and burlapped plants are set, muddle planting soil mixture around bases of balls
and fill all voids.
1. Remove all burlap, ropes, and wires from the tops of balls.
2. Remove burlap from ericaceous plants.
C. Space ground cover plants in accordance with indicated dimensions. Adjust spacing as
necessary to evenly fill planting bed with indicated quantity of plants. Plant to within 12" of the
trunks of trees and shrubs within planting bed and to within 6" of edge of bed.
D. Mulching:
1. Mulch tree and shrub planting pits and shrub beds with required mulching material 3"
deep immediately after planting. Thoroughly water mulched areas. After watering,
rake mulch to provide a uniform finished surface.
2. Mulch ground cover beds and annual/perennial beds 1" to 1 1/2" deep immediately
after planting.
E. Guying and staking:
1. Staking/Guying: Stake/guy all trees immediately after lawn seeding or sodding
operations and prior to acceptance. When high winds or other conditions, which may
effect tree survival or appearance occur, the Landscape Architect may require
immediate staking/guying.
2. All work shall be acceptable to the Landscape Architect.
F. Pruning:
1. Prune branches of deciduous stock, after planting to preserve the natural character
appropriate to the particular plant requirements. Remove or cut back broken,
damaged, and unsymmetrical growth of new wood.
2. Multiple leader plants: Preserve the leader that will best promote the symmetry of the
plant. Cut branches flush with the trunk or main branch, at a point beyond a lateral
shoot or bud a distance of not less than 1/2 the diameter of the supporting branch.
Make cut on an angle.
3. Prune evergreens only to remove broken or damaged branches.
3.04
MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance of installed and accepted plantings will be performed by the Owner.
B. Maintenance until acceptance shall include pruning, cultivating, weeding, watering, and
application of appropriate insecticides and fungicides necessary to maintain plants free of
insects and disease.
1. Re-set settled plants to proper grade and position.
adjacent material and remove dead material.
Restore planting saucer and
2. Tighten and repair guy wires and stakes as required.
3. Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and
weather and season permit.
4. Water trees, plants, and ground cover beds within the first 24 hours of initial planting,
and not less than twice per week until final acceptance.
3.05
ACCEPTANCE
A. Planted areas will be inspected at completion of installation and accepted subject to
compliance with specified materials and installation requirements.
B. Inspection to determine acceptance of planted areas will be made by the Landscape Architect,
upon Contractor's request. Provide notification at least 10 working days before requested
inspection date.
1. Planted areas will be accepted provided all requirements, including maintenance, have
been compiled with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition.
C. Upon acceptance, the Owner will assume plant maintenance.
3.06
CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from
site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from planting
operations.
END OF SECTION 02490
SECTION 02495 - LANDSCAPE ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Provide landscape accessories as shown and specified. The work includes:
1. Trash Receptacles
2. Bike Racks
3. Metal Benches
B. Related Work:
1. Section 03300: Cast in place concrete
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Section 02000 requirements.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of factory fabricated accessory required,
including finish indicated.
B. Submit the following material samples.
1. Furnishing color samples.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store, and handle landscape accessories to prevent damage and deterioration.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not begin landscape accessory work before completion of final grading or surfacing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Metal Benches:
1. Manufacturer: Victor Stanley - Catalog No: RB-28 - 6’ length. Color: Black.
2. Manufacturer: Timberform – Renaissance - Catalog No: 2806-6 – 6’ length. Color:
Black.
3. Manufacturer: Keystone Ridge Designs - Catalog No: P26 6’ Pullman w/ back. Color:
Black.
B. Trash Receptacles:
1. Manufacturer: Keystone Ridge Designs - Catalog No: MT3-32E. Color: Black.
2. Manufacturer: Victor Stanley - Catalog No: ES-242 S-2A. Color: Black.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION:
A. Examine subgrades, finished surfaces, and installation conditions. Do not start landscape
accessories work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material and debris from base surface before placing landscape accessories.
B. Locate and layout all landscape accessory items. Obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of
layout prior to installation.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Trash Receptacle Installation
1. Anchor Bolts
a. Galvanized anchor bolts diameter shall be set in concrete slab at the
locations and depth shown on drawings.
2. Securing Trash Receptacles
a. The trash receptacle shall be set in place with each anchor bolt passing
through each hole provided in the base of the trash receptacle.
b. Trash receptacles shall be secured by a galvanized nut screwed onto the
anchor bolt and tightened with a hand tool.
c.
Attach trash receptacles to concrete slab with galvanized anchor bolt per
manufacturer's recommendation. Refer to Section 03300 for concrete.
d. If trash receptacle base is isolated from other concrete surfaces, the
concrete base thickness shall be 12" minimum and 2-8”' square.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from
site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from landscape
accessories work.
END OF SECTION 02495
SECTION 02500 - BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
1.02
A.
This Section specifies the requirements for bituminous concrete roadway, parking
area, driveway and sidewalk pavements.
B.
The work includes:
1.
Preparation for and execution of bituminous concrete paving.
2.
Bituminous concrete overlays over existing pavement, including surface
preparation, and leveling courses, tack coating and all other associated
operations required.
3.
Sawcutting existing pavements.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
1.03
Section 02200 - Earthwork 2.
Section 02525 - Curbing
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A.
1.04
The Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Specifications, dated
2002, revisions 2005, are the reference standards for the materials and procedures
to be used on this project.
WEATHER LIMITATIONS
A.
Consult the reference, section 315, for information on ambient temperature, asphalt
temperature, and breakdown rolling requirements.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. The contractor must submit eight (8) copies of an independent testing laboratory’s
analysis of the asphalt mixes to be used on the project. The analysis must be less than 12
months old. In addition to asphalt mix submittals, the contractor must submit material data
for tack coat, aggregate, and any other bituminous paving related materials.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
The contractor shall use the materials shown on the plan, and specified in the
Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Specifications, Dated 2002,
revisions in 2005.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor must install Bituminous concrete Pavement in accordance with the
reference specifications. The instructions included in this section are provided for
the Contractor’s information only. The Contractor is required to build the bituminous
pavement in accordance with the reference specification.
B.
The Contractor shall install all pavements in the location and to the grades shown on
the Drawings, or approved by the Owner’s Representative. The type and thickness
of pavement courses shall be as shown on the Drawings.
C.
Equipment. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and correct
breakdowns in a manner that will not delay or be detrimental to progress of paving
operations.
PREPARATION
A.
Proof roll prepared base material surface to identify areas requiring removal and
recompaction, and to provide a uniform degree of compaction over the entire
pavement area.
B.
Do not begin paving work until deficient base material areas have been corrected
and are ready to receive paving. Paving shall not be applied until the Owner’s
Representative inspects and approves the finished base.
C.
Check all frames, covers, grates, water valve boxes and other miscellaneous
castings that are located in the proposed pavement areas to ensure that all have
been correctly positioned and set to the proper slope and elevation. All covers and
grates shall be set flush with the required finished surface. No depressions or
mounds will be permitted in the pavement to accommodate inaccuracies in the
setting of castings.
D.
All vertical surfaces of structures and existing concrete surfaces in contact with new
bituminous pavement shall be painted with a uniform coating of an approved tack
coat material. Extreme care shall be exercised in the application of this material to
prevent splattering or staining of surfaces that will be exposed after the paving is
completed. Surfaces that are stained as a result of the Contractor's operation shall
be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
E.
All existing paved surfaces to be overlayed shall be thoroughly cleaned by a selfpropelled sweeper. Areas inaccessible by power sweeper shall be broom swept
until the pavement surface is clean.
3.03
APPLICATION
A.
3.04
3.05
Tack Coat
1.
Apply to contact surfaces of all cement concrete and other surfaces abutting
or projecting into pavement.
2.
Apply tack coat to existing pavement surfaces to receive bituminous concrete
overlay at a rate of 0.05 gallons per square yard of surface.
3.
Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving.
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A.
Spread bituminous concrete on completed compacted base surface.
B.
Whenever possible, all pavement shall be spread by a self-propelled finishing
machine. At inaccessible or irregular areas, pavement may be placed by hand
methods. If hand methods are used, the hot mixture shall be spread uniformly to the
required depth with hot shovels and rakes. After spreading, the hot mixture shall be
carefully smoothed to remove all segregated coarse aggregate and rake marks.
Rakes and lutes used for hand spreading shall be of the type designed for this use.
Material loads shall not be dumped faster that they can be properly spread.
Workers shall not stand on the loose mixture while spreading.
C.
Paving Machine Placement: In the larger parking fields, the binder course shall be
placed in a transverse direction to the top course. The top course shall be placed in
the direction of surface-water flow. Place in typical strips not less than 10 feet wide.
D.
Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, and between successive days'
work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construction joints shall
have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of paving. Clean
contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
ROLLING AND COMPACTION
A.
The mixture, after being spread, shall be thoroughly compacted by rollers having a
minimum weight of 240 pounds per inch of wheel width as soon as it will bear the
weight of the rollers without undue displacement. The number, weight, and types of
rollers and sequences of rolling operations shall be such that the required density
and surface are consistently attained while the mixture is in a workable condition.
B.
Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or hand rollers in areas inaccessible by selfpropelled rollers.
C.
Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and
outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling, and repair displaced areas by
loosening and filling, if required, with hot material.
D.
Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue
second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted.
3.06
E.
Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks.
Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained maximum
density.
F.
Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas
and fill with fresh, hot top or binder course material. Compact by rolling to maximum
surface density and smoothness.
G.
After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Testing Laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, shall be retained to
perform construction testing of in-place bituminous concrete courses for compliance
with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness. Top and base courses will
be randomly cored by the testing laboratory technicians at a minimum rate of one
core for every 20,000 square feet of paving, however, no less than three cores in
light duty areas and three cores in heavy duty areas will be obtained. Core holes
shall be immediately filled with bituminous or cement concrete by the Contractor.
Pavement samples will be tested for conformance with the mix design.
B.
Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations.
C.
Thickness: In-place compacted thickness shall not be less than thickness specified
on the drawings. Areas of deficient paving thickness shall receive a tack coat and a
minimum 1-inch compacted thickness overlay; or shall be removed and replaced to
the proper thickness, at the discretion of the Owner’s Representative, until specified
thickness of the course is met or exceeded at no additional cost to the Owner.
D.
Surface Smoothness: Testing shall be performed on the finished surface of each
course for smoothness, using 10-foot straightedge applied parallel with, and at right
angles to centerline of paved area. The results of these tests shall be made
available to the Owner upon request. Surfaces will not be acceptable if they exceed
the following tolerances for smoothness:
Base and binder course surface:
Top course surface:
1/4 inch
3/16 inch
E.
Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and
replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner.
F.
Compaction: Field density test for in-place materials shall be performed by
examination of field cores and shall have a minimum compacted density of 95% of
laboratory Marshall Density in accordance with one of the following standards:
1.
Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixture Using
Paraffin-Coated Specimens: ASTM D-1188.
2.
Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Saturated
Surface Dry Specimens: ASTM D-2726.
Areas of insufficient compaction shall be delineated, removed, and replaced
in compliance with the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.07
MEETING EXISTING PAVEMENTS
A.
Where new pavements will abut existing pavements, the Contractor shall sawcut the
existing pavements to produce a uniform, smooth joint surface. Sawcutting of
existing pavements shall be neat, straight and even lines, and done in a manner that
prevents damage to the pavement to remain.
B.
Full-Depth PavementSawcut by approved method to the full depth of the
pavement prior to placement of any new pavement. The sawcut surface shall be a
neat true line with straight vertical edges free from irregularities. The sawcut surface
shall be tack coated immediately prior to the installation of the new abutting
bituminous concrete material to provide a bond between the old and new pavement.
The new compacted pavement surface shall be finished flush with the abutting
pavement.
C.
Bituminous Concrete Overlays: The existing bituminous pavement shall be sawcut
to a neat true line with straight vertical edges free of irregularities for a minimum
depth of one and one half inches. One and one-half inches of pavement shall be
removed to form a transition section across the entire pavement width and with a
length of two feet at driveways and six feet in roadways and parking areas.
Immediately prior to the placement of the bituminous concrete overlay, the sawcut
edges of the existing pavement shall be tack coated to bond the new pavement to
the old pavement. The new pavement surface shall be finished flush with the
abutting pavement. The surface seam of the pavement joint shall be sealed with
tack coat and back sanded.
END OF SECTION 02500
SECTION 02517 - DRY LAID BRICK PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide dry laid brick paving as shown and specified. The work includes:
1. Brick paving over a rigid base.
2. Base and bedding.
B. Related work:
1. Section 03300: Cast in Place Concrete
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with Section 02000 requirements.
B. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards:
1. Brick Institute of America, (BIA): Technical Notes on Brick Construction.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).
3. American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials, (AASHTO).
C. Installation: Performed only by skilled workmen with satisfactory record of performance on
completed projects of comparable size and quality.
D. Do not change source of brick pavers during the course of the work.
1.03
SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instruction brick paver units.
B. Submit a minimum of five full size samples of each color paver unit required. Include the full
range of style, size, exposed finish, color, and texture proposed for the work.
C. Submit manufacturer's certification that paver units comply with specified material and physical
requirements.
D. Submit material certificates for base and bedding materials.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect paving units from damage, chipping, and soiling during delivery and storage. Store off
the ground on pallets or wood platforms.
B. Store loose granular materials in a well drained area on a solid surface to prevent mixing with
foreign materials.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Review installation procedures and coordinate paving work with other work affected by the
interlocking concrete unit paving work.
B. Cold weather:
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
2. Do not build on frozen work or wet, saturated or muddy subgrade. Remove and
replace paving damaged by frost or freezing.
3. Protect completed and partially completed paving against weather, vehicular and
pedestrian traffic damage.
4. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of project
work and public safety.
5. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, or staining during paving operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS:
A. General: Brick paver unit materials and fabrication shall meet or exceed the requirements of
ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. .
1. Paving Brick, when tested in accordance with ASTM C67, shall show no efflorescence.
Submit manufacturer’s certification of test results.
2. Compressive strength: Minimum 8,500 psi at time of delivery.
3. Absorption: Maximum 5%.
4. Freeze-thaw test: ASTM C67, no breakage and maximum 1% loss in dry weight after
50 cycles.
5. Abrasion resistance: ASTM C418, maximum volume loss 15 cu. cm. per 50 cu. cm.
Average thickness loss 3 mm.
6. Dimension tolerances: Length maximum 1/16" (1.5 mm), height maximum 1/8" (3 mm)
from standard dimension.
7. Provide only sound units free of defects that would interfere with proper placing of units
or impair strength or permanence of construction. Minor cracks and minor chipping
incidental to methods of manufacture, handling in shipment, and delivery will be
acceptable subject to Landscape Architect's review and acceptance. Excessive cracks
and shipping, as determined by the Landscape Architect, will be rejected as not
complying with specification requirements.
8. Provide test reports certifying materials and physical requirements compliance. Tests
shall have been conducted not more than 12 months prior to manufacture.
B. Paver units:
1. Design style: Brick paver - 8" x 4" x 2 1/4” thick.
2. Color: Pathway full range.
3. Manufacturer: Pine Hall
4. Base material: Concrete - depth as indicated.
5. Bedding and leveling material: ASTM C33 or AASHTO M43, #10 graded clean coarse
concrete sand. Depth as indicated.
6. Joint fill: Clean concrete sand.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION:
A. Examine substrates and installation conditions. Do not brick paving work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION:
A. Do not use paving units with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other visible defects.
B. Cut paving units with motor-driven saw equipment designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp
unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work
neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Where cutting is required, use the
largest size units possible. Avoid the use of small pieces of pavers or large joint spaces.
C. Set brick pavers in patterns indicated with level surface and uniform joints of widths indicated.
3.03
INSTALLATION: BASE MATERIALS
A. Base course:
1. Obtain Landscape Architect's inspection and acceptance of subgrade surface before
placing of base course materials.
2. Screed, level, and shape base course surface to required grade and cross-section with
an allowable local tolerance of 1/4".
B. Bedding and leveling course:
1. Obtain Landscape Architect's inspection and acceptance of finished base course
before placing bedding and leveling course materials.
2. Spread bedding and leveling course materials evenly over the entire area to be paved,
screed to a minimum level that will provide a minimum 1 1/2" thickness when the
paving bricks have been placed and vibrated.
3. Protect screeded and leveled bedding and leveling course from damage until covered
with paver units. Do not pre compact bedding and leveling course.
4. Where brick pavers are to be used at City Sidewalks and within courtyards where
service vehicle traffic is expected a minimum 4” concrete sub-base is required below
the bedding and leveling course.
3.04
INSTALLATION: DRY LAID BRICK PAVERS
A. Lay paver units in herringbone pattern per VCU standards. Maintain desired pattern and
provide uniform 1/16" to 1/8" joints between units.
B. Fill gaps at the edge of the paved surface with standard edge pieces or with paver units cut to
fit. Provide cut units with straight even cut surfaces, free from cracks or chips.
C. Vibrate paver units to their final level with three or more passes of a vibrating plate compactor.
D. After first vibration, brush sand over the surface and vibrate into the joints with additional
passes of the plate vibrator. Completely fill joints.
E. After final vibrating the surface shall be true to grade and shall not vary by more than 1/4" when
tested with a 10'-0" straight edge at any location on the surface.
3.05
PROTECTION:
A. Restrict traffic from brick paving surfaces during setting of units and until completion of
installation.
B. Protect brick paving from damage until final acceptance.
3.06
CLEANING:
A. Remove and brick paving units which are broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged.
Provide new matching units, install as specified and to eliminate evidence to replacement.
B. Perform cleaning during installation of work and upon completion of the work. Remove from
site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from brick paving
operations.
END OF SECTION 02517
SECTION 02525 - CURBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies requirements for furnishing and installing all types of granite,
concrete and bituminous concrete curbs, edging and berms.
B.
The work includes:
Furnishing and installing granite curb, granite edging, curb inlets, and curb
corners, precast concrete curb, cast-in-place concrete curb, and bituminous
concrete curb and berms.
2.
All associated items and operations required to complete the installations,
including surface preparation, concrete support, jointing and finishing.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.03
1.
Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
Section 02100 - Site Preparation and Demolition
2.
Section 02200 – Earthwork
3.
Section 02220 – Pavement Subbase and Base
4.
Section 02500 - Bituminous Concrete Pavement
5.
Section 03301 - Site Cast-in-Place Concrete
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
References herein are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and, all
work under this Section shall conform to the latest editions as applicable.
B.
ACI 304Recommended Practice for measuring, mixing, transporting and placing
concrete.
C.
ANSI/ASTM D1751Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Non extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
D.
ANSI/ASTM D1752Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers
for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
E.
ASTM C33Concrete Aggregates.
F.
ASTM C94Ready-Mixed Concrete.
G.
ASTM C150Portland Cement.
H.
ASTM C260Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
I.
ASTM C309Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curbing Concrete.
J.
1.04
1.05
ASTM C494Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's literature for granite and precast curb,
edging, corners and inlets, indicating size, shape and dimensions, finish and setting
method for Engineer's approval.
B.
Copies of tests on representative samples of the concrete used in the manufacture
of precast units showing a compressive strength of 5,000 pounds must be received
by the Engineer prior to shipping any units.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Granite and precast curb units shall be adequately protected from damage during
transit to the site.
B.
Curbing shall be protected against staining, chipping, and other damage. Cracked,
badly chipped, or stained units will be rejected and shall not be employed in the
work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
Concrete curb shall be in accordance with the City of Richmond Concrete Curb
Standards and Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE CITY OF RICHMOND
STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS):
A.
Trenching, excavation, backfilling, and compaction shall be completed in
accordance with Section 02200 Earthwork, except as modified within this Section.
B.
Cement mortar bedding, if required, shall be placed as shown on the drawings and
in accordance with Section 03301, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
PRECAST CONCRETE CURB (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE CITY OF
RICHMOND STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS):
A.
Precast units delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded and
placed along the prepared curb trench, or other designated location, with the
minimum amount of handling.
B.
1.
Materials shall be handled in a manner that prevents damage to the curb
units.
2.
All individual pieces of curved curbing shall be marked to correspond to the
radius and location where curbing is to be set.
Excavation shall extend 6 inches below and behind finished curb, as shown on the
Drawings.
1.
3.02
The gravel base shall be placed in the excavated area, compacted and
graded to the proposed curb subgrade.
C.
Precast concrete curb units shall be doweled together continuously to the line and
grade shown on the Drawings. Any units damaged during setting operations shall
be removed and replaced.
D.
After the curb is set, the trench shall be backfilled immediately with approved
material. The first layer shall be 4 inches in depth and compacted. The other layers
shall be not more than 6 inches in depth and compacted until the trench is filled.
Care shall be taken to prevent disturbing the line or grade of the curb during this
procedure.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURB(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE CITY
OF RICHMOND STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS):
A.
General: Concrete curb shall be cast in place to the size, shape, line and grade
shown on the Drawings. The curbing shall be constructed using clean, undamaged
forms and in segments separated by construction joints and expansion joints.
B.
Preparation: The curb trench shall be excavated, and the gravel base placed to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings. The gravel base shall be compacted and
graded to the proposed curb subgrade.
C.
Forms: Forms shall be metal or acceptable planed and matched lumber, straight
and free from warp or other irregularities that will adversely affect the installation.
Forms shall conform to the curb cross-sections shown on the drawings and shall be
carefully set to line and grade, thoroughly braced and secured in place so that there
will be no displacement during placing of the concrete. All forms shall be thoroughly
cleaned prior to reuse.
D.
Placing of Concrete: Prior to placing the concrete, the subgrade shall be moistened
and the contact surfaces of the forms given a light coating of oil that will not discolor
the concrete. Concrete shall be placed in the form, struck off with a template and
spaded or otherwise compacted to eliminate voids and finished to a smooth even
surface. The concrete may be compacted by mechanical vibrators if approved by
the Engineer. Placing by slip form methods shall be approved by the Engineer.
E.
Expansion Joints: Vertical expansion joints shall be located approximately every
seventy-five feet and shall match the location of points of curb curvature and
tangency and expansion joints in any adjacent concrete pavements and sidewalks.
Expansion joints shall be constructed vertical, plumb, and at right angles to the face
of the curb. They shall be 1/2 inch in width and formed with premolded bituminous
joint filler cut to conform to the curb cross-section.
F.
Construction Joints: Vertical construction joints shall be located approximately every
fifteen feet equally spaced between expansion joints. The length of the curb
segments may be varied slightly for closures, but in no case shall they be less than
eight feet. Construction joints shall be vertical, plumb and at right angles to the face
of the curb and shall be formed by approved method that will provide complete
separation of the curb segments during the placing of the concrete. If curb is formed
by slip form methods, the joints shall be sawed as soon as practicable after the
concrete has set to prevent ravelling during the sawing and before any shrinkage
cracking occurs in the concrete.
G.
Finishing: Forms shall be left in place for 24 hours or until the concrete has
sufficiently cured to permit removal without injury to the curb. Upon removal of the
forms, the exposed faces of the curb shall be immediately rubbed to a uniform
surface. Rubbing shall be performed by an experienced concrete finisher. No
plastering with cement mortar to fill defects will be allowed.
END OF SECTION 02525
SECTION 02570 - SEWERAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies requirements for the sewerage system.
B.
The work includes furnishing and installing all pipe, fittings manholes, structures and
appurtenances required for the proposed system to convey sewage.
RELATED SECTIONS
B.
Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.03
1.04
1.05
Section 02140 – Dewatering and Construction Surface Water
Section 02200 - Earthwork
Section 02400 - Storm Drainage System
Section 03301 - Cast-In Place Concrete
SUBMITTALS
A.
Materials list of materials proposed.
B.
Shop drawings for all material and structures prior to ordering materials.
INSPECTION
A.
The manufacturer/supplier is responsible for the provisions and all test requirements
specified in ASTM D3034 for SDR 40 gravity pipe and ASTM D2241 for PVC
pressure rated sewer pipe. In addition, all PVC pipe may be inspected at the plant
for compliance with these specifications by an independent testing laboratory
selected and paid by the Owner. The Contractor shall require the manufacturer's
cooperation in these inspections.
B.
Inspection of the pipe may also be made after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to
rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the specification
requirements, even though pipe samples may have been accepted as satisfactory at
the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall be marked for
identification and shall be removed from the site at once.
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A.
All materials shall be adequately protected from damage during transit. Pipes shall
not be dropped.
B.
All pipe and other appurtenances shall be inspected before placement in the work
and any found to be defective from any cause, including damage caused by
handling, and determined by the Engineer to be unrepairable, shall be replaced at
no cost to the Owner.
C.
Storage and handling of pipes, manholes and other sewer system appurtenances
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
2.02
2.03
The Drawings are diagrammatic only and are intended to indicate the extent, but not
all details, of the system which shall be constructed. All materials are not shown;
but the Contractor shall furnish and install all materials required for the complete
system. All products are to be installed, tested and operated with strict compliance
to City of Richmond Sanitary Sewer Design Guidelines and Standards Specifications
and Details.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC)
A.
Pipe and Fittings: Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings (4 inches to 15 inches) shall be
Type PSM polyvinyl chloride (PVC) SDR 40 with full diameter dimensions
conforming to the specifications for Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings, ASTM Designation D-3034.
B.
Joints: PVC pipe shall have an integral wall bell and spigot push-on joint with
elastomeric gaskets secured in place in the bell of the pipe. The bell shall consist of
an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric gasket, factory
assembled, securely locked in place to prevent displacement during assembly.
Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to ASTM D3212.
MANHOLES USE CITY OF RICHMOND MANHOLES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. AS A
MINUMIM, USE THE FOLLOWING IF DIFFERENT FROM THE CITY OF RICHMOND
REQUIREMENTS.
A.
B.
Precast Units:
1.
Structure: 4 foot minimum inside diameter precast units (4,000 psi minimum
compressive strength) with eccentric cone section tapering to 30-inch
diameter, or flat top, and one pour monolithic base section conforming to
ASTM C478. All units to be designed for HS-20 loading.
2.
Precast Unit Joint: Butyl rubber section joint conforming to ASTM C990.
Masonry Units:
1.
Brick shall conform to Sewer Brick (Made from Clay or Shale), ASTM
designation C32, Grade MS or Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from
Clay or Shale), ASTM C62, Grade SW. Brick for construction of inverts and
adjusting manholes to grade shall be Grade SM conforming to ASTM C32.
2.
Concrete block shall be solid block and conforming to the Specifications for
Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes,
ASTM designation C139.
3.
Mortar shall be in conformance with ASTM C270, Type M. The mortar shall
be composed of Portland cement hydrated lime, and sand, in the proportions
of 1 part cement to 1/4 part hydrated limit to 3-1/2 parts sand, by volume.
4.
Cement shall be Type I or II Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150,
Standard Specification for Portland Cement. Where masonry is exposed to
salt water, Type II shall be used.
5.
Hydrated lime shall be Type S conforming to ASTM D207.
6.
Sand for masonry mortar shall conform to the gradation requirements of
ASTM C144.
C.
Manhole Frame and Cover: Use City of Richmond Standard with watertight gaskets
D.
Pipe Connections: Flexible sleeve or rubber gaskets shall be Lock Joint, Kor-nSeal, A-Lok or approved equivalent.
E.
Bitumastic Coating: The entire exterior surface of all manholes shall be coated with
two coats of an approved bitumastic material to produce a dry film thickness of 0.07
inches (7 mils) per coat.
F.
Steps: Steel reinforced copolymer polypropylene steps conforming to ASTM C478.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
The type of materials to be used in bedding and backfilling and the method of placement shall
conform to the requirements of Section 02200, Earthwork, and the details shown on the
Drawings.
3.02
PIPE INSTALLATION
A.
All sewer pipe shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades shown in the Drawings
and in conformance with pipe manufacturer's recommended procedures.
B.
Notch under pipe bells and joints, where applicable, to provide for uniform bearing
under entire length of pipe.
C.
Laying Pipe: Each length of pipe shall be laid with firm, full and even bearing
throughout its entire length, in a prepared trench. Pipe shall be laid with bells
upgrade unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Every length of pipe shall be inspected and cleaned of all dirt and debris before
being laid. The interior of the pipe and the jointing seal shall be free from sand, dirt
and trash. Extreme care shall be taken to keep the bells of the pipe free from dirt
and rocks so that joints may be properly lubricated and assembled. No pipe shall be
trimmed or chipped to fit.
No length of pipe shall be laid until the proceeding lengths of pipe have been
thoroughly embedded in place, to prevent movement or disturbance of the pipe
alignment.
All piping shall be laid in the dry with the spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow.
Installation shall proceed from the downstream to upstream in all cases.
D.
Pipe Extension: Where an existing pipe is to be extended, the same type of pipe
shall be used, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
E.
Full Lengths of Pipe: Only full lengths of pipe shall be used in the installation except
that partial lengths of pipe may be used at the entrance to structures, and to
accommodate the required locations of service connection fittings.
F.
Pipe Entrances to Structures: All pipe entering structures shall be cut flush with the
inside face of the structure, and the cut ends of the pipe surface within the structure
shall be properly rounded and finished so that there will be no protrusion, ragged
edges or imperfections that will impede or affect the hydraulic characteristics of the
sewage flow. The method of cutting and finishing shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
G.
Protection During Construction: The Contractor shall protect the installation at all
times during construction, and movement of construction equipment, vehicles and
loads over and adjacent to any pipe shall be performed at the Contractor's risk.
At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, all open ends of pipes shall be
closed by approved temporary water-tight plugs. If water is in the trench when work
is resumed, the plug shall not be removed until the trench has been dewatered and
all danger of water entering the pipe eliminated.
H.
Water Pipe - Sewer Pipe Separation: When a sewer pipe crosses a water pipe, the
following procedures shall be utilized. The Contractor shall comply with these
following procedures:
1.
Relation to Water Mains
a.
Horizontal Separation: Whenever possible sewers shall be laid at a
minimum at least 10 feet, horizontally, from any existing or proposed
water main. Should local conditions prevent a lateral separation of 10
feet, a sewer may be laid closer than 10 feet to a water main if:
(1) It is laid in a separate trench, or if
(2) It is laid in the same trench with the water mains located at one side
on a bench of undistributed earth, and if
(3) In either case the elevation of the top (crown) of the sewer is at least
18 inches below the bottom (invert) of the water main.
b.
Vertical Separation: Whenever sewers must cross under water mains,
the sewer shall be laid at such an elevation that the top of the sewer is at
least 18 inches below the bottom of the water main. When the elevation
of the sewer cannot be varied to meet the above requirements, the water
main shall be relocated to provided this separation or reconstructed with
mechanical-joint pipe for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the sewer.
One full length of water main should be centered over the sewer so that
both joints will be as far from the sewer as possible.
When it is impossible to obtain horizontal and/or vertical separation as
stipulated above, both the water main and sewer shall be constructed of
mechanical-joint cement lined ductile iron pipe or other equivalent based on
watertightness and structural soundness. Both pipes shall be pressure tested
by an approved method to assure watertightness or both pipes shall be
encased in concrete.
3.03
3.04
PIPE JOINTS
A.
All joints shall be made water-tight.
B.
Pipe shall be jointed in strict accordance with the Pipe manufacturer's instruction.
Jointing of all pipe shall be done entirely in the trench.
C.
1.
Lubricant for jointing of PVC pipe shall be applied as specified by the pipe
manufacturer. Use only lubricant supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
2.
PVC Pipe shall be pushed home by hand or with the use of bar and block.
The use of power equipment, such as a backhoe bucket, shall only be used at
the direction of the manufacturer.
3.
Field-cut pipe ends shall be cut square and the pipe surface beveled to the
size and shape of a factory-finished beveled end. All sharp edges shall be
rounded off.
D.
Jointing of Ductile Iron and Cast Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with
Section 02610, Water Supply System.
E.
Jointing of Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Pipe shall be in accordance with
Section 02400, Storm Drainage System.
MANHOLES
A.
General Requirements: All manholes shall be built in accordance with the Details
and in the locations shown on the Drawings.
Structures shall be constructed of brick masonry, precast solid concrete block, castin-place concrete or precast concrete.
All masonry shall be installed by personnel experienced and skilled in this work, and
any person not deemed to be such by the Engineer shall be removed and replaced
by a person so qualified.
Manholes shall be constructed as soon as the pipe laying reaches the location of the
manhole. Should the Contractor continue pipe laying without making provision for
completion of the manhole, the Engineer shall have the authority to stop the pipe
laying operations until the manhole is completed.
The Contractor shall accurately locate each manhole and set accurate templates to
conform to the required line and grade. Any manhole which is mislocated or
oriented improperly shall be removed and rebuilt in its proper location, alignment
and orientation at additional cost to the Owner.
B.
Foundations: All manholes shall be constructed on a 12-inch layer of compacted
bedding material. The excavation shall be dewatered to provide a dry condition
while placing bedding material and setting the base.
C.
Masonry: All brick or concrete block shall be thoroughly wetted before laying.
The first course of masonry shall be embedded in the concrete foundation
immediately after the foundation has been poured.
All masonry shall be laid in full bed of mortar, and all vertical and horizontal joints
shall be filled solid with mortar. Vertical joints on each succeeding course shall be
staggered. Joints shall be not less than 3/8 inch or more than 1/2-inch wide. Joints
on the inside of the structure shall be neatly struck and pointed.
The exterior and interior surface of the walls shall be plastered with a one-half (1/2)
inch coat of 1:2 cement mortar.
D.
Inverts: Brick invert channels shall be constructed in all manholes to provide a
smooth channel for sewage flow through the structure, and shall correspond in
shape to the lower half of the pipe. At changes in directions, the inverts shall be laid
out in curves of the longest possible radii tangent to the centerline of the sewer
pipes at the manhole side. Shelves shall be constructed to the elevation of the
highest pipe crown and sloped to drain toward the flow channel.
Special care shall be taken in laying brick inverts. Joints shall not exceed threesixteenth inch in thickness and each brick shall be carefully laid in full cement mortar
joints on bottom, side and end in one operation. No grouting or working in of mortar
after laying of the brick will be permitted. Bricks forming the shaped inverts in
manholes shall be laid on edge.
Invert channels shall be built for future extensions where shown on the Drawings
and where directed by the Engineer.
E.
Steps: Steps shall be installed in all manholes, spaced twelve inches on center
vertically and set securely in place during the construction of the masonry wall.
F.
Precast Manholes: Precast manholes shall be installed only after Shop Drawings
have been approved.
The top grade of the precast concrete cone section shall be set sufficiently below
finished grade to permit a maximum of five and a minimum of two courses of eight
inch brick to be used as risers to adjust the grade of the manhole frame. Manhole
frames shall be set on a grout pad to make a water-tight fit.
Grout fill lifting holes on all manhole sections.
3.05
3.06
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES
A.
General Requirements: The Contractor shall make all required connections of the
proposed sewer into existing sewer system, where and as shown on the Drawings
and as required by the Engineer.
B.
Contractor to verify the location, size, invert and type of existing pipes at all points of
connection price to ordering new utility materials.
C.
Compliance with Requirements of Owner of Facility: Connections into existing
sewer facilities shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Owner
of the facility. The Contractor shall comply with all such requirements, including
securing of all required permits, and paying the costs thereof. The costs of making
the connections in accordance with the requirements of the owner of the existing
facility shall be included in the Contract Sum.
MANHOLE CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
3.07
Manhole pipe connections for precast manhole bases may be accomplished by any
method described below. The Contractor shall make sure that the outside diameter
of the pipe is compatible with the particular pipe connection used.
1.
A tapered hole filled with non-shrink waterproof grout after the pipe is
inserted. This connection method will not be allowed when connecting PVC
pipe to manholes.
2.
The LOCK JOINT Flexible Manhole Sleeve cast in the wall of the manhole
base. The stainless steel strap and exposed sleeve shall be protected from
corrosion with a bitumastic coating.
3.
PRESS WEDGE II gasket cast into the wall on the manhole base. The rubber
wedge shall only be driven into the V slot from the outside of the manhole.
4.
The RES-SEAL, a cast iron compression ring which compresses a rubber "O"
ring gasket into a tapered hole in the wall of the manhole base. Exposed
metal shall be protected from corrosion with a bitumastic coating.
5.
KOR-N-SEAL neoprene boot cast into the manhole wall. The stainless steel
clamp shall be protected from corrosion with a bitumastic coating.
Sewer manholes shall be constructed with drop connections when the proposed
invert of the connection is at least 2 feet above the manhole invert. Drop
connections for differences of less than 2 feet shall also be provided if required by
the governing authority.
SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
General Requirements: The Contractor shall make all required connections of the
building sewer service pipes into the sewer system. Work shall include making the
service pipe connections into the sewer system pipes or into the manholes located
ten (10) feet outside of the proposed building lines. If stubs are constructed for later
connection to the building pipes, the ends shall be sealed with watertight plugs.
B.
Coordination with Building Contractor: The Contractor shall coordinate the work with
the work of the Building Contractor to determine the exact location and elevation of
the point of entry into the building.
C.
Connection into Sewer System: Sewer service pipe connections to the pipe of the
sewer system shall be made with fittings supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
The Contractor shall install 45 degree wye branch or 90 degree tee fittings in the
sewer pipes at all locations where building sewer service pipe connections are
shown on the Drawings. Connections of the sewer service pipes shall be made into
the wye branches or tees by means of 45 degree bends. The connections shall be
made thoroughly watertight and concrete shall be placed under each connection to
bear on undisturbed earth and firmly support the connection. Sewer chimneys shall
be encased in concrete unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
3.09
LEAKAGE TESTS
A.
A. General Requirements: The Contractor shall test the completed sewer system,
including manholes and service connections, for leakage by infiltration, exfiltration or
low-pressure air exfiltration tests. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary
equipment, materials and labor for performing the tests.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 48 hours prior to the start of testing.
Sections of pipe tested for infiltration and exfiltration prior to completion of the
Contract shall be subject to additional leakage tests, if warranted, in the opinion of
the Engineer, prior to acceptance of the Work.
B.
Infiltration and Exfiltration Testing: Depending on field conditions, the following tests
for leakage shall be employed:
1.
Infiltration Test: The test may be used only when ground water levels are at
least five feet above the top of the pipe for the entire length of the section to
be tested during the entire period of the test. Ground water levels may be
measured in an open trench or in standpipes previously placed in backfilled
trenches during the backfilling operations. When standpipes are installed in
the backfill for ground water measurement, the lower ends shall be
satisfactorily embedded in a mass of crushed stone or gravel to maintain free
percolation and drainage. Infiltration through joints shall be measured by
using a watertight weir or any other approved device for volumetric
measurement installed at the lower end of the section under test.
2.
Exfiltration Test: This test consists of filling the pipe with water to provide a
head of at least five feet above the top of the pipe or five feet above ground
water, whichever is higher, at the highest point of the pipe section under test,
and then measuring the loss of water from the line by the amount which must
be added to maintain the original level. In this test, the pipe must remain filled
with water for at least twenty-four hours prior to the taking of measurements.
Exfiltration shall be measured by the drop of water level in a closed-end
standpipe or in one of the sewer manholes available for convenient
measuring.
When a standpipe and plug arrangement is used in the upper manhole of a
section under test, a positive method of releasing entrapped air in the sewer
shall be installed prior to taking measurements.
3.
C.
Leakage Requirements: The total leakage of any section tested shall not
exceed the rate of 50 gallons per day per mile per inch of nominal pipe
diameter. For purposes of determining the maximum allowable leakage,
manholes shall be considered as sections of 48-inch diameter pipe, five feet
long, and the equivalent leakage allowance shall be 2.25 gallons per manhole
per 24 hours.
Low-Pressure Air Exfiltration Testing
1.
The sewer pipes and service pipes shall be tested for leakage by the use of
low-pressure air as approved by the Engineer. The test length shall not
exceed one length of pipe between two manholes. Air test procedures may
be dangerous and the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to
prevent blowouts.
2.
a.
Pneumatic plugs shall have a sealing length equal to or greater than the
diameter of the pipe to be tested.
b.
Pneumatic plugs shall resist internal test pressures without requiring
external bracing or blocking.
c.
All air used shall pass through a single control panel.
d.
Three individual hoses shall be used for the following connections:
3.
From control panel to pneumatic plugs for inflation;

From control panel to sealed line for introducing the low pressure
air;

From sealed line to control panel for continually monitoring the air
pressure rise in the sealed line.
The following testing procedures shall be explicitly followed:
a.
4.

All pneumatic plugs shall be seal tested before being used in the actual
test installation. One length of pipe shall be laid on the ground and
sealed at both ends with the pneumatic plugs to be checked. Air shall be
introduced into the plugs to 25 psig. The sealed pipe shall be
pressurized to 5 psig. The plugs shall hold against this pressure without
bracing and without movement of the plugs out of the pipe.
After the pipe has been backfilled and cleaned, pneumatic plugs shall be
placed in the line at each manhole and inflated to 25 psi. Low-pressure air
shall be introduced into this sealed line until the internal air pressure reaches
4 psi greater than the average back pressure of any ground water that may be
over the pipe. At least two minutes shall be allowed for the air pressure to
stabilize.
After the stabilization period (3.5 psi minimum pressure in the pipe), the
portion of pipe tested shall be acceptable if the time required in minutes for
the pressure to decrease from 3.5 to 3.0 psi (greater than the average back
pressure of any ground water that may be over the pipe) is not less than the
time indicated in the following table:
Pipe Size (in.)
Time (sec.)
4
6
8
10
12
15
0.190L
0.427L
0.760L
1.187L
1.709L
2.671L
Where L = length of pipe being tested
3.11
D.
Correction of Defective Work: If leakage exceeds the specified amount, the
Contractor shall make the necessary repairs or replacements required to
permanently reduce the leakage to within the specified limit, and the tests shall be
repeated until the leakage requirement is met.
E.
Compliance with Agency Requirements: In the event of conflict between the
leakage test requirements specified herein with the leakage test requirements of
agencies having jurisdiction over all or any portion of the sewer system installed
under this Contract, the more restrictive requirements shall govern.
CLEANING AND REPAIR
A.
The Contractor shall clean the entire sewer system of all debris and obstructions.
This shall include, removal of all formwork from structures, concrete and mortar
droppings, construction debris and dirt. The system shall be thoroughly flushed
clean and the Contractor shall furnish all necessary hose, pumps, pipe and other
equipment that may be required for this purpose. No debris shall be flushed into
existing sewers, storm drains and or streams.
All work of cleaning and repair shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 02570
SECTION 02610 - WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies requirements for the proposed water system pipe, fittings
appurtenances and services.
B.
The work includes:
1.
Furnishing and installation of water distribution pipe, valves and valve boxes,
hydrants, pipe fittings, anchors, thrust restraints, required accessories and
connections to existing water systems.
2.
Resetting existing hydrants and valve boxes to grade.
3.
Relocation of existing hydrants, valves and other appurtenances as required.
4.
Furnishing and installing meter pit, backflow prevention assembly, pressurereducing valves and other related appurtenances.
5.
Disinfecting and testing of the system.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
1.03
Section 02200 - Earthwork
Section 03301 - Site Cast-in-Place Concrete
COORDINATION WITH CITY OF RICHMOND DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
A.
The City of Richmond Department of Public Works shall be notified prior to starting
construction of any portion of the municipal water system.
B.
The closing of valves necessary for making connections with existing municipal
system will be done by the City of Richmond Department of Public Works
employees, assisted by the Contractor. Sufficient notice shall be given the City of
Richmond Department of Public Works of planned connection. No allowance will be
made for any delay in closing of valves. A 48-hour notice shall be given to residents
or businesses affected by the shut-down, and shall be done by the Contractor under
the direction of the Engineer. The City of Richmond Department of Public Works
may require the work to be done at night during the low use time period.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings
1.
1.05
1.06
Submit Shop Drawings or descriptive literature, or both, showing dimensions,
joints and other details of all materials to be furnished. Shop Drawings shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering materials.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Storage of pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and other water line appurtenances on the
site shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
B.
Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the
pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other water line appurtenances. Pipe or fittings
shall not be dropped. All pipe or fittings shall be examined before laying and no
piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to pipe and
fitting coatings shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer.
C.
Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and other water system appurtenances which are
defective from any cause, including damage caused by handling, and determined by
the Engineer as unrepairable, shall be unacceptable for installation and shall be
replaced at no cost to the Owner.
D.
Pipe, and all water system appurtenances that are damaged or disturbed through
any cause prior to acceptance of the work shall be repaired, realigned or replaced
as required by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
LICENSED FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM CONTRACTORS
A.
Fire protection and fire control systems, including both overhead and underground
water mains, fire hydrants and hydrant mains, standpipes and hose connections to
sprinkler systems, sprinkler tank heaters, back flow preventers, air lines and thermal
systems, hot water fire protection systems and standpipes connected to sprinkler
systems, shall be installed by contractors and personnel appropriately licensed In
the State of Virginia.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
The Drawings are diagrammatic only and are intended to indicate the extent, but not
all details, of the system which shall be constructed. All materials are not shown;
but the Contractor shall furnish and install all materials required for the complete
system. All products including pipe, fittings, valves, couplings, joints, encasements,
valve boxes, hydrants, meters and meter boxes are to be installed, tested and
operated with strict compliance to City of Richmond Water Distribution System
Design Guidelines and Standards Specifications and Details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED IN THE CITY OF RICHMOND STANDARDS
AND SPECIFICATIONS, THE FOLLOWING IS REQUIRED:
A.
All water pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants and other appurtenances shall be installed
at the locations as shown on the Drawings.
The proposed location and vertical alignment may be altered to avoid conflicts with existing
and proposed utilities, as approved by the Engineer.
B.
3.02
Contractor to verify the location, size, invert and type of existing pipes at all points of
connection prior to ordering new utility materials.
LAYING DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C600.
B.
Each length of pipe shall be laid with firm, full and even bearing throughout its entire
length, in a trench prepared and maintained in accordance with Section 02200,
Earthwork. The type of materials to be used in bedding and backfilling and method
of placement shall conform to the requirements of Section 02200.
C.
All pipe shall be clean before laying. When laying is stopped for any reason, the
open ends of the pipe shall be closed by watertight plugs or other approved means.
If water is in the trench when work is resumed, the plug shall not be removed until
the trench has been dewatered and all danger of water entering the pipe has been
eliminated.
Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be provided if required to
avoid utility conflicts.
3.03
D.
When cutting of pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a
smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends of pipe to be used with a
push-on bell shall be beveled to conform to the manufactured spigot end. Cement
lining shall be undamaged.
E.
Maximum allowable deflection for pipe laid without fittings shall not exceed the
allowable amount established by the City of Richmond, or if not required by the City,
deflection shall not exceed pipe manufacturer and shall not exceed those shown in
AWWA C600.
F.
The pipe shall be laid with a minimum cover of 3.5 feet below finished grade.
G.
All piping shall be laid in the dry with the spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow.
Installation shall proceed from the downstream to upstream in all cases.
JOINTING DUCTILE IRON PIPE [PUSH-ON TYPE]
A.
Push-on joints shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. A rubber gasket shall be inserted in the groove of the bell end of the
pipe and the joint surface cleaned and lubricated using the pipe manufacturer's
suggested methods and materials. The plain end of the pipe to be laid shall be
inserted in alignment with the bell of the pipe to which it is to be jointed and pushed
home with a jack or by other means. After joining the pipe, a metal feeler gauge
shall be used to make certain that the rubber gasket is correctly located and has not
been twisted or otherwise displaced.
3.04
JOINTING MECHANICAL JOINT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Mechanical joints shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Mechanical joints shall be made by first cleaning the surfaces against
which the gaskets will come in contact with a wire brush. The gasket, bell, and
spigot shall be lubricated by washing with soapy water just prior to assembling the
joint. After the nuts have been made up finger tight, the bottom nut, then top and
then diametrically opposite nuts shall be progressively tightened. Bolts shall be
tightened to the torques listed:
Bolt Size
[Inches]
Range of Torque
[Feet-Pounds]
5/8
3/4
1 inch
45 - 60
75 - 90
85 - 100
Under no conditions shall extension wrenches or a pipe over the handle of an
ordinary ratchet wrench be used to secure greater leverage. After installation, a
heavy bitumastic coating shall be applied to all bolts and nuts.
Restraining device shall be ductile iron and shall have dimensions such that it can
be used with the standardized mechanical joint bell and tee-head bolts conforming
to ANSI/AWWA Z21.11 and ANSI/AWWA C153 latest revision.
3.05
LAYING OF PVC WATER PIPE
A.
Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe and Associated Fittings: Unless
otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 3.01 entitled
"General"; and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance
installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation".
3.06
3.07
B.
Jointing: Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type
joint, using either elastomeric-gasket bell-end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings.
For pipe-to pipe push-on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends
having factory-made bevel; for push-on joint connections to metal fittings, valves,
and other accessories, cut spigot end of pipe off square and re-bevel pipe end to a
bevel approximately the same as that on ductile-iron pipe used for the same type of
joint. Use an approved lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on
joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections in accordance with
the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation," for pipe joint
assembly. Assemble push-on joints for connection to fittings, valves, and other
accessories in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint
assembly. Make compression-type joints/mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands,
bolts, nuts, and internal stiffeners previously specified for this type joint; assemble in
accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly, and
with the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Cut off spigot end
of pipe for compression-type joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re-bevel.
Assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings in accordance with the
recommendations of the coupling manufacturer using internal stiffeners as
previously specified for compression-type joints.
C.
Pipe Anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks for pipe anchorage, except where
metal harness in indicated. Use concrete, ASTM C94, having a minimum
compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.
CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS
A.
Where pipes change horizontal and vertical direction, at hydrants, tees and other
fittings, and wherever abnormal thrust forces may be developed, the Contractor shall
construct thrust and anchor blocks as detailed on the Drawings. They shall be
concrete, of minimum dimensions as detailed on the Drawings or of adequate
additional size to suit actual conditions to withstand pressures anticipated, and shall
be founded in undisturbed soil.
B.
Concrete for thrust blocks shall have a minimum 28 day's compressive strength of
3,000 psi.
C.
Fittings which do not use thrust blocks resting against natural occurring material with
passive resistance pressure of 1,500 psf shall be installed with a restrained joint
system as specified in Article 3.06.
RESTRAINED JOINTS
A.
Pipe with restrained joints shall be installed at locations shown on the Drawings.
Restrained joints shall be installed at bends, reducers, tees, valves, dead ends, and
hydrants. The minimum length of pipe to be restrained on either side of the joint
shall be as shown on the table below. The fittings of the new piping shall be for
restrained joints, as marked on the Drawings.
Number of Joints to Restraint
on Either Side of Fitting
Fitting
90 degree bend
45 degree bend
22-1/2 degree bend
Tee:
Branch
Run
3.08
Number of Joints to Restraint
on Either Side of Fitting
[Based on 18-Foot Pipe Length]
3
2
2
3
2
B.
No restraining is required in the direction of the existing pipe if only a short length of
it is exposed in the trench for making a connection.
C.
Restrained joint assemblies for push-on pipe and fittings shall be made in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
D.
Restrained joint assemblies for mechanical joint pipe shall be EBAA Iron Sales
MEGALUG or approved equivalent.
WATER/SEWER SEPARATION
When a sewer pipe a water pipe, the following procedures shall be utilized. The Contractor
shall comply with these following procedures:
A.
Relation to Water Mains
1.
Horizontal Separation: Whenever possible sewers shall be laid at a minimum
at least 10 feet, horizontally, from any existing or proposed water main.
Should local conditions prevent a lateral separation of 10 feet, a sewer may
be laid closer than 10 feet to a water main if:
a.
b.
c.
2.
It is laid in a separate trench, or if
It is laid in the same trench with the water mains located at one side on a
bench of undistributed earth, and if
If either case the elevations of the top (crown) of the sewer is at least
18 inches below the bottom (invert) of the water main.
Vertical Separation: Whenever sewers must cross under water mains, the
sewer shall be laid at such an elevation that the top of the sewer is at least 18
inches below the bottom of the water main. When the elevation of the sewer
cannot be varied to meet the above requirements, the water main shall be
relocated to provide this separation or reconstructed with mechanical-joint
pipe for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the sewer. On full length of
water main should be centered over the sewer so that both joints will be as far
from the sewer as possible.
When it is impossible to obtain horizontal and/or vertical separation as stipulated above, both
the water main and sewer shall be constructed of mechanical-joint cement lined
ductile iron pipe or other equivalent based on watertightness and structural
soundness. Both pipes shall be pressure tested by an approved method to assure
watertightness or both pipes shall be encased in concrete.
3.09
3.10
GATE VALVES AND BOXES
A.
Valves shall be set in firmly compacted and shaped soil. Where the soil in the trench
subgrade is found to be soft, loose, freshly filled earth, unstable or unsuitable as a
base, the unsuitable material shall be excavated to such additional depth and width
as required. The excavated area shall be backfilled with gravel or crushed stone,
compacted and shaped.
B.
Valve boxes shall be set centered and plumb over the operating nuts of all valves.
The top of each valve box shall be set to finished grade with at least 10 inches of
overlap remaining between the upper sections for vertical adjustment. Minimum
overlap for lower, extension pieces shall be 4 inches.
C.
Boxes shall be adequately supported during backfilling to maintain vertical
alignment.
TAPPING SLEEVES AND GATE VALVES
A.
Installation shall be made under pressure and the flow of water through the existing
pipe shall be maintained at all times. The diameter of the tap shall be a minimum of
1/4 inch less than the inside diameter of the branch line.
B.
The entire operation shall be conducted by workmen thoroughly experienced in the
installation of tapping sleeves and valves, and under supervision of qualified
personnel furnished by the manufacturer. The tapping machine shall be furnished
by the Contractor.
C.
The Contractor shall determine the location of the existing pipe to be tapped to
confirm that interference will not be encountered from existing utilities or a joint or a
fitting. No tap shall be made closer than 3 feet from a pipe joint.
D.
Pipe upon which tapping sleeve is to be installed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
foreign matter with scraping tools and wire brushes to a minimum of six inches
beyond each side of the sleeve. The cleaned area shall be washed with a
hypochlorite solution. The interior of tapping valve shall also be washed with
hypochlorite solution.
E.
Tapping sleeves and valves with boxes shall be set vertically and squarely centered
on the pipe to be tapped. Adequate support shall be provided under the sleeve and
valve during the tapping operation. Thrust blocks shall be provided behind all
tapping sleeves. The supporting earth around and under the valve and sleeve shall
be compacted. After completing the tap, the valve shall be flushed to ensure that
the valve set is clean.
F.
Before backfilling, all exposed portions of any bolts used to hold the two halves of
the sleeve together shall be heavily coated with two coats of bituminous paint
equivalent to Bitumastic No. 50, by Kopper Company, Inc.
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
HYDRANTS
A.
Hydrants shall be installed at the locations and in conformance with the details
shown on the drawings.
B.
Each hydrant shall be set vertically and be properly braced. Hydrants shall be
installed with thrust blocks or restrained joints as specified in Articles 3.05 and 3.06.
Care shall be taken to ensure that thrust block concrete does not plug the drain
ports.
WATER SERVICES
A.
Service Pipe: Care shall be exercised in placing and laying of services to prevent
kinks or sharp bends and contact with sharp stones or ledge which would damage to
the pipe. At least 6 inches of sand shall be placed adjacent to, under, and above the
pipe, and no stone larger than 2 inches shall be placed over the pipe until the depth
of backfill above the pipe is in excess of 1 foot.
B.
Corporation Stop: Taps to the pipe shall be threaded and shall be made at the
horizontal diameter of the main. The tap shall be made by means of a tapping
machine manufactured for this purpose and supplied by the Contractor. The tap and
drill shall be kept sharp and shall have threads matching those of the stop.
Corporation stop threads shall be coated with sealing compound and the stop
screwed firmly into the water with the key upward and the inlet end projecting at
least 1/8-inch beyond the inside face of the pipe. Corporation stop shall be left in
the on open position after installation of the service pipe.
C.
Curb Stop and Curb Boxes shall be of a size equal to the size of the service pipe
and shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the
Engineer. The boxes shall be set in a vertical position and flush with the proposed
finish grade.
D.
Ductile Iron Service Pipe: Ductile iron service pipe connections to the water pipe
shall be made with tee fittings or tapping sleeves. [Engineer Note: Review
availability of tees, reducers, etc. in order to ensure feasibility of connection for lower
size ductile iron services.]
SEPARATION FROM STRUCTURES
A.
Whenever possible, water pipes shall maintain a minimum distance of three (3) feet
from underground adjacent unheated structures, such as manholes, catch basins,
retaining walls, bridge abutments, parking garages, etc.
B.
When spacing under A. above is not possible, Contractor shall provide insulated
water pipe for a minimum of three (3) feet beyond the limits of the adjacent structure.
POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A.
Installation of polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with the
recommended procedures contained in ANSI/AWWA C105.
B.
Care shall be taken during backfilling to prevent damage to polyethylene wrap.
Backfilling shall be in accordance with AWWA C600.
3.15
PRESSURE TESTING
A.
Hydrostatic and leakage test shall be conducted in accordance with AWWA
Standard C600, and as directed by the Engineer. Testing shall be conducted by a
certified independent water testing company.
B.
Conduct pipe tests after concrete thrust blocks have cured to the required 3000 psi
strength. Fill pipe 24 hours prior to testing, and apply test pressure to stabilize
system. Use only potable water.
C.
Prior to pressure testing, the entire pipe section shall be flushed to remove any
rocks or debris which may have inadvertently entered the pipe during construction.
D.
Once the pipe section has been filled at normal pressure and all entrapped air
removed, the Contractor shall raise the pressure to 150 psi or two times the
operating pressure (whichever is greater) by a special pressure pump, taking water
from a small tank of proper dimensions for satisfactorily measuring the rate of water
pumped into the pipe. This pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of 2 hours,
during which time the line shall be checked for leaks. Measured rate of water
leakage shall not exceed the allowable leakage listed below.
Allowable leakage in gallons per hour, per 1,000 feet of exterior pipeline:
Test
Pressure
150 psi
Nominal Pipe Diameter [inches]
4
0.36
6
0.55
8
0.74
10
0.92
12
1.10
16
1.47
Interior piping in vaults, buildings, etc. shall have zero leakage.
Should leakage exceed this rate, the Contractor shall immediately locate the leak or
leaks and repair them. Pipe will be accepted only when leakage is zero, or less than
the allowable amount. Approval does not absolve the Contractor from responsibility
if leaks develop later within the period of warranty.
3.16
DISINFECTION
A.
Before being placed in service, all new water pipe shall be chlorinated in accordance
with ANSI/AWWA C651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
B.
The location of the chlorination and sampling points will be determined by the
Engineer in the field. Taps for chlorination and sampling shall be installed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall uncover and backfill the taps as required.
C.
The pipe section being disinfected shall be flushed to remove discolored water and
sediment from the pipe. A 25 mg/l chlorine solution in approved dosages shall be
inserted through a tap at one end while water is being withdrawn at the other end of
the pipe section. The chlorine concentration in the water in the pipe shall be
maintained at a minimum 25 mg/l available chlorine during filling. To assure that this
concentration is maintained, the chlorine residual shall be measured at regular
intervals in accordance with procedures described in Standard Methods and AWWA
M12, Simplified Procedure for Water Examination, Section K.
D.
During the application of the chlorine, valves shall be manipulated to prevent the
treatment dosage from flowing back into the pipe supplying the water. Chlorine
application shall not cease until the entire pipe section is filled with chlorine solution.
The chlorinated water shall be retained in the pipe for at least a twenty-four hour
period. The treated water shall contain a chlorine residual throughout the length of
the pipe section as indicated in AWWA C651.
E.
Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be flushed from the pipe
section and replaced with water from the distribution system. Prior to disposal of
treated water the Contractor shall check with local authorities to determine if the
discharge will cause damage to the receiving body or sewer and, if required, the
Contractor shall neutralize the chlorinated water in accordance with Appendix B,
AWWA C650. Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the replacement water may
then be made by the Contractor in full accordance with AWWA Specification C651.
A minimum of three samples shall be taken by the Contractor at locations directed
by the Engineer along the length of water pipe being chlorinated and sent to a State
approved private laboratory for analyses. The Contractor shall rechlorine if the
samples show presence of coliform, and the pipe section shall not be placed in
service until all of the repeat samples show no presence of coliform.
F.
Furnish two copies of a Certificate of Disinfection Report to the Engineer.
G.
The Contractor shall pay all costs for all testing, flushing, chlorinating; laboratory
analyses, sampling, water supply and municipal charges.
END OF SECTION 02610
SECTION 02620 - SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Work:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Foundations.
Underslab areas.
Section 02300 - Earthwork for excavating and backfilling.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete for forms and concrete placement.
Section 07140 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing for wall waterproofing, waterstops and
prefabricated drainage panels.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
PE: Polyethylene.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For drainage conduit, drainage panels, and geotextile fabrics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perforated pipe.
Solid pipe.
Geotextile fabrics.
Molded Sheet Drainage Panels.
a.
Submit information required to verify compatibility of molded sheet drainage panels
with types of waterproofing selected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Refer to various application articles in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
DRAINAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS
A.
Perforated, PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405, corrugated, for coupled joints.
1.
B.
Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.
Provide foundation drains with connectors and outlets and other accessories as required.
2.3
SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS
A.
2.4
Description: ASTM C 1173. Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to
match outside diameters of pipes to be joined.
CLEANOUTS
A.
2.5
Cast-Iron Pipe: ASME A112.36.2M; with round-flanged, cast-iron housing; and secured,
scoriated, Medium-Duty Loading class, cast-iron cover.
Include cast-iron ferrule and
countersunk, brass cleanout plug.
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Impervious Fill: Clay, gravel, and sand mixture.
B.
Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate, Size No. 57, with 100 percent passing 1-1/2-inch (37.5mm) sieve and not more than 5 percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
2.6
GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
A.
Woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric of PP or polyester fibers, or combination of both.
Flow rates range from 110 to 330 gpm per sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m) when tested
according to ASTM D 4491. Available styles are flat and sock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be
installed.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
EARTHWORK
A.
3.3
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 02300 - Earthwork.
SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A.
NPS 4 (DN 100) Piping:
1.
3.4
Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A.
Bottom Impervious Fill: Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing
after concrete footings have been cured and forms removed. Place and compact impervious fill
to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm)
wide.
B.
Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted
depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to
width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests.
After satisfactory testing, cover piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from
footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in
layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed.
1.
C.
3.5
Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
sections with electrical tape.
Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over drainage panels. Place material in loose-depth
layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish
elevations and slope away from building.
UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A.
Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted, but
before drainage fill and waterproofing have been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least
6 inches (150 mm) between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench
excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.
B.
Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted
depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to
top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing, cover piping with drainage fill to elevation
of bottom of slab and compact drainage material.
1.
Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
sections with electrical tape.
3.6
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
installation of green warning tapes directly over piping.
1.
3.7
Arrange for
Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground
structures.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with
unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets,
seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other
requirements indicated.
B.
Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and
fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
3.8
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to AASHTO's
"Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties";
or according to ASTM D 2321.
B.
Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special
couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both
pipe materials and dimensions.
3.9
SUBDRAINAGE CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleanouts from subdrainage piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run
and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.
B.
In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for subdrainage
piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug. Set cleanout frames and covers in
a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) in depth. Set
top of cleanout plug flush with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in
nonvehicular-traffic areas.
C.
In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping
branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug. Set cleanout frames and covers in a castin-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top of
cleanout plug 1 inch (25 mm) above grade.
3.10
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid building or site storm drainage system.
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing: After installing drainage fill to top of pipe, test drain piping with water to ensure free
flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test
until results are satisfactory.
CLEANING
Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work
progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place
plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 02620
SECTION 02821 - CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
4.2
Chain-Link Fences: Industrial.
Gates – Interior Installation: Horizontal slide.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations, components, materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and
finishes of components. Include plans, gate elevations, sections, details of post anchorage,
attachment, bracing, and other required installation and operational clearances.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
5.1
CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A.
General: Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements indicated below:
1.
Steel Wire Fabric: Metallic-coated wire with a diameter of 0.148 inch (3.76 mm).
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
5.2
Mesh Size: 1-3/4 inch.
Aluminum Coating: ASTM A 491, Type I.
Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II.
Zn-5-Al-MM Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy Coating: ASTM F 1345, Type III.
Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
INDUSTRIAL FENCE FRAMING
A.
Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round
pipe, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Group: IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40.
Fence Height - Interior: 8 feet (2.44 m).
Strength Requirement: Heavy industrial according to ASTM F 1043.
Horizontal-Slide Gate Post: According to ASTM F 1184.
a.
5.
Openings up to 12 Feet (3.7 m): Steel post, 2.875-inch (73-mm) diameter, and
4.64-lb/ft. (6.91-kg/m) weight.
Coating for Steel Framing:
a.
5.3
Metallic coating.
INDUSTRIAL HORIZONTAL-SLIDE GATES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM F 1184 for single slide gate types.
1.
2.
B.
Classification: Type II Cantilever Slide, Class 1 with external roller assemblies.
Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1184 for materials and
protective coatings.
Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing with outside
dimension and weight according to ASTM F 1184 and the following:
1.
2.
3.
Gate Opening Height: To underside of precast concrete tees.
Gate Opening Width: 6 feet (1.83 m).
Frame Members:
a.
4.
Bracing Members:
a.
C.
Tubular Steel: 1.90 inches (48 mm) round.
Tubular Steel: 1.66 inches (42 mm) round.
Frame Corner Construction:
1.
2.
Welded frame and 5/16-inch- (7.9-mm-) diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet
(1.52 m) wide or wider.
Type I Overhead Slide Gates: Assembled with corner fittings including 5/16-inch- (7.9mm-) diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet (1.52 m) wide or wider.
D.
Roller Guards: As required per ASTM F 1184 for Type II, Class 1 gates.
E.
Hardware: Latches with integral eye opening for padlocking, roller assemblies and stops
fabricated from galvanized steel.
1.
Provide gates with heavy duty key-operated padlocks.
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements
specified.
B.
Post Setting: Set posts in cored concrete slabs, at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1.
C.
Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Protect adjacent concrete slabs from concrete splatter.
Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull
posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment.
D.
Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet (3 m) o.c.
E.
Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567. Install braces at end
and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts.
F.
Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567.
G.
Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts.
H.
Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch (25.4 mm)
between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Tie Wires: Attach wire per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals
and clothing.
6.2
GATE INSTALLATION
A.
Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full
opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamperresistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust
hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
END OF SECTION 02821
SECTION 02826 - ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Swing gates.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
C.
Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.
D.
Welding certificates.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.3
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying
with ASTM C 1107 and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.
SWING GATES
A.
Gate Configuration, Frame Height, Opening Width: To be determined on basis of final design.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from steel shapes as indicated and
hot-dip galvanize after fabrication.
C.
Frame Corner Construction: Welded.
D.
Additional Rails: Provide as required, complying with requirements for fence rails.
E.
Infill: Provide galvanized steel mesh and solid panel infills as required by design.
F.
Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each
gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of gates.
Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides
of gate.
1.
G.
Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.
1.
2.
H.
Provide center gate stop and padlocking latch hardware for double acting gate at access
gate into courtyard.
Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing.
Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron.
Exit Hardware: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, Type 1 (rim exit device), with push pad actuating bar,
suitable for exterior use.
1.
2.
Function: 01 - Exit only, no trim or blank escutcheon.
Mounting Channel: Bent-plate channel formed from 1/8-inch thick, steel plate. Channel
spans gate frame. Exit device is mounted on channel web, recessed between flanges,
with flanges extending 1/8 inch beyond push pad surface.
I.
Cane Bolts: Provide for inactive leaf of pairs of gates. Fabricated from 1/2-inch diameter, round
steel bars, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Finish to match gates. Provide galvanized-steel
pipe strikes to receive cane bolts in both open and closed positions.
J.
Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely sanded joint,
some undercutting and pinholes. Finish #4 - good-quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal
splatter.
K.
Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip
galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated. For hardware items,
hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
L.
Metallic-Coated Steel Finish: High-performance coating.
2.5
METALLIC-COATED STEEL FINISHES
A.
Galvanized Finish: Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and
other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a zinc-phosphate conversion coating suited to the
organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas
and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
C.
High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy primer, epoxy intermediate coat, and polyurethane
topcoat to prepared surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with
requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by
coating manufacturer.
1.
Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish, or
recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site
clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
GATE INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full
opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means.
Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and
lubricate where necessary.
ADJUSTING
A.
Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive
deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire
operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without
forcing or binding.
B.
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates.
END OF SECTION 02826
SECTION 02832 - SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes single- depth segmental retaining walls without soil reinforcement.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation for segmental retaining walls.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for segmental retaining wall footings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Basis of Design: Design of segmental retaining walls is based on products indicated. If
comparable products of other manufacturers are proposed, provide engineering design for
proposed products, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Delegated Design: Design segmental retaining walls, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C.
Structural Performance: Engineering design shall be based on the following loads and be
according to NCMA's "Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls."
1.
1.4
Gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades and sloped backfill indicated.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following
preconstruction testing:
1.
2.
1.5
Test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for pullout resistance according to
ASTM D 6706.
Test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for coefficient of friction according to
ASTM D 5321.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For concrete units.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
For segmental retaining walls indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
1.6
Compliance Review: Qualified professional engineer responsible for segmental retaining
wall design shall review and approve submittals and source and field quality-control
reports for compliance of materials and construction with design.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store and handle concrete units and accessories to prevent deterioration or damage due to
contaminants, breaking, chipping, or other causes.
B.
Store geosynthetics in manufacturer's original packaging with labels intact. Store and handle
geosynthetics to prevent deterioration or damage due to sunlight, chemicals, flames,
temperatures above 160 deg F (71 deg C) or below 32 deg F (0 deg C), and other conditions
that might damage them. Verify identification of geosynthetics before using and examine them
for defects as material is placed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS
A.
Concrete Units: ASTM C 1372, Normal Weight, except that units shall not differ in height more
than plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from specified dimension.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
licensees of one of the following:
2.
3.
Provide units that comply with requirements for freeze-thaw durability.
Provide units that interlock with courses above and below by means of integral lugs or
lips pins clips or hollow cores filled with drainage fill.
B.
Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations to approximate the color of the CSMU.
C.
Shape and Texture:
exposed faces.
D.
Batter: Provide units that offset from course below to provide at least 1:24 batter.
E.
Cap Units: Provide cap units of same shape as other units with smooth, as-cast top surfaces
without holes or lugs.
F.
Special Units: Provide corner units, end units, and other shapes as needed to produce
segmental retaining walls of dimensions and profiles indicated and to provide texture on
exposed surfaces matching face.
Provide units of basic shape and dimensions indicated with smooth
2.2
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Pins: Product supplied by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for use with units
provided, made from nondegrading polymer reinforced with glass fibers.
B.
Clips: Product supplied by segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer for use with units
provided, made from nondegrading polymer reinforced with glass fibers.
C.
Cap Adhesive:
Product supplied or recommended by segmental retaining wall unit
manufacturer for adhering cap units to units below.
D.
Leveling Base: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for base material.
E.
Drainage Fill: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Subdrainage."
F.
Nonreinforced-Soil Fill:
satisfactory soils.
G.
Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface
drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50
percent.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for
Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 to 100 (0.212- to 0.150-mm) sieve, maximum;
ASTM D 4751.
Minimum Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lb (49.9 kg); ASTM D 4632.
Minimum Weight: 4 oz./sq. yd. (132 g/sq. m).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
excavation tolerances, condition of subgrades, and other conditions affecting performance of
segmental retaining walls.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
RETAINING WALL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Place units according to NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide" and
segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Lay units in running bond.
Form corners and ends by using special units cutting units with motor-driven saw or
splitting units with mason's hammer and chisel.
Leveling Base: Place and compact base material to thickness indicated and with not less than
95 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
1.
Leveling Course: At Contractor's option, unreinforced lean concrete may be substituted
for upper 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) of base. Compact and screed concrete to a
smooth, level surface.
C.
First Course: Place first course of segmental retaining wall units for full length of wall. Place
units in firm contact with each other, properly aligned and level.
1.
D.
Subsequent Courses: Remove excess fill and debris from tops of units in course below. Place
units in firm contact, properly aligned, and directly on course below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
3.3
Tamp units into leveling base as necessary to bring tops of units into a level plane.
For units with lugs designed to fit into holes in adjacent units, lay units so lugs are
accurately aligned with holes, and bedding surfaces are firmly seated on beds of units
below.
For units with lips at front of units, slide units as far forward as possible for firm contact
with lips of units below.
For units with lips at bottom rear of units, slide units as far forward as possible for firm
contact of lips with units below.
For units with pins, install pins and align units.
For units with clips, install clips and align units.
Cap Units: Place cap units and secure with cap adhesive.
FILL PLACEMENT
A.
General: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork," NCMA's "Segmental
Retaining Wall Installation Guide," and segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Fill voids between and within units with drainage fill. Place fill as each course of units is laid.
C.
Place, spread, and compact drainage fill and soil fill in uniform lifts for full width and length of
embankment as wall is laid. Place and compact fills without disturbing alignment of units.
Where both sides of wall are indicated to be filled, place fills on both sides at same time. Begin
at wall and place and spread fills toward embankment.
1.
2.
Use only hand-operated compaction equipment within 48 inches (1200 mm) of wall, or
one-half of height above bottom of wall, whichever is greater.
Compact reinforced-soil fill to not less than 95 percent maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698.
a.
3.
In areas where only hand-operated compaction equipment is allowed, compact fills
to not less than 90 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
Compact nonreinforced-soil fill to comply with Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
D.
Place a layer of drainage fill at least 6 inches (150 mm) wide behind wall to within 12 inches
(300 mm) of finished grade. Place a layer of drainage geotextile between drainage fill and soil
fill.
E.
Place impervious fill over top edge of drainage fill layer.
F.
Slope grade at top of wall away from wall unless otherwise indicated. Slope grade at base of
wall away from wall. Provide uniform slopes that will prevent ponding.
3.4
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Level: For bed-joint lines along walls, do not exceed 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet (32
mm in 3 m), 3 inches (75 mm) maximum.
B.
Variation from Indicated Batter: For slope of wall face, do not vary from indicated slope by more
than 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet (32 mm in 3 m).
C.
Variation from Indicated Wall Line: For walls indicated as straight, do not vary from straight line
by more than 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet (32 mm in 3 m).
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency:
inspections.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for field quality control.
3.6
Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
ADJUSTING
A.
Remove and replace segmental retaining wall construction of the following descriptions:
1.
2.
3.
Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged units. Units may be repaired if Architect
approves methods and results.
Segmental retaining walls that do not match approved Samples.
Segmental retaining walls that do not comply with other requirements indicated.
END OF SECTION 02832
SECTION 03250 - BENTONITE WATERSTOP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary
Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section.
WORK SUMMARY
Furnish and install expanding bentonite-based waterstop as specified herein, illustrated on
project drawings, or as required to complete the work.
RELATED SECTIONS
Other specification Sections which relate directly to the work of this section, but are not limited
to, the following:
1.
2.
1.04
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
Division 7 Section "Bentonite Geotextile Waterproofing".
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Verification of Details: Contractor to notify the Architect of details, notes, and specifications
which do not comply with current manufacturer's installation requirements.
B.
Adhesion: Adhere bentonite waterstop in continous adhesive. Adhesive shall be compatible
with waterstop. Mechanical fasteners can be used in conjunction with adhesive, but should not
be used solely to secure the waterstop.
C.
Installation Instructions: Components and installation procedures shall be in accordance with
current manufacturer's printed specifications and recommendations. Verify technical data
submittals are the most current with manufacturer.
D.
Expansion Joints: Bentonite Waterstop is not designed, nor intended for waterproofing or
sealing expansion joints.
E.
Concrete: Concrete shall be structural grade quality with a minimum 3000 psi tensile strength.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Bentonite Content Certificate: Submit certificate signed by manufacturer certifying waterstop
consists of 75% sodium bentonite and 25% butyl rubber compound and that the product is
manufactured in the U.S.A.
B.
NSF Standard 61 Certification: Submit Official NSF Listing for waterstop confirming that the
product conforms to the requirements of NSF Standard 61 – Drinking Water System
Components – Health Effects.
1.06
MATERIAL DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A.
Deliver materials as factory packaged, sealed and labeled. Handle and protect as necessary to
prevent damage or deterioration during shipment and handling. Store materials in a dry location
secure from weather and construction operations. Remove damaged materials from the site and
dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIALS
Sodium Bentonite
1.
2.
B.
Waterstop Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Waterstop shall consist of 75% sodium bentonite and 25% butyl rubber formed into the
following shapes and sizes. Sodium bentonite shall be of selected Wyoming granular
bentonite containing approximately 90% montmorillonite with 10% maximum unaltered
volcanic ash and other native sediments. Free Swell Rating: 2 grams sifted into deionized water swells to occupy a minimum volume of 24 cc.
NSF Certified: Bentonite waterstop shall be certified by NSF International to conform to
the requirements of NSF Standard 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health
Effects.
Rolls of a flexible strip of bentonite and butyl rubber compound for use in concrete
construction joints.
Rolls of a flexible strip of rapid hydrating bentonite and butyl rubber compound for use in
concrete construction joints.
Trapezoidal rolls of flexible strip of bentonite and butyl rubber compound with a
reinforcing poly scrim for use in concrete construction joints.
Trapezoidal rolls of flexible strip of rapid hydrating bentonite and butyl rubber compound
with a reinforcing poly scrim for use in concrete construction joints.
Rolls of flexible strip of bentonite and butyl rubber compound for use in concrete
construction joints.
Rolls of flexible strip of rapid hydrating bentonite and butyl rubber compound for use in
concrete construction joints.
Adhesive:
1.
Gray, non-flammable, latex and water based adhesive used to secure all bentonite
waterstop to concrete, metal and PVC horizontal and vertical surfaces. Keep from
freezing. Application rate: 400-600 linear feet per gallon.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
EXAMINATION
Site Examination: Installer shall examine concrete and conditions under which work is to be
performed and verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of bentonite waterstop.
Installer shall notify the Architect, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to proper completion
of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
WEATHER CONDITIONS
A.
3.03
A.
Installation shall not proceed when work areas are flooded to the extent that would cause
bentonite waterstop to hydrate; nor when precipitation can be reasonably anticipated before
bentonite waterstop can be properly installed or protected. Consult with manufacturer's
representative as necessary to ensure adequate protection of bentonite waterstop.
INSTALLATION
Install bentonite waterstops where waterstops are indicated in all applicable vertical and
horizontal concrete construction joints. Place bentonite waterstop to allow for minimum amount
of applicable concrete coverage on all sides.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Clean all debris, dirt and rocks from dry concrete surface. Concrete surface should be
smooth and free of voids and projections.
Apply adhesive by brush to the concrete surface, 1" to 1-1/4" wide, and allow to dry 5-10
minutes until the adhesive cures black (cold weather will extend longer drying time).
Remove release paper from coil of bentonite waterstop. Firmly press the entire length of
bentonite waterstop against the dried (black) adhesive. Verify the minimum concrete
coverage will be maintained over entire placement of waterstop. Place in maximum
practicable lengths to minimize coil end joints.
Tightly butt coil ends together to form continuous waterstop. DO NOT OVERLAP COIL
ENDS. Where required, cut coils with sharp knife or utility blade to fit coil ends together
without overlapping.
Following Steps 1-4, install waterstop around all applicable pipes and other mechanical
penetrations.
Place second concrete pour to encapsulate waterstop as soon as possible after installing
bentonite waterstop. Protect installed waterstop from prehydration prior to concrete
placement.
EN D OF SECTION 03250
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
4.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.3
Division 1 Section “Quality Control” for inspection and testing requirements.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
Division 3 Sections “Plant Precast Structural Concrete” for hollow core prestressed
concrete plank.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement".
Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams,
bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and
supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Samples: For waterstops and vapor retarder.
E.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1.
Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping
formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.
F.
Welding certificates.
G.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer, and testing agency or agencies.
H.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials.
1.
I.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
J.
4.4
Submit a report of reinforcing bar material properties which indicates the properties
necessary to conform to the requirements in AWS D1.4. (Not required for reinforcing
bars required to meet ASTM A706.)
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified
tolerances.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
B.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1.
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures
through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel."
E.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
F.
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
4.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
5.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
5.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
2.
Metal, or other approved panel materials.
Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:
a.
Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not
exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist
plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D.
Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E.
Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
F.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
G.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
H.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1.
2.
3.
5.3
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of
exposed concrete surface.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter in concrete surface.
Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
D.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
5.4
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut bars true
to length with ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed
zinc.
C.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice,"
of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1.
2.
5.5
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar
supports.
For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar
supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following:
a.
b.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B.
Normal-Weight Course Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better for
interior concrete concealed from public view in finished construction, Class 5S for concrete
exposed to public view in finished construction and concrete exposed to weather, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10
years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar
aggregates and cementitious materials.
1.
C.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.
Normal Weight Fine Aggregates: ASTM C 33 or ASTM C 144, manufactured or natural sand,
from same source for entire Project, free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in
cement.
1.
Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than
18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less
than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3-mm) sieve, and
less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50 (0.3 mm).
a.
These gradation requirements are waived for footing concrete.
D.
Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C330, ½ inch (13 mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
E.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
operations.
5.6
Do not use wash water from mixer washout
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by the manufacturer as compatible with other
admixtures required or proposed by concrete supplier.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding 0.1 percent by
mass of cementitious materials in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or
admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
5.7
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic
and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions
with steel reinforcement in concrete.
WATERSTOPS
A.
Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
5.8
Bometals, Inc.
Greenstreak.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.
Murphy, Paul Plastics Co.
Progress Unlimited, Inc.
Tamms Industries, Inc.
Vinylex Corp.
Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb.
Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C.
adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.9
Include manufacturer's recommended
Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Plus.
Raven Industries Inc.; Dura Skrim 8.
Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type- 85.
Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
dissipating.
5.10
ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B.
Bonding Agent:
butadiene.
C.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1.
ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
5.11
A.
REPAIR MATERIALS
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.12
A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
2.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Concrete field compressive strengths shall not exceed stated compressive strengths by
more than 10 percent to minimize shrinkage.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
1.
B.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete as follows:
1.
2.
3.
0.15 percent by weight of cement for exterior slabs, walks and pavements.
0.30 percent by weight of cement for vertical exterior concrete, concrete slabs on grade,
concrete roof slabs, or concrete in contact with earth.
1.00 percent by weight of cement for interior concrete with no exterior or subgrade
exposure.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
5.13
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
B.
4.
4.
5.
6.
A.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.
Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m).
Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Air Content – Interior Floor Slabs: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to
exceed 3 percent.
Air Content – Exterior Slabs: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for
3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
Structural Lightweight Concrete Mixture for Hollow Core Plank Topping And Elevated Slabs in
Housing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.14
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm)
nominal maximum aggregate size.
Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.
Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete,
as required, for placement and workability.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for floor slabs, concrete
required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below
0.50.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,500 psi (31 MPa).
Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 120 lb/cu. ft. (1922 kg/cu. m.)
Slump: 4 inches (100 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Air Content: Not more than 3%.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
5.15
A.
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete:
Measure, batch, mix, and deliver
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
concrete
according to
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
2.
Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
2.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete unless otherwise
indicated. Where square or acute exterior corners are indicated align forms to provide a crisp,
even edge.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
6.2
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
2.
3.
6.3
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
Install sleeves for penetrating items specified in other sections.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
1.
2.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
6.4
SHORES AND RESHORES
A.
Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring
and reshoring.
1.
B.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
6.5
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
B.
Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with mechanical
equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).
6.6
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture waterproofing. Repair damage to waterproofing before placing
concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
1.
Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
F.
Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material
according to ASTM A 780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel
reinforcement.
6.7
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
2.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
2.
D.
2.
6.8
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1.
E.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.
C.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1.
D.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
2.
3.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
2.
6.9
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
G.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to
time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
C.
Rubbed Finish:
indicated:
1.
D.
6.10
Apply to concrete surfaces to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or
covering material, including waterproofing, applied directly to concrete.
Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1.
C.
Apply float finish to surfaces to receive broom finish.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
2.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, or a thin-filmfinish coating.
Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M),
for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a.
3.
D.
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to concrete slabs-on-grade, exterior concrete platforms,
steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
6.11
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after
work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide curbs as indicated. Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms
while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
6.12
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
3.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a.
6.13
After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless curing compound manufacturer certifies in writing that curing
compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in
depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with
water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar
or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5.
6.
7.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
6.14
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Steel reinforcement placement.
Steel reinforcement welding.
Headed bolts and studs.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m)
or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a.
2.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3.
4.
5.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
b.
6.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a.
b.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Test one field-cured specimen at 7 days, and two specimens at 28 days. Testing
of the fourth specimen is reserved for confirmation testing as required by project
conditions and schedule requirements, subject to the request of the Contractor, the
testing laboratory, the Structural Engineer of Record, or the Architect, and the
concurrence of the Structural Engineer of Record and the Architect.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply
with the Contract Documents.
Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)
within 24 hours of finishing.
END OF SECTION 03300
SECTION 03301 - Site CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section specifies requirements for concrete cast-in-place on the site.
B.
The work of includes cast-in-place concrete pavement, bases, foundations,
structures and thrust blocks.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include:
1.
2.
1.03
Section 02200 - Earthwork
Section 02525 - Curbing
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
References herein are made in accordance with the following abbreviations and all
work under this Section shall conform to the latest editions as applicable.
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 301 ACI 305R ACI 306R ACI 316R -
Specifications for Structural Concrete for Building
Hot Weather Concreting
Cold Weather Concreting
Recommendations for Construction of Concrete Pavements and
Concrete Bases
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM 185 ASTM 615 ASTM C33 ASTM C94 ASTM C143 ASTM C150 ASTM C171 ASTM C231 ASTM C260 ASTM C309 ASTM C494 -
Welded Wire Steel Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
Deformed and Plain Billot Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
Concrete Aggregates
Ready-Mixed Concrete
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
Portland Cement
Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice.
Americans with Disabilities Act and State Regulations
1.04
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Work and materials for construction of the cement concrete walks shall conform to
ACI 316R. Other cast-in-place concrete shall conform to ACI 301.
B.
Work, materials, and color of the wheelchair ramp paving shall conform to applicable
sections of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and State standards, whichever is
more stringent.
C.
Dimensions, locations, and details of equipment pads, anchors, supports, and
similar features shown on the drawings are approximate. Manufacturer's approved
shop Drawings of equipment to be supported, anchored, or contained thereby shall
be consulted for exact location, size and details.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Description of methods and sequence of placement for each type of speciallyfinished concrete, including description of methods and sequence of placement.
B.
Manufacturer's product data for the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.06
Form release agent.
Concrete coloring additive.
Preformed joint filler.
TESTING
A.
The Owner may employ an independent testing laboratory to inspect and test
concrete paving and other cast-in-place concrete work.
B.
Testing of materials and installed work may occur at any time during progress of the
work. Rejected materials and installed work shall be removed and replaced.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed.
1.
Bars employed as dowels shall be hot-rolled plain rounds.
B.
Steel wire: ASTM A82, plain cold drawn steel.
C.
Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the applicable requirements of
ASTM A185. Fabric reinforcement shall be furnished in flat sheets. Fabric
reinforcement in rolls will not be permitted.
D.
2.03
1.
For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners
where base material will not support chair legs.
2.
For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact
with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI,
Class 1).
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
A.
2.04
Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, and welded wire fabric in place shall be
wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
Portland cement concrete shall:
1.
Have a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45 conforming to ACI 316R.
2.
Be Air-entrained type conforming to ASTM C94. Air content by volume shall
be 6 percent + 1 percent, and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C260.
3.
Be placed with a slump not less than 3 inches nor greater than 4 inches,
determined in accordance with ASTM C143.
4.
Use cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type I or II. Only one color of
cement, all of the same manufacturer, shall be used for the work.
5.
Use fine and coarse aggregates conforming to ASTM C33.
6.
Contain a water reducing agent to minimize cement and water content of the
concrete mix at the specified slump. Water reducing agent shall conform to
ASTM C494, Type A.
7.
Contain no calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall
be added to the concrete. No admixtures other than those specified shall be
used in the concrete without the specific written permission of the Engineer in
each case.
COLORED CONCRETE
A.
Color hardener and curing compound shall be manufactured and supplied by the
Bomanite Corporation, 81 Encina Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94301; tel. 800-854-2094,
or approved equivalent.
B.
2.05
Color for concrete shall have visual contrast with surrounding paving.
2.
Curing compound shall be liquid applied.
Surface sealer shall be non-yellowing type which breathes water vapor, as
manufactured by ProSoCo, Sika Chemical Corporation, Dural-International
Corporation, or approved equivalent.
CURING MATERIALS FOR UNCOLORED CONCRETE
A.
2.06
1.
Curing shall be accomplished by the following methods:
1.
Moist curing with burlap covering.
2.
Curing paper, nonstaining, fiber reinforced laminated Kraft bituminous product
conforming to ASTM C171. Four mil polyethylene sheeting may be
substituted for curing paper.
3.
Curing compound, a resin-base, white pigmented compound conforming to
ASTM C309, Type 2.
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Expansion joint filler shall be preformed, nonbituminous type conforming to ASTM
D1752, Type II, similar to Sealtight Cork Expansion Joint Filler or approved
equivalent.
1.
B.
2.07
Premolded filler shall be one piece for the full depth and width of the joint.
Smooth dowel shall be hot rolled plain steel dowel bonded at one end and operating
in smooth close fitting sleeve (of same material) at the other.
FORMS
A.
Cylindrical Forms: Sonotube Fibre Forms, wax-impregnated strippable forms
manufactured by Sonoco Products Company, General Products Division, ABS or
PVC plastic reusable forms, or approved equivalent.
B.
Forms for Exposed Finish: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other
acceptable panel materials. Plywood shall be APA Ref. 1 B-B (Concrete Form),
Class I Exterior Grade plywood or B-B or A-C Class I high density overlay concrete
form plywood. Form work materials shall produce smooth, continuous, straight and
level surfaces.
C.
Forms for Unexposed Finish: Plywood, lumber or metal, with lumber dressed on at
least two edges and one side.
D.
Form Ties: Prefabricated, adjustable length galvanized steel snap-off ties, with
brackets, cones, cornerlocks and other accessories as necessary.
E.
Form Release Agent: Commercial formulation compounds that will not bond with,
stain or adversely affect concrete.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A.
The subgrade of areas to be paved shall be graded and compacted as specified in
Section 02220, Pavement Subbase and Base.
B.
Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading
and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be
performed in completed subgrade, subbase, base, or pavement, subsequent backfill
and compaction shall be performed as required by the Engineer and as specified in
Section 02200, Earthwork.
C.
Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.
D.
Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Engineer. Subgrade shall be approved
for installation of the gravel base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by
inspection procedures shall be repaired.
BASE COURSE
A.
Base course for concrete paving shall be pavement subbase course or gravel base
materials specified in Section 02220, Pavement Subbase and Base, as shown on
the Drawings.
B.
Width of base course shall extend beyond edge of the proposed pavement as
shown on the Drawings.
C.
Material shall be placed in lifts no more than 6 inches thick, compacted measure.
Each lift shall be separately compacted to specified density.
1.
2.
3.
Material shall be placed adjacent to wall, manhole, catch basin, and other
structures only after they have been set to required grade.
Rolling shall begin at sides and progress to center of crowned areas, and
shall begin on low side and progress toward high side of sloped areas.
Rolling shall continue until material does not creep or wave ahead of roller
wheels.
Surface irregularities which exceed 1/2 inch as measured by means of a 10
foot long straightedge, shall be regraded and recompacted.
D.
Base course shall be compacted at optimum moisture content to not less than 95
percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557.
E.
The base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated. Less select materials
shall not be permitted to become mixed with the base course material.
3.03
3.04
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Before being placed in position, reinforcing steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of
loose mill and rust scale, dirt, ice, and other foreign material which may reduce the
bond between the concrete and reinforcing. Where there is delay in placing
concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be reinspected and cleaned when
required.
B.
Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded.
C.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, reinforcing shall extend within 2 inches of
form work and expansion joints. Reinforcing shall continue through control joints.
Adjacent sheets of fabric reinforcing shall lap 6 inches.
D.
After forms have been coated with form release agent, but before concrete is
placed, reinforcing steel shall be securely wired in the required position and shall be
maintained in that position until concrete is placed and compacted. Chair bars and
supports shall be installed in a number and arrangement approved by the Engineer.
FORMS
A.
3.05
General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can
support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of
correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork
construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI
347 limits.
1.
Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
2.
Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B.
Construct forms to provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses,
moldings, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, and inserts, and
other features required for the work. Use selected materials to obtain required
finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent cement paste
from leaking.
C.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and other
features for easy removal.
D.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer
strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
E.
Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,
wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before placing concrete. Re-tighten forms
and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
General: Set and build into formwork the anchorage devices and other embedded
items required for work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete.
Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of
items to be attached.
B.
3.06
PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A.
3.07
3.08
Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screen strips for
slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and
secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type
screeds.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC formcoating compound before placing reinforcement.
CONCRETE PLACING
A.
Equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be observed as to
weather, and condition of base shall meet the requirements of ACI 316R.
B.
The Engineer shall be notified of scheduled concrete placement sufficiently in
advance of start of operation to allow preliminary inspection of the work, including
subgrade, forms, and reinforcing steel.
C.
Work shall not be performed during rainy weather or when temperature is less than
40°F (4.4°C).
D.
Adjacent work shall be protected from stain and damage. Damaged and stained
areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original conditions.
E.
Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material against which new
concrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly damp when concrete is placed. There
shall be no free water on surface.
F.
Concrete which has set or partially set, before placing shall not be used.
Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.
G.
Concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated, or otherwise consolidated to secure a solid
and homogeneous mass, thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into corners
of forms.
H.
When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained full set, latter shall be
cleaned of foreign matter, and mortar laitance shall be removed by chipping and
washing. Clean, roughened base surface shall be saturated with water, but shall
have no free water on surface. A coat of 1:1 cement-sand grout, approximately 1/8
inch thick, shall be well scrubbed into the thoroughly dampened concrete base.
New concrete shall be placed immediately, before grout has dried or set.
FINISHING
A.
Concrete surfaces shall be screeded and finished true to line and grade, and free of
hollows and bumps. Surface shall be dense and smooth.
1.
Finished concrete surface for concrete subbases shall be woodfloated to a
slightly rough surface. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2.
3.09
Finished concrete surfaces shall be wood-floated and steel troweled, or
broom finished, to a uniform surface. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/8
inch in 10 feet.
B.
Horizontal surfaces of concrete surfaces which will be exposed shall be given a light
broomed finish, with direction of grooves in concrete surface perpendicular to length
of concrete band, slab, or pad. After concrete has set sufficiently to prevent coarse
aggregate from being torn from surface, but before it has completely set, brooms
shall be drawn across the surface to produce a pattern of small parallel grooves.
Broomed surface shall be uniform, with no smooth, unduly rough or porous spots, or
other irregularities. Coarse aggregate shall not be dislodged by brooming operation.
C.
Immediately following finishing operations, arises at edges and both sides of
expansion joints shall be rounded to a 1/4 inch radius. Control joints to be tooled
shall be scored into slab surface with scoring tool. Adjacent edges of control joint
shall at same time be finished to a 1/4 inch radius.
D.
Where finishing is performed before end of curing period, concrete shall not be
permitted to dry out, and shall be kept continuously moist from time of placing until
end of curing period, or until curing membrane is applied.
E.
Sidewalk wheelchair ramps shall have a coarse broom finish perpendicular to the
direction of travel.
CURING
A.
Concrete shall be kept continuously damp from time of placement until end of
specified curing period or cured by other methods. Water shall not be added to
surface during floating and troweling operations, and not earlier than 24 hours after
concrete placement. Between finishing operations, surface shall be protected from
rapid drying by a covering of waterproofing paper. Surface shall be damp when the
covering is placed over it, and shall be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water,
applied as often as necessary to prevent drying, but not sooner than 24 hours after
placing concrete. None of the water so applied shall be troweled or floated into
surface.
B.
Concrete surfaces shall be cured by completely covering with curing paper or
application of a curing compound.
1. Concrete cured using waterproof paper shall be completely covered with paper
with seams lapped and sealed with tape. Concrete surface shall not be allowed
to become moistened between 24 and 36 hours after placing concrete. During
curing period surface shall be checked frequently, and sprayed with water as
often as necessary to prevent drying, but not earlier than 24 hours after placing
concrete.
2.
Concrete cured with a curing compound shall have the compound applied at a
rate of 200 square feet per gallon, in two applications perpendicular to each
other.
3.
Curing period shall be seven days minimum.
C.
3.10
EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
3.11
3.13
3.14
Expansion joints shall be 1/2 inch wide and located where shown on the Drawings.
Expansion joints shall be troweled in the concrete to required width with preformed
joint filler in place. Joint filler shall extend the full depth of the slab and full length of
the expansion joint.
1.
For concrete walks, pavements, and pads, depth of joint filler shall be placed
to form a 1-1/4 inch deep recess for sealant and backer rod below finished
concrete surface.
2.
Use of multiple pieces to make up required depth and width of joint will not be
permitted.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A.
3.12
Only if additional protection is absolutely required, the surface should remain
uncovered after the seven day period for at least 4 days, after which time new and
unwrinkled non-staining reinforced waterproof Kraft curing paper may be used.
Construction joints shall be placed whenever placing of concrete is suspended for
more than 30 minutes.
1.
Butt joint with dowels or thickened edge joint shall be used if construction
joints occur at control joint locations.
2.
Keyed joints with tiebars shall be used if the joint occurs at any other location.
CONTROL JOINTS
A.
Control joints shall be tooled into the concrete slab, with 3-inch wide border and
troweled edges, in pattern shown on the Drawings, or every 4 feet o.c. maximum.
Joint shall be made after concrete is finished and when the surface is stiff enough to
support the weight of workmen without damage to the slab, but before slab has
achieved its final set.
B.
Scoring shall cut into slab surface at least 1 inch, but in no case not less than
25 percent of slab depth.
COLD WEATHER CONCRETING
A.
Materials for concrete shall be heated when concrete is mixed, placed, or cured
when the mean daily temperature is below 40°F or is expected to fall to below 40°F
within 72 hours. The concrete, after placing, shall be protected by covering, heat, or
both.
B.
Details of handling and protecting of concrete during freezing weather shall be
subject to the approval and direction of the Engineer. Procedures shall be in
accordance with provisions of ACI 306R.
HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A.
Concrete just placed shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and the forms
and reinforcement just prior to placing shall be sprinkled with cold water. Every
effort shall be made to minimize delays which will result in excessive mixing of the
concrete after arrival on the site.
3.15
B.
During periods of excessively hot weather (95°F., or above), ingredients in the
concrete shall be cooled with cold mixing water to maintain the temperature of the
concrete at permissible levels in accordance with the provisions of ACI 305. Any
concrete with a temperature above 95°F., when ready for placement, will be
rejected.
C.
Temperature records shall be maintained throughout the period of hot weather
giving air temperature, general weather conditions (calm, windy, clear, cloudy, etc.)
and relative humidity. Records shall include checks on temperature of concrete as
delivered and after placing in forms. Data should be correlated with the progress of
the work so that conditions surrounding the construction of any part of the structure
can be ascertained.
PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
A.
Concrete surfaces shall be protected from traffic or damage until surfaces have
hardened sufficiently.
END OF SECTION 03301
SECTION 03410 - PLANT-PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following structural precast concrete units:
1.
Interior elements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Exterior elements:
a.
3.
B.
Solid wall panels, with and without openings.
Interior and exterior fire-resistant wall panels.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Long-span double tees.
Solid wall panels, with and without openings.
Fire-rated solid wall panels.
Stairs.
Lightwalls.
Division 1 section “Mockup Requirements” for precast concrete sample panel.
See Division 3 section “Cast-in-place Concrete” for concrete washes.
See Division 3 section “Plant-Precast Architectural Concrete” for precast structural
concrete with thin-brick facings, and for reinforcing design for cast-in-place concrete
washes.
See Division 5 section “Strand Guards” for steel strand pedestrian guards supported by
precast columns.
DEFINITION
A.
1.3
Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved precast structural concrete color, finish, and
texture, pre-approved by Architect.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design precast structural concrete, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall withstand
design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.
C.
Design precast concrete columns to support strand guards as otherwise indicated in Section
05522.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and waterabsorption tests.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Maximium of Two Precast Structural Submittal Packages permitted: One for interior work
and one for exterior work.
Submit reinforcing design for concrete washes to the Contractor and the Cast-in-place
Concrete subcontractor.
Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings,
support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Detail
fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
4.
D.
Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance
requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do
not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying
details or materials and maintain the general design concept.
Casting Schedule: Submit proposed casting schedule with first shop drawing submittal.
1.
E.
Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish.
Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses.
Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Show size, length, and
type of each weld.
Detail loose and cast-in hardware, lifting and erection inserts, connections, and
joints.
Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in
or attached to structure or other construction.
Include and locate openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm). Specifically identify
openings for electrical conduit and standpipes.
Indicate location of each precast structural concrete unit by same identification
mark placed on panel.
Indicate relationship of precast structural concrete units to adjacent materials.
Indicate camber.
Indicate shim sizes and grouting sequence.
Architect will not approve individual pieces for casting.
Samples:
1.
For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of precast structural concrete units
with architectural finish, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture
variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).
a.
b.
c.
Where other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples
illustrating workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing
concrete.
Where edges of panels are exposed on the exterior of building, edge color of panel
shall match face color.
Resubmit samples until a color acceptable to the architect is obtained.
F.
Mockup Panel: See Section 01454 – Mockup Requirements for Mockup Panel requirements.
G.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, provide analysis data signed and sealed by
qualified professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia responsible for their
preparation.
H.
Fire-Resistance Calculations Letter: Confirm the fire-resistant rated precast elements by list of
precast members and the corresponding section of code used to determine their fire rating.
Letter shall be signed by the design professional responsible for its preparation. See Drawing
TD002 for fire ratings related to construction type and for other required ratings, such as shafts
I.
Qualification Data: For fabricator / installer, fabricator’s testing agency, and fabricator’s
professional engineer.
J.
Welding certificates.
K.
Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
1.5
Cementitious materials.
Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.
Admixtures.
Bearing pads.
Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.
Material Test Reports: For aggregates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering, manufacturing, and
erecting precast structural concrete units to comply with performance requirements.
Responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.
1.
Participates in PCI's Plant Certification program at time of bidding, designated as a PCI
Certified Plant appropriate for the primary structural components of the project (building
frame members, shear wall panels, and double tees), and producing members or
obtaining members not otherwise produced in the fabricator’s primary plant from other
PCI-certified plants as follows:
a.
2.
Group C, Category C4 - Prestressed Deflected Strand Structural Members.
Has sufficient production capacity to produce the required units without delaying the
Work.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of precast product furnished to project site, qualified at time
of bidding, as evidenced by PCI's Certificate of Compliance, to erect Category S2 - Complex
Structural Systems, regularly engaged in the construction of prestressed-precast concrete
parking garage structures with integral architectural finishes, and possessing a valid Virginia
Contractor’s License at the time of bidding and construction.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications:
testing indicated.
Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for
D.
Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations in
PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types
of precast structural concrete units indicated.
E.
Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, qualitycontrol recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with
PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast
Concrete Products." Fabricator’s quality control procedures, including testing, are subject to
observation and review by Owner’s Special Inspector and Testing Agencies.
F.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
G.
Fire-Resistance Calculations: Where indicated, provide precast structural concrete units whose
fire resistance meets the prescriptive requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or has been
calculated according to ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, "Standard Method for Determining Fire
Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies," or PCI MNL 124, "Design for
Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete," and is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
H.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material in same position as
during storage.
B.
Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent
staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.
1.
2.
3.
Store units with dunnage across full width of each bearing point unless otherwise
indicated.
Place adequate dunnage of even thickness between each unit.
Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.
C.
Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid
excessive stresses that would cause cracking or damage.
D.
Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to
other construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
B.
Coordinate casting, delivery, and erection schedules. Allow for adequate curing time of precast
units prior to erection as determined by fabricator’s quality control program and fabricator’s
professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOLD MATERIALS
A.
Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will
provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated;
nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.
1.
Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond with,
stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface
or joint treatments of precast concrete.
B.
Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration to match those used
for precast concrete design reference sample. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended
liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect precast concrete and will
not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.
C.
Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of
newly placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.
2.2
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars:
ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) or
ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed bars, ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip
galvanized, and chromate wash treated after fabrication and bending.
D.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars:
ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) or
ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M epoxy
coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.
E.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire
into flat sheets.
F.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
G.
Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire:
bendable coating.
H.
Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other
devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in
place according to PCI MNL 116.
2.3
ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain, flat sheet, Type 1
PRESTRESSING TENDONS
A.
Pretensioning Strand:
ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 250 (Grade 1720) or Grade 270
(Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire or ASTM A 886/A 886M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), indented, 7wire, low-relaxation strand.
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated. Provide
cement from same source throughout project.
1.
B.
Supplementary Cementitious Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same
type, brand, and mill source.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent.
Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N.
Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33, with coarse
aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of
exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.
1.
Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that
reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.
a.
2.
Gradation: To match design reference sample.
Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material
as coarse aggregate unless otherwise approved by Architect.
D.
Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.
E.
Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength
of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 116.
F.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
G.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to
not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of
admixture.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M.
Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic
and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions
with steel reinforcement in concrete.
2.5
STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A.
Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished,
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of
PCI MNL 116.
C.
Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M.
D.
Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
E.
Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).
F.
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.
G.
Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
H.
Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
I.
Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and
flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.
J.
Inserts and Coil Rods:
Sizes and capacities as required by design criteria, with
electrodeposited zinc coating, ASTM B 633, Service Condition 1, Type III.
K.
Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for
galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
1.
2.
For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less
than 0.03 percent or to between 0.15 and 0.25 percent or limit sum of silicon and 2.5
times phosphorous content to 0.09 percent.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less
than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPCPaint 20.
L.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
M.
Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories
required to install precast structural concrete units.
2.6
BEARING PADS, SHIMS, AND SLIDE BEARINGS
A.
Provide one of the following bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended
by precast fabricator for application:
1.
2.
Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene
(neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 50 to 70 Shore, Type A
durometer hardness, ASTM D 2240; minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa),
ASTM D 412.
Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented
synthetic fibers set in elastomer. 70 to 90 Shore, Type A durometer hardness,
3.
4.
5.
B.
Shims for Bearing Pads: Galvanized steel plate. Tack weld multiple shims on at least two
faces or corners, and touch up galvanized coatings damaged by welding. Limit shim stacks to
not more than 3 individual shims.
1.
C.
2.7
ASTM D 2240; capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) with
no cracking, splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of pad. Test 1 specimen for
every 200 pads used in Project.
Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads:
Preformed, horizontally layered
cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer; 80 to 100 Shore, Type A durometer hardness,
ASTM D 2240; complying with AASHTO's "AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD) Bridge Specifications," Division II, Section 18.10.2; or with MIL-C-882E.
Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene, glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless- or
mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.
High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip.
Shims shall not be exposed beyond joint.
Slide Bearings: As indicated, or if not indicated as designated by fabricator’s engineer for
applications required.
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with
minimum water required for placement and hydration.
B.
Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout:
Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing
and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B
and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working
time.
C.
Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type,
grade, and class to suit requirements.
2.8
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
1.
Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and
granulated blast-furnace slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight; metakaolin and
silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
B.
Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified
precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option.
C.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by
ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
D.
Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures and full-depth
mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with
materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1.
2.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa).
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
E.
Water Absorption:
PCI MNL 116.
F.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116.
G.
When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
H.
Concrete Mix Adjustments:
Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant.
2.9
6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to
MOLD FABRICATION
A.
Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures
due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and
detensioning operations.
Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before
reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by
release agent.
1.
B.
Maintain molds to provide completed precast structural concrete units of shapes, lines, and
dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.
1.
2.
2.10
A.
Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid
backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form
liner with form-release agent.
Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.
FABRICATION
Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage
hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.
Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting
operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement
or concrete placement.
1.
Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."
B.
Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,
cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to
supporting and adjacent construction.
C.
Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast structural concrete units as
indicated on the Contract Drawings and as follows:
1.
Masonry Veneer Dovetail Anchor Slots: Cast-in vertical dovetail anchor slots furnished
under Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry” for attachment of masonry veneer anchors at 24
inches on center at locations indicated to receive field-installed masonry veneer.
D.
Cast-in openings for electrical conduit, standpipe mains and openings larger than 10 inches
(250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand without
Architect's approval.
E.
Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcement exceeds
limits specified, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy
coat bar ends after cutting.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during
concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices
to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.
Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) minimum coverage. Increase
cover requirements according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M) when units are exposed to
corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie
bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct
wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain at least 3/4-inch (19-mm)
minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure
conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement
in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed
concrete surfaces.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of
adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
F.
Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection
stresses.
G.
Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or posttensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Delay detensioning or post-tensioning of precast, prestressed structural concrete units
until concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as
established by test cylinders cured under same conditions as concrete.
Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat
cutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading.
If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid
dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.
Protect strand ends and anchorages with bituminous, zinc-rich, or epoxy paint to avoid
corrosion and possible rust spots.
Protect strand ends and anchorages with a minimum of 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick,
nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout mortar and sack rub surface. Coat or spray the inside
surfaces of pocket with bonding agent before installing grout.
Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.
I.
Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch (25 mm)
or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover
specified.
J.
Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming
in precast concrete units.
1.
Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
K.
Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or
damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or
entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116.
L.
Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement.
M.
Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot-weather concrete placement.
N.
Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or
permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that will
not show in finished structure.
O.
Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or
by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure
units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect
on performance or appearance of final product.
P.
Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements,
including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet
requirements in PCI MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
Fabricate precast structural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed
edges and corners precise and true so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product
dimension tolerances.
COMMERCIAL FINISHES
Underside of Double Tees:
1.
B.
Standard Grade: Normal plant-run finish produced in molds that impart a smooth finish to
concrete. Surface holes smaller than 1/2 inch (13 mm) caused by air bubbles, normal
color variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls are permitted. Fill air holes
greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in (1300 sq.
mm). Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not
permitted. Limit joint offsets to 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Interior Columns, Beams, Wall Panels and Stair Units; Interior Side of Architecturally Finished
Wall and Column Panels:
1.
Grade B Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter with
sand-cement paste matching color of adjacent surfaces. Fill air holes greater than 1/8
inch (3 mm) in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in. (1300 sq. mm). Grind
smooth form offsets or fins larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repair surface blemishes due to
holes or dents in molds. Discoloration at form joints is permitted.
C.
Screed or float finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating
screeds to a uniform finish. Hand screed at projections. Normal color variations, minor
indentations, minor chips, and spalls are permitted. Major imperfections, honeycombing, or
defects are not permitted.
D.
Smooth, steel trowel finish unformed surfaces. Except for specific surfaces indicated below,
Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level with straightedge, float, and trowel to a smooth,
uniform finish.
1.
2.
3.
Apply roughened surface finish according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M) to precast concrete
units that will receive concrete topping after installation.
Apply course broom finish or course swirl texture finish to traffic surfaces of double tees.
Do not exceed 1/4-inch (6 mm) profile height.
Apply non-slip broom finish to walking surfaces of stairs, stair landings, and other nonvehicular traffic surfaces, oriented perpendicular to predominate direction of pedestrian
traffic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
Do not install precast concrete units until supporting, cast-in-place, building structural framing
has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or until supporting steel or other
structure is complete.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast
structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B.
Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances.
Provide temporary structural framing, supports, and bracing as required to maintain position,
stability, and alignment of units until permanent connection.
1.
2.
3.
Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast structural
concrete units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims
from separating.
Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush
with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
C.
Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as
soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.
D.
Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval of the Architect.
E.
Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to
precast, prestressed concrete units.
F.
Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding
electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
3.
G.
At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent
loosening of nuts after final adjustment.
1.
H.
4.
5.
3.3
Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding
connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For
friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at random
by calibrated torque wrench.
Grouting: Grout connections and joints and open spaces at keyways, connections, and joints
where required or indicated on Shop Drawings. Retain grout in place until hard enough to
support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Protect precast structural concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding
or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.
Clean weld-affected steel surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and apply
a minimum 4.0-mil- (0.1-mm-) thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces
according to ASTM A 780.
Remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.
Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces.
Fill joints completely without seepage to other surfaces.
Trowel top of grout joints on roofs smooth and uniform. Finish transitions between
different surface levels not steeper than 1 to 12.
Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or
hardens.
Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set.
Concrete Washes: See Division 3 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete” for installation of concrete
washes.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
3.4
Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without
exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 135.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Field welds will be visually inspected and nondestructive tested according to ASTM E 165 or
ASTM E 709. Bolted connections will be subject to inspections.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply
with specified requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS
A.
Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect.
1.
Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and
appearance of units has not been impaired.
B.
Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between
original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20
feet (6 m).
C.
Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to
ASTM A 780.
D.
Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop
primer.
E.
Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or
when repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete
surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint
treatment to remove form marks, weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1.
2.
Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's
written recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and
water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other
work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of
exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION 03410
SECTION 03450 - PLANT-PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Precast architectural concrete units.
Thin-brick-faced, precast architectural concrete units.
See Division 3 section “Cast-in-place Concrete” for concrete washes.
Division 3 Section "Plant Precast Structural Concrete" for structural tees, framing and
concrete wall panels without decorative facing.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide precast architectural concrete units and connections capable
of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as
indicated on the Drawings, or if not indicated as follows:
a.
1.3
Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch (19 mm).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixes: For each concrete mix.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Submit shop drawings for plant precast architectural concrete as one package.
Submit reinforcing design for concrete washes to the Contractor and the Cast-in-place
Concrete subcontractor.
Detail fabrication and installation of precast architectural concrete units. Indicate member
locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, limits of each finish, and
types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Indicate separate face and backup mix locations and thicknesses.
Indicate locations and extent and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is
proposed.
Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in
hardware, inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories.
Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in other
construction.
e.
f.
g.
D.
Casting Schedule: Submit proposed casting schedule with shop drawing submittal.
1.
E.
Architect will not approve individual pieces for casting.
Samples for Initial Selection:
a.
F.
Indicate locations and details of thin brick units and joint treatment.
Retain subparagraph below if "Performance Requirements" Article is retained.
Delete or modify if Architect assumes or is required by law to assume design
responsibility.
Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
Set of actual precast concrete showing full range of colors. (Omit if color indicated
on the Drawings or otherwise pre-selected.)
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Samples of thin brick showing the full range of colors, textures, and dimensions expected
Samples panel for each type of concrete finish indicated on exposed surfaces of precast
architectural concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture
variations expected;
Sample panel for thin brick assembly. It is the Architect’s intent that the thin brick precast
assemblies match standard brick assemblies as specified in Section 04810.
Sample Panel Size: approximately.16 by 16 by 2 inches.
G.
Mockup Panel: See Section 01454 – Mockup Requirements for Mockup Panel requirements.
H.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast concrete indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, provide analysis data signed and sealed by qualified
professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia responsible for their
preparation.
I.
Calculated Fire-Test-Response Characteristics Letter: Confirm the fire-resistant rated precast
elements by list of precast members and the corresponding section of code used to determine
their fire rating. Letter shall be signed by the design professional responsible for its preparation.
See Drawing TD002 for fire ratings related to construction type and for other required ratings,
such as shafts
J.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
K.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
L.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of
the following for compliance with requirements indicated:
M.
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Concrete materials.
Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.
Admixtures.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.4
Bearing pads.
Water-absorption test reports.
Thin brick units and accessories.
Stone accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed precast architectural
concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements and is
experienced in manufacturing precast architectural concrete units similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Assumes responsibility for engineering precast architectural concrete units to comply with
performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings
and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of precast architectural concrete that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
Participates in PCI's Plant Certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant
for Group A, Category A1--Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units.
Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
Is registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications:
An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
D.
Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and the design recommendations of
PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook--Precast and Prestressed Concrete."
E.
Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, qualitycontrol recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with
PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast
Concrete Products."
F.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of precast
concrete units and are based on the specific types of units indicated. Other fabricators' precast
concrete units complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
G.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
H.
Calculated Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide precast architectural
concrete units whose fire resistance has been calculated according to PCI MNL 124, "Design
for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete," or ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, "Standard
Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies,"
and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I.
1.5
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver precast architectural concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to
ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting,
warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so markings are visible.
B.
Lift and support units only at designated lifting and supporting points as shown on Shop
Drawings.
1.6
SEQUENCING
A.
Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying
the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOLD MATERIALS
A.
Molds: Provide molds and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or
another material that is nonreactive with concrete and dimensionally stable to produce
continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances and suitable for
required finishes
B.
Manufacture or fabricate form liners specifically for this project. Provide form liners designed
and manufactured specifically for use with the thin brick materials selected for this project,
reinforced as required and with tolerances controlled to allow accurate placement in forms and
to maintain alignment of brick coursing between adjoining units, and to prevent excessive
leakage of cement paste or staining of face of thin brick units.
1.
2.2
Form Liners (Thin Brick Template):
configuration indicated.
Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication and bending, as follows:
1.
D.
Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M, as follows:
1.
Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
E.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat
sheets.
F.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
G.
Epoxy-Coated-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain.
H.
Supports: Manufacturer's bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place according to CRSI's "Manual of
Standard Practice," PCI MNL 117.
2.3
PRESTRESSING TENDONS
A.
Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 250 or 270 (Grade 1725 or 1860), uncoated,
7-wire, low-relaxation strand.
B.
Un-bonded Post-Tension Strand: ASTM A416/A416M with corrosion inhibitor conforming to
ASTM D1743, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), 7-wire, low-relaxation strand with polypropylene
conduit sheath.
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III,
1.
B.
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use same color(s), type, brand, and
mill source throughout the precast concrete production and as required to match adjacent
structural precast concrete construction.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse
aggregates complying with Class 5S.
1.
Face-Mix Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts
with cement or causes staining.
a.
2.
Gradation: To match design reference sample.
Face-Mix Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of the same material
as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
C.
Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.
D.
Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures, temperature stable, nonfading, and alkali resistant.
E.
Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength
of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.
F.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
G.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
H.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.
I.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
J.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
K.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.
L.
Plasticizing Admixture: ASTM C 1017.
M.
Fly Ash Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
N.
Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N.
O.
Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240.
2.5
STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A.
Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Carbon-Steel Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished;
AWS D1.1, Type A or B, with arc shields.
C.
Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M.
D.
Malleable Steel Castings: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M).
E.
Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205).
F.
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.
G.
Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
H.
Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450).
I.
Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
J.
Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
K.
High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
L.
Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated for galvanizing, apply
zinc coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M, after fabrication, and
ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable.
1.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less
than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPCPaint 20.
M.
Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except those surfaces to
be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply SSPCPaint 25 according to SSPC-PA 1.
N.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
O.
2.6
Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic shims, and other accessories required to install
precast architectural concrete units.
STAINLESS-STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A.
Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application.
B.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F 593, alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and studs;
stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers.
C.
Stainless-Steel Headed Studs: ASTM A 276.
2.7
BEARING PADS
A.
Provide one of the following bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended
by precast fabricator for application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene
(neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 50 to 70 Shore A
durometer, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa) per ASTM D 412.
Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented
synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Surface hardness of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer.
Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads:
Preformed, horizontally layered
cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer. Surface hardness of 80 to 100 Shore A
durometer.
Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene, glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to mild-steel plate,
of type required for in-service stress.
High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip.
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
2.9
Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout:
Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing
and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for
application.
THIN BRICK UNITS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Thin Brick Units: ASTM C 1088, Grade Exterior, Type TBX, not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm)
thick, and as follows:
1.
Provide face brick matching color, texture, and face size of standard brick veneer to be
used on the towers. See Section 04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies.
a.
Basis of Design: Design is based on Endicott Brick, Thin Brick line.
1)
2.
Color: Endicott Red Ironspot to match standard brick specified in Section
04810.
Special Shapes: Include corners, edge corners, and end edge corners.
3.
4.
5.
2.10
A.
Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when
tested per ASTM C 67.
Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
Back Surface Texture: Scored, combed, wire roughened, or ribbed.
CONCRETE MIXES
Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required.
1.
Limit use of fly ash and granulated blast-furnace slag to 20 percent replacement of
Portland cement by weight; metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of Portland cement
by weight.
B.
Design mixes may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified
precast plant personnel at precast architectural concrete fabricator's option.
C.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by
ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested in accordance with ASTM C1218/C1218M.
D.
Normal-Weight Concrete Face and Backup Mixes: Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial
batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to
provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1.
2.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa).
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
E.
Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL
117.
F.
Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixes: Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field
test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on Project, to provide
lightweight concrete with the following properties:
1.
2.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa).
Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu. m), plus or
minus 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m), according to ASTM C 567.
G.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.
H.
When included in design mixes, add other admixtures to concrete mixes according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.11
A.
MOLD FABRICATION
Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures
due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing
operations.
1.
Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid
backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concreting. Coat form liner with
form-release agent.
B.
Maintain molds to provide completed precast architectural concrete units of shapes, lines, and
dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.
1.
2.
2.12
Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.
THIN BRICK FACINGS
A.
Place form liner templates accurately to provide grid for thin brick facings. Provide solid backing
and supports to maintain stability of liners while placing thin bricks and during concreting.
B.
Securely place thin brick units face down into form liner pockets and place precast concrete
backing mix.
C.
Completely fill joint cavities between thin brick units, and place precast concrete backing mix
while facing mix is still fluid enough to ensure bond.
D.
Clean faces and joints of brick facing.
2.13
A.
FABRICATION
Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage
hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.
Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting
operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement
or concrete placement.
1.
Weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS
D1.1 and AWS C5.4, “Recommended Practices for Stud Welding.”
B.
Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,
cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units
to supporting and adjacent construction.
C.
Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as
indicated on contract drawings.
D.
Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings
or prestressing strand without approval of Architect.
E.
Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabrication, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1.
2.
3.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy coated reinforcing exceeds
limits specified ASTM A775/A775M repair with patching material compatible with coating
material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during
concrete- placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices
to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.
Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain at least 3/4 -inch (19 mm)
minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure
4.
conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement
in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed
concrete surfaces.
Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces
at least one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of
adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
F.
Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection
stresses.
G.
Prestress tendons for precast architectural concrete units by either pretensioning or
posttensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 117.
1.
Delay detensioning or posttensioning of precast, prestressed architectural concrete units
until concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as
established by test cylinders cured under the same conditions as concrete.
H.
Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section.
batching, no additional water may be added.
I.
Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming
in precast concrete units. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete.
J.
Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and/or external vibration without dislocating
or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing or
entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.
K.
Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement.
L.
Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement.
M.
Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or
permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will
not show in finished structure.
N.
Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or
by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure
units until the compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an
effect on the performance or appearance of the final product.
O.
Repair damaged architectural precast concrete units to meet acceptability requirements of PCI
MNL 117.
2.14
A.
After concrete
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
Fabricate precast architectural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed
edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product
tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.
1.
Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Exposed to View: As follows:
a.
10 feet (3 m) or under, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
b.
c.
d.
2.
Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Not Exposed to View: As
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
B.
10 feet (3 m) or under, plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
10 to 20 feet (3 to 6 m), plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 3/8 inch (10 mm).
20 to 40 feet (6 to 12 m), plus or minus 3/8 inch (10 mm).
Each additional 10 feet (3 m), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Total Thickness or Flange Thickness: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Rib Thickness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Rib to Edge of Flange: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Distance between Ribs: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of the Two Diagonal
Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 72 inches (3 mm per 2 m) or 1/2 inch (13
mm) total, whichever is greater.
Length and Width of Block-outs and Openings within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6
mm).
Location and Dimension of Block-outs Hidden from View and Used for HVAC and Utility
Penetrations: Plus or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Bowing: Plus or minus L/360, maximum 1 inch (25 mm).
Local Smoothness: 1/4 inch per 10 feet (6 mm per 3 m).
Variation between Adjacent Thin-Brick-Facing Products: 1/16 inch (2 mm).
Warping: 1/16 inch per 12 inches (1.5 mm per 300 mm) of distance from the nearest
adjacent corner.
Tipping and Flushness of Plates: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Dimensions of Architectural Features and Rustications: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on
Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
10 to 20 feet (3 to 6 m), plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), minus 3/16 inch (5 mm).
20 to 40 feet (6 to 12 m), plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Each additional 10 feet (3 m), plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches (75 mm).
Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Fabric: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) where position
has structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, plus or minus 1/2 inch (13
mm).
Reinforcing Steel Extending out of Member: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of plan
dimensions.
Tendons: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm), vertical; plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm),
horizontal.
Location of Opening within Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Electrical Outlets, Hose Bibs: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Allowable Rotation of Plate, Channel Inserts, Electrical Boxes: 2-degree rotation or 1/4
inch (6 mm) maximum over the full dimension of the unit.
Brick-Faced Architectural Precast Concrete Units: Restrict the following misalignments to 2
percent of number of bricks in a unit.
1.
Alignment of Mortar Joints:
a.
b.
Jog in Alignment: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Alignment with Panel Centerline: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2.
3.
4.
5.
Variation in Width of Exposed Mortar Joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Tipping of Individual Bricks from the Panel Plane of Exposed Brick Surface: Plus 1/16
inch (1.5 mm); minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) less than or equal to depth of form liner joint.
Exposed Brick Surface Parallel to Primary Control Surface of Panel: Plus 1/4 inch (6
mm); minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Individual Brick Step in Face from Panel Plane of Exposed Brick Surface: Plus 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm); minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) less than or equal to depth of form liner joint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Do not install precast concrete units until supporting concrete has attained minimum design
compressive strength.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting precast architectural
concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B.
Install precast architectural concrete. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to
maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected.
1.
2.
3.
Install bearing pads as precast concrete units are being erected.
Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
Remove projecting hoisting devices and use grout to fill voids within recessed hoisting
devices flush with surface of concrete.
C.
Anchor precast architectural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
otherwise indicated. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after
anchoring and grouting are completed.
D.
Welding: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4, with qualified welders.
1.
2.
3.
Protect precast architectural concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field
welding or cutting operations and provide noncombustible shields as required.
Repair damaged steel surfaces by cleaning and applying a coat of galvanizing repair
paint to galvanized surfaces.
Repair damaged steel surfaces by cleaning and repriming damaged painted surfaces.
E.
At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of
nuts.
F.
Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place
until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are
completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete
surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove
grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.
3.3
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without
exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.
B.
Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the
following noncumulative erection tolerances.
1.
2.
3.
Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Plan Location from Centerline of Steel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Support Elevation from Nominal Support Elevation: As follows:
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
3.4
Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Nonexposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Nonexposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Maximum Low: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Maximum High: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 100 Feet (30 m): 1
inch (25 mm).
Plumb in Any 10 Feet (3 m) of Element Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Joint Width (Governs over Joint Taper): Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Maximum Joint Taper: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
Joint Taper in 10 Feet (3 m): 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Differential Bowing or Camber, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design:
1/4 inch (6 mm).
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections.
B.
Field welds and connections using high-strength bolts will be subject to tests and inspections.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS
A.
Repair exposed exterior surfaces of precast architectural concrete units to match color, texture,
and uniformity of surrounding precast architectural concrete if permitted by Architect.
1.
B.
3.6
Repair thin brick facings on precast architectural concrete units in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Repair shall be invisible from 5’.
Remove and replace damaged precast architectural concrete units if repairs do not comply with
requirements.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection to remove weld marks, other
markings, dirt, and stains.
1.
2.
Wash and rinse according to precast concrete fabricator's written recommendations.
Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of
exposed concrete finishes.
END OF SECTION 03450
SECTION 03542 - HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes hydraulic-cement-based underlayment for use below interior floor
coverings.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 9 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of underlayment
based on survey of substrate conditions.
C.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering
system certifying that products are compatible.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of
underlayment products required for this Project.
B.
Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certify in
writing that products are compatible.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting
underlayment performance.
1.
1.7
Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor covering products, including
adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A.
Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in minimum uniform thicknesses of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to
match adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined by ASTM C 219.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
C.
Reinforcement: Provide galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement
recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
D.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil,
and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
1.
C.
3.3
Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
B.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C.
Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
1.
Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D.
Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
during application and curing processes.
E.
Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing
by underlayment manufacturer.
F.
Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4
Prevent contamination
PROTECTION
A.
Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 03542
SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Cast stone trim.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1.3
Window sills.
Lintels.
Surrounds.
Coping.
Wall caps.
Belt courses.
Water tables.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those
indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
1.
Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute. or has on file and
follows a written quality-control plan approved by Architect that includes all elements of
the Cast Stone Institute's "Quality Control Procedures Required for Plant Inspection."
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications:
An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C.
Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source
or producer for each aggregate.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need for on-site
storage and to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1.
2.
Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.
Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers.
Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under
covers to prevent condensation.
C.
Store installation materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
D.
Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination can be avoided.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.
B.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but not less than 7 days
after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CAST STONE MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:
B.
Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as
needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone
colors.
C.
Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
D.
Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specified or approved in writing by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by
mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and
other admixtures used.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M. Use galvanized or
epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material.
1.
2.
F.
2.2
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M.
Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.
Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
CAST STONE UNITS
A.
Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast
method.
1.
B.
Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all
exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.
Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.
Fabrication Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory
testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364, or are
made from cast stone that has a history of successful resistance to freezing and thawing.
Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch.
Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the
length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch.
Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is
greater.
Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not
vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8
inch on unformed surfaces.
Cure units by one of the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F or above and
95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours.
Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100
percent relative humidity for 24 hours.
Cure units to comply with one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Not less than 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above.
Not less than 6 days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above.
Not less than 7 days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above.
Not less than 8 days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.
Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.
F.
Colors and Textures: Custom color #7395 with a medium acid wash; Seaboard Concrete (804)
275-0802. Color has been preselected by Owner to match adjacent project.
2.3
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Provide mortar materials that comply with Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."
B.
Water: Potable.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Anchors:
Type and size indicated, fabricated from stainless steel complying with
ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
B.
Dowels: Round stainless-steel bars complying with ASTM A 276, Type 304, and 1/2-inch
diameter.
2.5
MORTAR MIXES
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for mortar mixes.
2.6
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Employ an independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to
ASTM C 1364.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR
A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry
Assemblies."
B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges
and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
1.
Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or as necessary to
secure units in place.
C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar.
D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If not indicated, set units with joints ¼ to 3/8 inch wide.
Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set.
Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.
Fill collar joints solid as units are set.
Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.
Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to
receive sealant.
Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.
7.
E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.
Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
1.
Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch.
G. Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to
comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.”
1.
3.3
Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints
before applying sealant, unless otherwise indicated.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
maximum.
B.
Variation from Level:
maximum.
C.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or onefourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D.
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with
adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch,
except due to warpage of units within tolerances specified.
3.4
Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved
Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.
B.
Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying
with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.
1.
2.
D.
Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows:
1.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
2.
hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with
cleaning of cast stone.
END OF SECTION 04720
SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Division 2 Section "Unit Pavers" for exterior unit masonry paving.
Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face of
backup wythes of cavity walls.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at openings in
masonry walls.
Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems at heads
of masonry walls.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit
masonry.
Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for wall vents (brick vents).
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1.
2.
D.
Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
Calcium silicate masonry units (CSMUs).
Concrete brick.
Face brick.
Building (common) brick.
Mortar and grout.
Reinforcing steel.
Masonry joint reinforcement.
Ties and anchors.
Embedded flashing.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
Cavity-wall insulation.
Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame,
installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Cast-stone trim, furnished under Division 4 Section "Cast Stone."
Steel lintels shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal
Fabrications."
Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at
28 days.
B.
Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive
strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Calcium silicate masonry units, in the form of small-scale units.
Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.
Weep holes/vents.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
Exposed concrete masonry units.
Calcium silicate masonry units.
Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.
Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used
on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.
Weep holes/vents.
Accessories embedded in masonry.
List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers,
source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix
proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.
1.
Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup
constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations
are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.
F.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
G.
Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with
requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.
Provide for each type and size of the following:
1.
Masonry units.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances.
For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to
ASTM C 67.
For surface-coated brick, include material test report for durability of surface
appearance after 50-cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67.
For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
Reinforcing bars.
Joint reinforcement.
Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1.
2.
Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification.
Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
I.
Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type
and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,
mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to
Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
J.
Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be
used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
B.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
C.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by
Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 67.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019.
D.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Mockups:
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 96 inches long by 72 inches
high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.
Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of
mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities
of workmanship.
a.
F.
1.7
Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in exterior wall mockup.
Include lower corner of window opening framed with cast stone trim at upper
corner of exterior wall mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16
inches high.
Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall
mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length
of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).
Include metal studs, sheathing, veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in
exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved
by Architect in writing.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1.
2.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold
cover in place.
B.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 36 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.
E.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days
after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will
impair the quality of completed masonry.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi.
Weight Classification: Lightweight, unless otherwise indicated.
Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's
sample.
Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
Provide bullnose units for exposed outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2500 psi.
Weight Classification: Lightweight.
Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.
CALCIUM SILICATE MASONRY UNITS (CSMU)
A.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
RockCast, Division of Reading Rock, Inc.
Arriscraft International; “Renaissance Masonry Units”.
B.
Unit Compressive Strength:
strength of 8500 psi.
C.
Absorption: 8.8 percent.
D.
Size and Finish:
1.
2.
Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
11 5/8-inches by 23 5/8-inches, smooth finish.
3 5/8-inches by 23 5/8-inches, smooth finish.
E.
Colors: Adobe.
F.
Acceptable Substitutions: Limestone (ASTM C568).
2.4
CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A.
General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying with
requirements below.
B.
Concrete Lintels: Precast units made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color,
texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support
loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method used for concrete masonry units.
C.
Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete
masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure
precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until
cured.
2.5
BRICK
A.
General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate
special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes,
and lintels.
Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result
in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 4400 psi .
Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C
67.
Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall
withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable
difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet.
Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.
Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.
provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing adjacent brickwork.
a.
C.
Basis of Design: Design is based on Taylor Clay Products Company line of
standard brick; Color – Taylor #1-17D Red, Smooth Ironspot.
Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C 62, Grade SW.
1.
2.
2.6
Size: Match size of face brick.
Application: Use where brick is indicated for concealed locations. Face brick complying
with requirements for grade, compressive strength, and size indicated for building brick
may be substituted for building brick.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D.
Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime and mortar
pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1.
2.
3.
Formulate blend as required to produce color matching approved sample panel for Phase
I - Parking Deck.
Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
Products:
a.
Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom
Color.
Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond.
Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1.
2.
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 sieve.
F.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
G.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
H.
Water: Potable.
2.7
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
1.
2.
Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.
Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.
Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
C.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
D.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:
1.
2.8
Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face
shell of backing wythe and with separate ties that extend into facing wythe. Ties have
two hooks that engage eyes or slots in reinforcement and resist movement perpendicular
to wall. Ties extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover
on outside face.
TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class
B-2 coating.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Stainless Steel bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM a 666, Type 304.
B.
Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90
degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.
C.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1.
2.
3.
Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.
Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of
masonry face, made from 0.188-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete
and attached to tie section; formed from 0.053-inch thick, steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication.
D.
Partition Top anchors: 0.097-inch thick metal plate with 3/8-inch diameter metal rod 6 inches
long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in
and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
E.
Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long,
with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
F.
Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, cramps, and other stone anchors from stainless steel.
G.
Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors
1.
General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to
metal studs, and as follows:
a.
2.
Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
a.
b.
2.9
Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in
both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of
0.05 inch.
Anchor Section: Zinc-alloy barrel section with flanged head with eye and
corrosion-resistant, self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive wire tie and to
serve as head for drilling fastener into framing. Barrel length to suit sheathing and
insulation thickness, allowing screw to seat directly against framing with flanged
head covering hole in sheathing and insulation.
Wire Ties: Triangular wire ties fabricated from 0.188-inch diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.
MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A.
Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
B.
Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated,
fabricated from 0.034-inch, galvanized steel sheet.
C.
Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with
ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
D.
Post-installed Anchors: Provide chemical anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and
equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.10
A.
Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type
304 or 316, for anchors.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated, complying with SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” and as follows:
1.
2.
6.
7.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not
exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal
flashing.
Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into
wall and ½ inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and
hemmed.
Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches
(75 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal
back on itself for ¾ inch (19mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for
8.
B.
retaining sealant backer rod.
Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet coated with flexible
asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
AFCO Products, Inc.; Cop-A-Cote.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Coat Flashing.
Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Coated Copper Flashing.
York Manufacturing, Inc.; Copperseal.
C.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
D.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to
each other and to substrates.
2.11
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.
B.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D.
Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by 4
inches long.
Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches
long.
Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than
depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
a.
E.
Available Products:
1.
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.
2.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.
3.
Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.
4.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.
5.
Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.
Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.
1.
Provide one of the following configurations:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar BreakMortar Break II.
Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.
Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four
loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.12
Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7
inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings.
Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches thick and 10 inches wide, with dimpled surface
designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged
with mortar.
Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.
Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.
CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation with Increased R-Value: ASTM C 578, Type IV, but with
an aged thermal resistance (R-value) for 1-inch thickness of 5.6 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg
F at 5 years; closed-cell product with a carbon-black filler and extruded with an integral skin.
B.
Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.
2.13
A.
MASONRY CLEANERS
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use
by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.14
A.
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
EaCo Chem, Inc.
ProSoCo, Inc.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.
1.
2.
E.
2.
A.
Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1.
2.15
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
For reinforced masonry and load bearing walls, use Type S.
For mortar parge coats, use Type S.
For exterior, above-grade, non-load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions;
and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C
143M.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control
testing indicated below:
1.
2.
Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
B.
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 67.
C.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
2.
3.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B.
Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
D.
E.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1.
Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F.
Matching existing masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of Phase I - Parking
Deck masonry.
G.
Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per
minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet
at time of laying.
H.
Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint
thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch.
For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for
warpage of units.
For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
3.3
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
C.
Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with
less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
E.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells
of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to
provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors
48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
4.
footings.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C.
Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and
similar holes.
1.
2.
Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
D.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
COMPOSITE MASONRY
A.
Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:
1.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a.
b.
Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending
across both wythes.
Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
B.
Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units
of other wythe into place.
C.
Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, bond walls together as follows:
1.
2.
3.6
Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated Lshaped units as well as masonry bonding.
Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped
units; or
Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used with hollow masonry
units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
CAVITY WALLS
A.
Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a.
2.
Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.
B.
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove
mortar fins protruding into cavity.
C.
Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."
D.
Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches
o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for
this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in
cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry
or other construction as shown.
1.
3.7
Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and
masonry.
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
1.
2.
3.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.
Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches beyond openings.
a.
Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.8
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A.
Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing
wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed
joints align.
Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structure.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches
o.c. horizontally.
ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A.
Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.10
Fasten screw-attached anchors through insulation and sheathing to wall framing with
metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one
fastener.
Embed tie sections and connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints.
Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of
sheathing, unless indicated otherwise.
Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches
o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install
additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches,
around perimeter.
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for inplane wall or partition movement.
B.
Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
A.
Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction
of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if
any.
Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.
Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.
Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch
for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by inserting a compressible filler of width required
for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less
than 3/8 inch.
1.
3.11
Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side
of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.
Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is
complete for application of sealant.
Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.
LINTELS
Install steel lintels where indicated.
B.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size
units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting
lintels.
C.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.12
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A.
General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf
angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.
B.
Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe,
turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the
interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring
or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up
approximately 2 inches on interior face.
At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind
veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building
paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches.
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2
inches to form end dams.
Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric
sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for application
indicated.
Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking
hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying
with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top
of metal flashing termination.
C.
Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
D.
Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking
down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing 16 inches o.c.
E.
Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
F.
Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent
products to form vents.
1.
3.13
A.
Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install
through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1.
2.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1.
2.
3.14
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform
inspections.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
C.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
D.
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67.
E.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
F.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for
mortar air content and compressive strength.
G.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
3.15
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.16
A.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.
Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04810
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
4.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
4.3
Structural steel.
Grout.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures
and administrative requirements.
Division 7 Section “Sprayed Fire-resistive Materials”.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads
indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1.
4.4
Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual
of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
Include embedment drawings.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Mill test reports.
E.
4.5
Source quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications:
A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel."
C.
Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.
2.
4.6
Conference shall include Contractor, Fabricator, Erector, Testing Agency, Architect and
Structural Engineer of Record.
Conference shall be held at least two weeks prior to start of erection.
FABRICATION
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
5.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B.
Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
E.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
F.
Headed Studs for Composite Beams: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud
type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
5.2
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) and ASTM A 490
(ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy
hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
B.
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.3
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
GROUT
A.
5.4
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
FABRICATION - GENERAL
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."
B.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including
tolerance limits, of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for
structural steel identified as architecturally exposed steel.
1.
2.
Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes includign
pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.
Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating, and shop priming.
Provide architecturally exposed structural steel at exterior sunscreens (SS-1, SS-2 and SS-3),
at ornamental grills and at exterior structural steel framed guardrails at raised outdoor seating
area along Cary Street.
C.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
D.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
E.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
F.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of
other work through steel framing members.
1.
2.
3.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
5.5
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
B.
5.6
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
GALVANIZING
A.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.
1.
2.
Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in
exterior walls.
Re-straighten lintels and shelf angles after galvanizing.
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1
ERECTION
A.
Examination: Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of
anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance
with requirements.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."
C.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface
of base and bearing plates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate before packing with grout.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no
voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
D.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
E.
Do not use thermal cutting equipment during erection. Do not enlarge unfair holes by burning or
using drift pins; ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
6.2
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
6.3
Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless pretensioned or slip-critical is indicated.
Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design"
for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on
surfaces adjacent to field welds.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B.
Bolted Connections:
Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the
following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 05120
SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS
PART 7 - GENERAL
7.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
7.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
7.3
K-series steel joists.
KCS-type K-series steel joists.
Joist accessories.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing bearing plates in unit
masonry.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SJI "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B.
Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support
nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's
"Specifications."
7.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design
loads indicated.
B.
Design special joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the
following:
1.
7.5
Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span for total load.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists.
Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and
connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
1.
2.
Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.
Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Manufacturer Certificates:
requirements.
E.
Mill Certificates: Signed by bolt manufacturers certifying that bolts comply with requirements.
F.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
G.
Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
H.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For joists.
7.6
Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying
with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications."
1.
Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for
designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.
B.
SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are
applicable to types of joists indicated.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
7.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
B.
Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
7.8
SEQUENCING
A.
Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast-in-place concrete and masonry construction.
PART 8 - PRODUCTS
8.1
MATERIALS
A.
Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.
B.
Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat,
unhardened steel washers.
1.
D.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
E.
8.2
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
PRIMERS
A.
8.3
Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance
requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A.
Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web
Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord
members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
1.
Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.
B.
Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel
Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.
C.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds,
and methods used in correcting welding work.
D.
Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
E.
Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions
where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
F.
Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where
indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
G.
Do not camber joists.
H.
Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications."
I.
8.4
Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist
slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48).
JOIST ACCESSORIES
A.
Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of
material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing,
and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
B.
Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications."
Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
C.
Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional
erection bridging if required for stability.
D.
Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated. Do
not paint.
E.
Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal
Fabrications."
F.
Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit
of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of
finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist installation.
8.5
CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A.
Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists
and accessories by power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B.
Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
C.
Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous,
dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick.
D.
Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
PART 9 - EXECUTION
9.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
9.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B.
Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations,
and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction.
Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads
have been applied.
C.
Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding
sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and
procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
D.
Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts.
E.
Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for highstrength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
F.
Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or
beams.
9.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and
prepare test and inspection reports.
B.
Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the
following procedures, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.
Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
D.
Bolted connections will be visually inspected.
E.
High-strength, field-bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts."
F.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in
compliance with specified requirements.
G.
9.4
Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified
requirements.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists abutting structural steel,
and accessories.
1.
2.
Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning,
SSPC-SP 3.
Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
C.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
D.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05210
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK
PART 10 - GENERAL
10.1
A.
10.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
10.3
Roof deck.
Composite floor deck.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill and lightweight structural
concrete topping.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous
steel shapes.
Division 9 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
C.
Product certificates.
D.
Welding certificates.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:
1.
10.4
Mechanical fasteners.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding
Code - Sheet Steel."
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to
those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
C.
10.5
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to
AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B.
Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage.
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
Protect with a
PART 11 - PRODUCTS
11.1
A.
ROOF DECK
Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
11.2
A.
COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK
Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs
and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite
Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
11.3
A.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),
G60 (Z180) zinc coating.
Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib Type.
Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch (0.75 mm)(22 gage).
Side Laps: Overlapped.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),
G60 (Z180) zinc coating.
Profile Depth: 3 inches (76 mm).
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0474 inch (1.20 mm).
Span Condition: Double span.
ACCESSORIES
General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B.
Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically
driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C.
Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel
screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.
D.
Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same
material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
PART 12 - EXECUTION
12.1
A.
12.2
EXAMINATION
Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B.
Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.
C.
Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D.
Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
E.
Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F.
Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to decking.
G.
Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of decking, and support of other work.
H.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
I.
Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck.
fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
12.3
A.
Locate mechanical
ROOF DECK INSTALLATION
Fasten roof deck panels to steel joist by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter
indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
long, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches (450
mm), and as follows:
1.
C.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal.
Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per
deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated.
Fasten deck panels to sloping roof and cold-formed trusses with No. 12 self-drilling or
larger carbon steel screws.
Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger carbon-steel
screws.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
1.
End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.
D.
Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof decking and weld
flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least 1
weld at each corner.
E.
Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates,
end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
F.
Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated.
Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete
closure.
12.4
A.
FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION
Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches (910
mm), and as follows:
1.
C.
Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) long welds.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
1.
D.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal.
Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an
average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, but not more than 18 inches (457 mm) apart.
End Joints: Lapped.
Shear Connectors: Weld shear connectors through deck to supporting frame according to
AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Butt end joints of deck panels; do not
overlap. Remove and discard arc shields after welding shear connectors.
E.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and
sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless
otherwise indicated.
12.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field qualitycontrol testing.
B.
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C.
Shear connector stud welds will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 for stud
welding and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Shear connector stud welds will be visually inspected.
Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal less than a full 360-degree flash
or welding repairs to any shear connector stud.
Tests will be conducted on additional shear connector studs if weld fracture occurs on
shear connector studs already tested according to AWS D1.1.
D.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
E.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
F.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
12.6
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of
deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces
of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.
1.
C.
Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of
deck exposed to view.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05310
SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 13 - GENERAL
13.1
A.
13.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
13.3
A.
Exterior load-bearing wall framing.
Interior load-bearing wall framing.
Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
Roof trusses.
Ceiling joist framing.
Shear walls.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud
framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing,
metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Design Loads: As indicated on the Drawings.
Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than those indicated on the Drawings.
Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or
overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and
anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature
change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as
follows:
a.
B.
Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed
Steel Framing - General Provisions."
1.
Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header
Design."
2.
3.
13.4
Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection
without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Truss Design."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging,
splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
1.
For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data and connection designs signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer who is registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia and is responsible for their
preparation.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer and for the testing agency.
E.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that
each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
for current products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
F.
13.5
Steel sheet.
Expansion anchors.
Power-actuated anchors.
Mechanical fasteners.
Vertical deflection clips.
Horizontal drift deflection clips
Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
Shear wall framing.
Epoxy anchors.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other
structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.
D.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating
steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile
strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.
E.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
F.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing
identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions."
1.
2.
Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."
Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
H.
Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and
Two Family Dwellings."
I.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
13.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
delivery, storage, and handling.
B.
Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
condensation.
PART 14 - PRODUCTS
14.1
A.
14.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed
metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include manufacturers that meet the
requirements of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) or Sigma Studs from The
Steel Network, Inc.
MATERIALS
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Grade: ST50H (ST340H).
Coating: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZ150), or GF30 (ZGF90).
Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc
coated, of grade and coating as follows:
1.
2.
14.3
A.
LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
A.
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Flange Width: As indicated on the Drawings.
Section Properties: Comply with Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Top Flange Width: As indicated on the Drawings.
Section Properties: Comply with Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
1.
2.
3.
B.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Minimum Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
Section Properties: Comply with Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
Steel Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header beams, of
web depths indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
14.4
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header
beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Section Properties: Comply with Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Grade: 50 (340), Class 1 or 2.
Coating: G90 (Z275).
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and
downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to
stud web.
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include manufacturers that meet the
requirements of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
D.
Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched,
with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,
with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary
structure, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include manufacturers that meet the
requirements of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm).
Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
1.
Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges
designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary
structure, and as follows:
a.
b.
2.
Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
a.
b.
F.
14.5
A.
14.6
A.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Flange Width: 2 inches (50 mm).
Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from
upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.
SHEAR WALLS
Light gage straps on both sides of the wall to provide shear resistance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm).
Strap loads and locations are shown on the Drawings.
Straps: ASTM A 1003/A Fy = 50 ksi.
Connection Bolts: ASTM A 325.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 1554 (Fy = 36 ksi).
Strap Connecting Boot: ASTM A572 Grade 50 (Fy = 50 ksi).
Provide straps and shear wall studs that fit within the designated stud dimensions.
ROOF TRUSSES
Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard-shape steel sections.
1.
2.
3.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm), minimum.
Section Properties: Comply with Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) and
design requirements.
14.7
A.
ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING
Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
14.8
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gage (0.0428 inch) (1.09 mm) (43 mils).
Flange Width: As indicated on the Drawings.
Section Properties: Comply with Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA).
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade,
Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated and that meet the project design requirements as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
14.9
Supplementary framing.
Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
Web stiffeners.
Anchor clips.
End clips.
Foundation clips.
Gusset plates.
Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.
Joist hangers and end closures.
Hole reinforcing plates.
Backer plates.
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A.
Steel Shapes and Clips:
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts, with encased
end threaded, and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip
process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
C.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
E.
Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel
drill screws.
1.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
F.
Epoxy Anchors: Adhesive consisting of methacrylate resin, hardener, cement and water.
Anchor rod shall meet the requirements of AISI 304 or AISI 316 stainless steel ASTM F – 593
(CW).
G.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
14.10
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.
Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for
placement and hydration.
C.
Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout:
Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency
and 30-minute working time.
D.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.
E.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
14.11
A.
FABRICATION
Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch
fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not
permitted.
a.
b.
4.
Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw
fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
2.
Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
PART 15 - EXECUTION
15.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
15.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary
framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
B.
After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as
needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fireresistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect
remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
C.
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and
the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface
on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
D.
Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
15.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B.
Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C.
Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
1.
D.
Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush,
even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between
fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1.
2.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch
fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a.
b.
Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and
complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
F.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
G.
Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
H.
Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing
members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard
punched openings.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1.
15.4
A.
LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and
securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:
1.
B.
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings.
Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm)
between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to
top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:
1.
Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar configurations.
D.
Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot
be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
E.
Align floor and roof framing over studs.
reinforce track to transfer loads.
F.
Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting
structure as indicated.
Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously
G.
Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as
indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to
supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.
1.
2.
H.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support
fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring
attachment to framing.
1.
I.
Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated
on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.
Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to
jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall
studs.
If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written
recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load
resulting from item supported.
Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 60 inches. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched
studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members
up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep.
Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
Bridging:
Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Provide x-bridging to top and bottom tracks at spacing required by bridging type and stud
loads.
J.
Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to
reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and
anchor to structure in accordance with shear wall designs on the Drawings.
K.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners,
clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wallframing system.
15.5
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B.
Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs
as follows:
1.
Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm).
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D.
Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
loads while providing lateral support.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.
Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure.
Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not
more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1.
Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12
inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet
straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and
thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to
stud webs or flanges.
a.
2.
3.
4.
F.
15.6
Install solid blocking at 60-inch centers.
Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched
studs.
Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
Bridging:
Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip
angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable
wall-framing system.
TRUSS INSTALLATION
A.
Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to Shop Drawings and requirements in this Section.
B.
Truss Spacing: 48 inches (1220 mm).
C.
Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses.
D.
Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately
position at spacings indicated.
E.
Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections.
F.
Align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer
loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points.
G.
Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and
designed according to LGSEA's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide for Permanent Bracing of
Cold-Formed Steel Trusses."
15.7
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
15.8
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05400
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1.
2.
C.
Steel framing and supports for floor and ceiling supported toilet compartments.
Steel framing and supports for overhead doors.
Steel framing and supports for countertops.
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
Elevator machine beams, hoist beams.
Support angles for elevator door sills.
Shelf angles.
Loose bearing and leveling plates.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections.
Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings and loading-dock edge angles.
Metal ladders.
Prefabricated metal ladders.
Metal ships' ladders.
Metal bollards.
Cast-iron wheel guards.
Metal downspout boots.
Loose steel lintels.
Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into
concrete or built into unit masonry.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,
wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts,
and other items indicated to be built into unit masonry.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs."
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors.
Division 14 Section "Hydraulic Elevators" for elevator pit ladders and support angles for
elevator door sills.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and
other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
1.4
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
Metal ship's ladders.
Metal nosings and treads.
Prefabricated metal ladders.
Grout.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
2.
3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing.
D.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
E.
Welding certificates.
F.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
1.7
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
B.
Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are
specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project
site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
D.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate:
ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
F.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
G.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is
indicated or required by structural loads.
H.
Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by
structural loads.
2.3
NONFERROUS METALS
A.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
from
plate
complying
with
C.
2.4
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at
exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for
type, grade, and class required.
B.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy
Group 1 .
D.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1.
Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
G.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
H.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
I.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
J.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal
to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
K.
Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.
Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying
with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
C.
Zinc-Rich Primer:
topcoat.
1.
Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
E.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
G.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1.
J.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and
24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including
tolerance limits, of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for
structural steel identified as architecturally exposed steel.
1.
2.
Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including
pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.
Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating, and shop priming.
Provide architecturally exposed structural steel at exterior sunscreens (SS-1, SS-2 and SS-3),
at ornamental grills and at exterior structural steel framed guardrails at raised outdoor seating
area along Cary Street.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1.
2.8
Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.
C.
Fabricate supports for ceiling supported toilet partitions from continuous steel angles with
attached anchoring plates, anchors, and braces.
D.
Fabricate supports for ceiling supported projectors and projection screens from continuous steel
angles with attached anchoring plates, anchors, and braces.
E.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
F.
Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer unless indicated otherwise.
G.
Fabricate supports for fire shutters and overhead coiling doors from continuous steel angles
with attached anchoring plates, anchors, and braces.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members
together to form a single unit where indicated.
B.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span
but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.9
SHELF ANGLES
A.
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6
inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
B.
2.10
Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A.
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B.
Galvanize plates after fabrication.
2.11
A.
2.12
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
with other work.
1.
C.
2.13
Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where
indicated.
METAL LADDERS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.14
A.
Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or
bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
Rungs: 3/4-inch diameter steel bars.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide
granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with
aluminum-oxide grout.
Galvanize exterior ladders and interior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
METAL SHIPS' LADDERS
Provide metal ships' ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel
or plate stringers, pipe and tube railings, and bar grating treads, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide brackets and fittings for installation.
1.
2.
Fabricate ships' ladders, including treads and railings from steel at interior locations and
aluminum at exterior, roof top locations.
Comply with applicable requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for railings.
B.
Prime interior steel ships' ladders, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners, with zincrich primer.
C.
Fabricate aluminum ship's ladders as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.15
A.
METAL BOLLARDS
Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. Fill bollards with concrete.
1.
B.
Treads: 6-inches wide by 1 3/4-inches deep by 24-inches long aluminum channel shaped
section with corrugated tread surface. Space treads equally. Connect treads to stringers
with bolts.
Stringers: 6-inches by 2-inches aluminum channel. Stringers shall be supported from
above the roof membrane level onto curbs and shall not be anchored or supported
through the roof membrane. Provide provisions for straddling expansion building
expansion joints at locations indicated.
Platform: Provide 24-inch wide platform at top of ship's ladder fabricated from 6-inch wide
by 2-inch deep aluminum treads with corrugated surfaces; platform length as indicated.
Handrail and Guardrail: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal
Stairs" for railings.
Cap bollards with rounded steel caps.
Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch thick steel plate welded to
bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of
bollard.
2.16
A.
2.17
A.
CAST-IRON WHEEL GUARDS
Provide wheel guards of 3/4-inch thick, hollow-core, gray-iron castings; of size and shape
indicated. Provide holes for countersunk anchor bolts and grouting.
METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS
Provide downspout boots made from cast gray iron in heights indicated with inlets of size and
shape to suit downspouts.
1.
2.18
Outlet: Vertical, to discharge into pipe.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.19
A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1.
2.
B.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1.
2.
C.
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPCSP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1.
2.20
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated,
free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
C.
Bright, Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
D.
2.21
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B.
As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
C.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating
0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
2.22
A.
PERFORATED STAINLESS STEEL SHEET
Provide 18 gauge perforated stainless steel sheet at Sunscreens SS-1 and SS-3. Provide
0.20-inch hole diameter at ½-inches on center in straight hole patterning.
1.
Basis of Design Product: McNichols Company, perforated stainless steel sheet; hole size
= 0.20”, hole centers = ½-inch, hole pattern = straight, gauge = 18, panel size 48 x 120,
open area = 16%, panel weight = 1.68 lbs/sf.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and
other connectors.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.2
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
3.3
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but,
if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1.
2.
3.4
Use nonmetallic nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A.
Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular
space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with
grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard.
B.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete.
1.
3.5
Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
INSTALLING CAST-IRON WHEEL GUARDS
A.
Anchor wheel guards to concrete or masonry construction to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Fill cores solidly with concrete.
3.6
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.
Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings not installed in metal
stairs.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" and Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall
Assemblies" for metal backing for anchoring railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).
Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm).
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to
loads specified above.
Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm),
whichever is less.
Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails:
a.
b.
c.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2.
Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
c.
3.
C.
1.4
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards:
a.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
b.
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads.".
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:
1.
B.
Paint Products.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for stairs and railings.
1.
1.5
Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B.
NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed
Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.
2.
Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.
Ornamental Stairs: Architectural class.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
1.6
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
B.
Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on
required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
C.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate:
ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
D.
Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25
(Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.
E.
Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet:
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30
(Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads.
from
plate
complying
with
2.4
FASTENERS
A.
General:
Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select
fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
E.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
F.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.5
Material for Anchors in Interior Locations:
comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
C.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
1.
Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.6
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and
platforms on supporting structure.
1.
2.
B.
Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas
on exposed surfaces.
D.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
E.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
F.
Weld connections to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
G.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
2.7
STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Alfab, Inc.
American Stair, Inc.
Sharon Companies Ltd. (The).
Stair Framing:
1.
Fabricate stringers of steel channels.
a.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as
needed to comply with performance requirements.
Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.
Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed
for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from
steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than
0.0677 inch (1.7 mm).
1.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
3.
2.8
Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be
concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.
Provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during
fabrication.
STEEL TUBE RAILINGS
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and
anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
1.
Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to
match guards. Provide with cam-type self-closing hinges for fastening to wall and
overlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction opposite
egress.
B.
Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at
connections, including at fittings.
C.
Form changes in direction of railings as follows:
1.
By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
D.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature
for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire
bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
components.
E.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
G.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other
work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.
1.
H.
2.9
Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated.
Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where
needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to
suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation
and overstressing of substrate.
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed products:
1.
D.
Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established
lines and levels and free of rack.
C.
Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete,
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
E.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
F.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
3.2
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete."
INSTALLING STEEL TUBE RAILINGS
A.
Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space
posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each
direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance
from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not
indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building
construction as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail
ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger
or lag bolts.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or
concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to
support structural loads.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 05511
SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
1.2
Steel pipe and tube railings.
Barrier gates at level of discharge.
See Division 9 Section “Exterior Painting” for field painting of galvanized steel railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
c.
3.
b.
c.
1.3
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards:
a.
B.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally.
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
For mechanically connected railings, grout, anchoring cement, and paint
Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Steel and Iron:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
2.2
Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated.
1.
Fasteners for Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized as
applicable to installation required. Zinc-plated fasteners are not acceptable.
B.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
C.
Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with
ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer
for exterior use.
D.
Level of Discharge Gate Hardware:
1.
2.
2.3
Gate Pivot/Closer Set: Rixon-Firemark 350 Pivot Closer with top pivot.
Magnetic Hold Open: Rixon-Firemark FM 996 Surface Mounted.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated.
B.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
C.
Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
D.
Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
E.
Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of member
throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
F.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
G.
Provide returns at all handrail ends.
H.
Shop-drill weep and vent holes prior to galvanizing. Consult with galvanizing applicator to
determine appropriate locations and sizes. Burned holes are not acceptable.
I.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors
to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Level of Discharge Gates: Fabricate as indicated on the drawings to match adjacent handrail
systems.
2.4
FINISHES
A.
Steel and Iron:
1.
2.
3.
Galvanized Railings: Hot-dip galvanize all railings, after fabrication, to comply with
ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves,
and other ferrous components.
Fill vent holes and finish to match adjacent areas. Do not fill weep holes.
Straighten rails as required after galvanizing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings.
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation.
1.
2.
Set railings
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5
mm in 3 m).
B.
Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular
space. Shape top of grout surface to drain water away from post.
C.
Adjusting and Cleaning:
1.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05521
SECTION 05522 – STRAND GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Steel strand and mesh vehicular and pedestrian guards.
B.
See Division 3 Section “Plant Precast Structural Concrete” for precast columns supporting the
steel strand pedestrian guards.
C.
See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for steel tube guard railings and handrails
associated with stairs.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
Design and engineer strand guards in coordination with the Precast Concrete Shop Drawings.
Strand guards shall be pulled from the precast columns on both sides of the lightwall for fall
protection through the openings in the precast.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide guards capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Infill of Pedestrian Guards:
a.
b.
2.
Vehicle Barriers:
a.
b.
B.
1.4
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Single load of 6,000 lbf (26.70 kN) applied horizontally in any direction to the
barrier system with anchorage or attachment capable of transferring this load to
the structure. Load shall be assumed to act at a minimum height of 18 inches (457
mm) above the floor or ramp surface on an area not to exceed one square foot
(305 sq. mm).
Vehicular load and guard loadings need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation, or certified test reports based on evaluation of
comprehensive tests of mock-up assemblies performed by a qualified testing agency,
according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 demonstrating compliance with requirements.
Coordinate cast-in sleeves and anchorages with structural precast concrete fabricator.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Strand: Zinc/Aluminum coated barrier strand, Grade 250.
1.
C.
Manufacturer: Bekaert North America Barrier Cable, with Benzinal coating, 0.50 inches
diameter, 38.2 Kip ultimate strength, 4.5 percent ultimate elongation.
Steel Wire (Chain Link) Fabric: Polymer-coated wire with a diameter of 0.148 inch (3.76 mm)
minimum.
1.
2.
3.
Mesh Size: 1-3/4 inches.
Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II.
Polymer Coating: ASTM D 668, Class 2a or 2b over metallic-coated steel wire.
a.
4.
2.2
Color: Black, complying with ASTM F 934.
Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated.
B.
Tie Wire: Coated to match wire fabric.
C.
Tension Wire: If required for top and bottom of wire fabric, coated to match wire fabric.
D.
Anchors: Provide cast-in-place chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488.
E.
Inorganic Zinc Primer: MPI #19 primer.
F.
Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with
ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer
for exterior use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install and post-tension vehicular barrier cable strand as required to deflect not more than 12
inches under loads indicated in accordance with the Post Tensioning Institute’s “Guide
Specification”.
Do not exceed 80-percent of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the
strand.
1.
Provide sections of vehicle barrier cable strand at locations indicated for future expansion
that may be removed without disturbing portions of system that will remain in place.
B.
Where required or indicated for pedestrian guard infill, Install steel wire fabric by wire-tying to
vehicle barrier strand.
C.
Adjusting and Cleaning:
1.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05521
SECTION 05700 - ORNAMENTAL METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Custom ornamental perforated steel screens.
Woven-wire mesh screens.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance of Ornamental Perforated Steel Screens: Provide railings capable of
withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated:
1.
1.3
Screens Acting as Guards: Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on
an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation.
fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
1.
C.
Indicate materials, finishes,
Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
Steel and Iron:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Tube Steel: ASTM A 500 cold rolled steel tube.
Perforated Metal: Steel, galvanized and powder coated, as follows:
a.
b.
c.
Galvanized Steel Sheet:
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, either
commercial steel or forming steel.
Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness 0.1196 inch (11 gage)
Diameter, Pattern and Free Area: As indicated on the Drawings.
5.
2.2
Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, square pattern, 1-3/4-inch woven-wire mesh,
made from 0.135-inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510
(ASTM A 510M), galvanized after fabrication.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel, powder actuated, with tamperproof heads for exposed
fasteners, such as Hilti Kwik X-CR.
B.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
C.
Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint
systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
D.
Sealant: Comply with Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for neutral-curing silicone sealant.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Form ornamental metal true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces.
Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.
B.
Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be
exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
C.
Fabricate ornamental screens from perforated steel sheet or plate of thickness, size, and
pattern indicated. Form perforations by punching, cutting, or drilling to produce openings of
sizes and shapes indicated. Roll, press, and grind perforated metal to flatten and to remove
burrs and deformations.
D.
Assemble screens in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Fabricate to drain water. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
E.
Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Clean exposed welded
of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
2.4
joints
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect mechanical finishes by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B.
Steel Finishes:
1.
Galvanizing – Steel and Iron: Hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
a.
2.
Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron hardware to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Powder-Coat Finish - Typical: Provide powder coated finish for steel components.
Prepare, treat, and coat metals to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Preparation of Galvanized Metal: Thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and
other foreign matter.
Treat prepared metal with metallic-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal
surfaces.
Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film
thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
Color: Match architect’s sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing to in-place
construction.
B.
Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. Fit exposed connections
accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, with uniform reveals and
spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Mechanically attach screens to tube steel framing.
C.
Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with
such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide
new units as required.
D.
Install concealed joint fillers and flashings as work progresses.
completely drain water.
E.
Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove
protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work.
END OF SECTION 05700
Install all components to
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
Utility shelving.
Plywood backing panels.
Division 6 Section "Sheathing."
DEFINITIONS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
B.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
3.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include
physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to
ASTM D 5664.
4.
5.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B.
Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.
C.
Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
D.
Research/Evaluation Reports:
effect for Project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
For the following, showing compliance with building code in
Wood-preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Power-driven fasteners.
Powder-actuated fasteners.
Expansion anchors.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1.
D.
Application: Treat all rough carpentry in exterior roofing, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.3
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber).
1.
2.
3.
Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic
spaces, and where indicated.
Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Application: Treat all rough carpentry, including plywood backing panels, in interior and exterior
applications, unless indicated otherwise..
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent
maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Blocking.
Rooftop curbs.
Cants.
Utility shelving.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
1.
Mixed southern pine, No. 1 grade; SPIB.
2.
D.
2.5
Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB,
or WWPA.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.6
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal
thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
E.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
2.7
Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5.
Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F
594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
B.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1.
Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space
clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
C.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
D.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1.
E.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1.
2.
F.
3.2
Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading.
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3
Recess bolts and nuts flush with
PROTECTION
A.
Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,
apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPAregistered label.
END OF SECTION 06100
SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Wall sheathing.
Building wrap.
Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry Miscellaneous Carpentry" for plywood backing
panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
B.
Research/Evaluation Reports:
effect for Project:
1.
1.4
For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing
according to referenced standards.
For the following, showing compliance with building code in
Building wrap.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation
around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL SHEATHING
A.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.
1.
2.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P
Gypsum Corporation.
Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
3.
B.
Cellulose Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, gypsum sheathing.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Fiberock Sheathing with
Aqua-Tough" by United States Gypsum Co.
Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
Size: 48 by 96 inches.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1.
For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C.
Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in
length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be
attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray
resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
1.
2.
2.3
For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C
1002.
For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C
954.
WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A.
0Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV
stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
B.
2.4
Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 200 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per
ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).
Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
Building-Wrap Tape:
Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Flexible Flashing:
Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to
produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.
B.
Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for
substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B.
Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's "Uniform Building Code."
Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's "BOCA National Building Code."
Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in SBCCI's "Standard Building Code."
Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings."
Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code."
D.
Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these
materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed assembly.
E.
Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
F.
Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
3.2
GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural
elements.
Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might
retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B.
Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into
facing.
C.
Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of
each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board
to each stud.
1.
Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from
edges and ends of boards.
3.3
WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION
A.
General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.4
Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansionor control-joint locations.
Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise
indicated.
Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape; provide manufacturers
standard self-adhering membrane flashing at entire perimeter of all rough openings.
FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.
Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure
that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
END OF SECTION 06160
SECTION 06201 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Exterior standing and running trim.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view and for structural wood decking and framing exposed to view.
Division 7 Section "Siding" for fiber-cement siding.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application
details.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of siding indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification:
1.
1.4
For each product, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished; 8 by 10 inches for panels.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack flat with
spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and
around stacks and under temporary coverings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied
without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B.
Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading, or otherwise
deteriorating beyond normal weathering.
1.
1.9
Warranty Period: 50 years for fiber cement trim and sheets and 15 years for
manufacturer provided finish from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that matches products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Furnish trim and sheets in a quantity equal to two percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A.
Fiber-Cement Standing and Running Trim: Fiber-Cement Standing and Running Trim made
from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186,
Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and
has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: James Hardie Siding Products; Hardiplank Trim and Sheets
with ColorPlus prefinished painted finish; ColorPlus Prefinished Sidin – JH20-30; Khaki
Brown.
Sizes: As indicated.
a. Texture: Smooth.
3.
4.
2.2
Factory Priming: Manufacturer’s standard acrylic primer.
Factory Finish: Manufacturer’s prefinished paint system.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not
less than 1-1/2 inches into substrate.
1.
2.
For face-fastening, provide hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel trim screws.
For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for
flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry.
C..
Sealants: As indicated in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1.
B.
Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish
carpentry.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Install to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where
necessary.
1.
2.
Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
C.
Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting
joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide
uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.
D.
Unless otherwise indicated, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face
fastening is unavoidable.
E.
Trim and sheets shall be fastened into a flat, solid substrate. Do not fasten trim and sheets into
hollow or uneven areas.
F.
Pre-drilling as required for large fasteners and if installation in being performed in low
temperatures.
G.
Sheets shall be glued to a substrate and mechanically fastened.
H.
Seal all joints such as window surrounds, long fascia runs, etc. with joint sealant.. Surfaces to
be sealed should be smooth, clean and have the manufacturer’s recommended spacing with
one another.
I.
Trim products shall be cut using carbide tipped blades.
J.
Use 2 fasteners per every framing member for trimboard applications; trimboards over 12" or
wider, as well as sheets will require additional fasteners; fasteners must be installed no more
than 2" from the end of each board.
K.
Joints between pieces of trim shall be sealed with joint sealant to eliminate joint separation.
Gaps on a long run of trim shall allow expansion and contraction at ends of the run and be
sealed with joint sealant.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
CLEANING
A.
3.7
Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factoryapplied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B.
Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 06201
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Interior standing and running trim.
Interior frames and jambs.
Flush wood paneling.
Plastic-laminate cabinets.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
Synthetic (man-made) Marble
Closet and utility shelving.
Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated cabinet hardware and accessories.
B.
Product Data: For panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding
plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing
materials and processes.
1.
C.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other
items installed in architectural woodwork.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Shop-applied transparent finishes.
Plastic laminates.
Solid-surfacing materials.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for
each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparentfinished woodwork.
Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches , for each
species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.
Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.
Corner pieces as follows:
a.
Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces,
18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
F.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
G.
Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
C.
Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for
production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and
transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork.
D.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated,
provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined
by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be
concealed from view after installation.
F.
Mockups:
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
G.
1.6
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
2.
1.8
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Quartered Maple.
C.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
D.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
1.
Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with
exposed or semi-exposed edges.
F.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
G.
Solid-Surfacing Material:
ISSFA-2.
1.
2.2
Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from
untreated materials.
Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.
Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment
type:
1.
2.
3.
Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and
drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from
drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated
woodwork.
Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
2.3
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets.
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type):
opening, self-closing.
C.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
D.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
E.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
1.
2.
3.
4.
BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of
Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches
wide.
Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches
wide.
Keyboard Slides: Grade 1; for computer keyboard shelves.
F.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
G.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
H.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch
grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1.
I.
2.4
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett
& Company, Inc.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA
A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
J.
OD, black, molded-plastic
Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1.
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
2.5
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
B.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
indicated for the following:
1.
2.
C.
2.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will
be complete.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting.
Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1.
2.6
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or
Less: 1/16 inch.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
D.
Ease edges to radius
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: Maple, quartered.
C.
For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
E.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
F.
Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for
field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
G.
Base Profile: AWI BAS-1024.
2.7
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
C.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
E.
Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for
field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
F.
Base Profile: AWI BAS-1024.
2.8
INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: Maple, quartered.
C.
For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
2.9
FLUSH WOOD PANELING
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: Maple, quartered.
1.
Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood
(except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain
and color of veneered panels.
C.
Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match.
D.
Panel-Matching Method: Match panels within each separate area by the following method:
1.
Sequence-matched, uniform-size sets as indicated.
E.
Vertical Panel-Matching Method: Continuous match; veneer leaves of upper panels are
continuations of veneer leaves of lower panels.
F.
Provide fire-retardant panel as base for veneer.
2.10
WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH (FRONT DESK)
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame.
C.
Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch .
D.
Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Maple, quartered.
1.
2.
E.
Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
2.11
Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed
surfaces, stained to match.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for
exposed surfaces.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame.
C.
Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch .
D.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
Edges: Grade HGS.
Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces:
1.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness,
matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish or PVC T-mold matching laminate in
color, pattern, and finish.
For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
F.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL.
G.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.
H.
2.12
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers, unless located directly under tops.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP.
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated in Section 00871 Design Selection Summary
D.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
E.
Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood.
F.
Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood.
G.
Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.
2.13
SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch .
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solidsurfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1.
D.
As indicated in Section 00871 Design Selection Summary.
Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material
manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1.
2.
Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.
Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.
E.
Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.
F.
Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.
2.14
A.
SYNTHETIC (MAN-MADE) MARBLE
Provide synthetic marble products of sizes and configurations indicated, in compliance with
appropriate codes, and possessing the following physical and technical characteristics:.
1.
All products shall have a satin or matte finish on all exposed surfaces.
a.
2.
Slick, glossy gel-coat finishes will not be accepted.
All products must be provided in accordance with the following reference standards:
a.
ANSI Z-124.3, with regard to workmanship, finish quality, structural integrity, stain
resistance, abrasion resistance, chemical resistance, and cigarette/flame
b.
resistance.
ANSI D-2565-79, with regard to colorfastness.
B.
Provide, where indicated on the drawings, synthetic marble products as listed in Section 00871
"Design Selection Summary".
C.
Vanity Countertops: Provide where indicated in accordance with the criteria specified herein.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.15
Vanity countertops shall have manufacturer's dripless edge profile to prevent splashed
water from dripping from vanity surface and damaging flooring materials adjacent to the
vanity top.
Vanity countertops shall have factory-drilled holes for faucets in the location and of the
configuration required to accommodate fixtures specified on the drawings and in the
specifications.
Vanity countertops shall have integral undermount bowl.
Vanity countertop shall have 4 inch high integral (covered) backsplash as measured from
the top surface of the vanity countertop.
Color shall be as indicated in Section 00871 "Design Selection Summary".
Vanity countertop shall be minimum of 3/4 inch in thickness.
Vanity countertop units shall include 4 inch tall by 1/2 inch thick end splashes at all vanity
countertop ends that are adjacent to wall surfaces.
Vanity countertop units shall include finished, dripless edge ends, as delineated above, at
all vanity countertop ends that are not adjacent to wall surfaces.
CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Shelf Material: 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panel with solid-lumber edge.
C.
Cleats: 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panel.
2.16
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B.
General: Shop finish transparent-finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as
specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 painting Sections for finishing opaque-finished
architectural woodwork.
C.
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
D.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces.
Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
panels.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
Grade: Premium.
AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish.
3.
4.
5.
Staining: ST-1.
Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
F.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary.
Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
Install wall railings on metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not
use face fastening, unless covered by trim.
1.
Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8
inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane.
I.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
2.
J.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal
framing behind wall finish.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from
a straight line.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls
with adhesive.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
K.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
L.
Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to
be shop finished.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06402
SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
Division 7 Section " Bentonite Geotextile Waterproofing" for waterproofing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
B.
Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source
from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A.
Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
B.
Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
C.
Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
D.
2.2
VOC Content: 0.25 lb/gal. or less.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
B.
Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended by
dampproofing manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
3.2
Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.
PREPARATION
A.
Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being
stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering
and clogging weep holes and drains.
B.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and
apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
C.
Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.
3.3
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve
coverages indicated.
Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure as recommended by manufacturer before
applying subsequent coats.
Allow 48 hours drying time prior to backfilling.
Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building
interior.
1.
Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a
minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.
2.
3.
C.
Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of
exterior masonry cavity walls.
1.
2.
3.4
Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces
exposed to view when Project is completed.
Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes
in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an
8-inch wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing.
Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties,
and other items that penetrate inner wythe.
Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that
interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting
veneer.
COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A.
On Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply 2 brush or spray
coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat, 1
fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft., or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4
gal./100 sq. ft..
B.
On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 2 brush or spray coats at not less
than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat, primer and 1 fibered
brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft., or primer and 1 trowel coat at not less
than 5 gal./100 sq. ft..
C.
On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 1 trowel coat at not less than 5
gal./100 sq. ft..
D.
On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not
less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft..
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 07115
SECTION 07170 - BENTONITE GEOTEXTILE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes composite geotextile-HDPE/bentonite membrane waterproofing. Provide
Bentonite waterproofing and prefabricated drainage composite system to prevent the passage
of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure and install without defects, damage or failure.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating and backfilling.
Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for subsurface drainage systems.
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for forms and for concrete placement.
Division 3 Section "Bentonite Waterstop" for waterstops to be used in conjunction with
waterproofing system.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
System Description:
1.
B.
Provide bentonite waterproofing and prefabricated drainage composite system to prevent
the passage of liquid water under hydrostatic pressure and install without defects,
damage or failure. Waterproofing shall be two high strength geotextiles interlocked
encapsulating minimum 1.10 pounds per square foot granular Volclay sodium bentonite
with a HDPE sheet integrally bonded to the non-woven geotextile.
Assembly Properties:
1.
General:
Property
Test Method
Peel Adhesion to Concrete
Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance
Permeability
Grab Tensile Strength
Puncture Resistance
Low Temperature Flexibility
Geotextile Interlock Peel
Water Vapor Transmission Rate
ASTM D 903 mod.
ASTM D 5385 mod.
ASTM D 5084
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4833
ASTM D 1970
ASTM D 4632
ASTM E 96 (B)
Value
15 lbs. /in. (2.6 kN/m) min.
231 ft. (70 m)
1 x 10-12 cm/sec.
95 lbs. (422 N)
140 lbs. (620 N) min.
Unaffected at -25°F (-32°C)
15 lbs. (65 N)
0.03 grains/hr/ft2
2.
Geotextile Fabric Properties:
Property
Woven Geotextile
Grab Tensile Strength
Grab Elongation
Mass/Area
Non-woven Geotextile
Grab Tensile Strength
Grab Elongation
Mass/Area
3.
1.4
Test Method
Value
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 5261
109 lbs (480 N)
15%
3.2 oz. /sq yd
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4632
6.0 lbs (27 N)
150%
ASTM D 5261 6.0 oz/sq yd
HDPE Sheet Properties: HDPE sheet shall be integrally
non-woven polypropylene geotextile.
Nominal Thickness
Tensile Strength
ASTM D 8882
Elongation
ASTM D 8882
Grab Strength
ASTM D 751
Water Vapor Transmission
ASTM E 96 (B)
bonded to the outside of the
5 mils
30 lbs.
450%
55 lbs
0.034 grains/hr/ft2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show installation details for interface with other work. Also prepare and
submit drawings indicating how penetrations for piping, conduits, cables, structural members
and other similar items through waterproofing membranes will be detailed to provide a
warranted, watertight installation. Drawings shall indicate termination methods at tops of walls,
pile caps and other similar conditions.
C.
Samples: For each of the following products, in sizes indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include product specifications and
Waterproofing: 6 inches square.
Flexible Flashing Membrane: 6 inches square.
Protection Board: 6 inches square.
Drainage Mat: 6 inches square.
D.
Material Certificates: For each type of bentonite waterproofing, signed by manufacturers.
E.
Preconstruction Test Reports:
For water samples taken at Project site along with
recommendations resulting from these tests.
F.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
G.
Contractor Certificate: Written certification that installer has current Approved Applicator status
with waterproofing material manufacturer.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain bentonite waterproofing system through one source from a single
manufacturer. Obtain accessory products used with bentonite waterproofing from sources
acceptable to bentonite waterproofing manufacturer.
B.
Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement
of field installation to establish procedures to maintain required working conditions and to
coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Verify that final waterproofing details
comply with waterproofing manufacturer's current installation requirements and
recommendations. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division
1 Section "Project Requirements and Coordination".
C.
Inspection: Manufacturer's representative shall inspect waterproofing installation periodically
during application to verify that waterproofing has been installed in accordance with
manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations.
D.
Water Sample Test: Project site water sample supplied to manufacturer by waterproofing
contractor to determine type of bentonite system (standard sodium bentonite or contaminate
resistant (CR) sodium bentonite) to be utilized on the project. Manufacturer shall conduct test
free of charge. Contractor is responsible for collection and shipment of one liter of actual site
water. Water should be shipped in uncontaminated, sealed plastic container; provide project
name, city and state along with return address to forward test results.
E.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery and Handling: Deliver materials in factory sealed and labeled packaging. Sequence
deliveries to avoid delays, while minimizing on-site storage. Handle and store following
manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from
construction operation related damage, as well as, damage from weather, excessive
temperatures and prolonged sunlight. Remove damaged material from site and dispose of in
accordance with applicable regulations.
B.
Storage: Do not double-stack pallets during shipping or storage. Protect waterproofing materials
from moisture, excessive temperatures and sources of ignition. Provide cover, top and all sides,
for materials stored on-site, allowing for adequate ventilation.
C.
Remove and replace bentonite materials that have been prematurely exposed to moisture.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Substrate Condition: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and preparation work
is complete and in condition to receive waterproofing system.
B.
Weather Conditions: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are
within the guidelines established by the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials. Do not
apply waterproofing materials into standing or ponding water conditions.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty:
The waterproofing materials manufacturer shall provide a written
waterproofing system warranty covering both materials and labor. Manufacturer's warranty
shall be independent from any other warranties under the requirements of the Contract
Documents and may run concurrent with said warranties.
Warranty shall state that
waterproofed surfaces, including penetrations through waterproofing materials, are warranted
watertight (zero water penetration) during warranty period and will be repaired to watertight
condition at no cost to the Owner should leaks and failures occur.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Water penetrating the building or structure resulting from substrate cracking of up
1/8 inch.
Deteriorated or displaced waterproofing materials.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Sodium Bentonite: Specially selected Wyoming granular bentonite containing approximately
90% montmorillonite with 10% maximum unaltered volcanic ash and other native sediments.
Free Swell Rating: 2 grams sifted into deionized water swells to occupy a minimum volume of
16 cc. Grading: Granular bentonite passes 90% through a 20-mesh sieve and less than 10%
through a 200-mesh sieve.
B.
Bentonite Mastic: Trowelable consistency, bentonite compound, specifically formulated for
application at joints and penetrations. .
C.
Granular Bentonite Tubes: Manufacturer's standard 2-inch- diameter, water-soluble tube
containing approximately 1.5 lb/ft. of bentonite; hermetically sealed; designed specifically for
placing on wall footings at line of joint with exterior base of wall.
D.
Preformed Waterstop: Refer to Division 3 Section "Bentonite Waterstop" for requirements.
E.
Bentonite Grout: High-solids bentonite fluid mixture formulated to be injected to stop leaks in
existing below-grade structures.
F.
Bentonite Waterstoppage: 50 lb. bag of specially processed dry granular sodium bentonite.
2.2
COMPOSITE GEOTEXTILE-HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE
A.
2.3
General: 4' x 14.5' roll of interlocked geotextiles encapsulating a minimum of 1.10 lbs. per
square foot granular sodium bentonite with a HDPE sheet integrally bonded to the outside of the
non-woven geotextile. Composite shall consist of one woven and one non-woven polypropylene
geotextile, interlocked using a needle-punching process. The non-woven geotextile fibers shall
pass through the bentonite layer and integrate into the woven geotextile to produce several
interlocks each square inch over the entire surface area of product.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Molded High-Flow Base Drainage Panel: Provide high flow strip drainage composite designed
for collection and transport of water to discharge pipes at the base of below grade foundation
walls. Base Drainage Panel shall be designed to be used in conjunction with molded sheet
drainage panels to provide an uninterrupted drainage flow path. Provide with premanufactured
couplers and corner fittings as required to form a continuous seamless installation. Provide with
premanufactured discharge outlet fittings (corner outlet, end outlet and side outlet) to connect to
discharge pipes. All outlet fittings shall be designed to fit standard 4 inch diameter PVC sewer
pipe.
1.
Physical Properties of Molded High-Flow Base Drainage Panels:
Property
Test Method
Value
Flow Capacity of Composite
ASTM D 4716
Compressive Strength, Composite
ASTM D 1621 mod.
Fabric Weight
Grab Tensile Strength of Fabric
Puncture Resistance of Fabric
Apparent Opening Size of Fabric
Burst Strength of Fabric
Trapezoidal tear of Fabric
ASTM D 3776
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 3787
ASTM D 4751
ASTM D 3786
ASTM D 4533
Flow Rate of Fabric
Elongated of Fabric
ASTM D 4491
ASTM D 4632
97 gpm/ft width
2
10,000 lbs./ft
2
6 oz/yd
160 lbs.
90 lbs.
700-100 US Sieve
350 PSI
65 lbs.
2
110 gpm/ft
50 percent
B.
Molded-Sheet Drainage Panels: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels, manufactured with
a permeable geotextile facing laminated to a molded-plastic, three-dimensional sheet drainage
core. Drainage panel shall also serve as protection course for the waterproofing.
C.
Physical Properties of Molded Sheet Drainage Panels:
Property
Test Method
Value
Compressive Strength
ASTM D 1621 mod
15,000 psf
Water Flow Rate
ASTM D 4716
16 gpm/ft width
Thickness
ASTM D 1777
0.43 in.
D.
Termination Bar:
receive sealant.
E.
Fasteners: Case-hardened nails or hardened-steel, powder-actuated fasteners. Depending on
manufacturer's written requirements, provide 1/2- or 1-inch- diameter washers under fastener
heads.
F.
Sealants:
As recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants Exterior."
G.
Tapes: As recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer for joints between sheets or
panels.
H.
Adhesive: Water-based adhesive used to secure membrane to both vertical and horizontal
surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Extruded-aluminum or formed-stainless-steel bars with upper flange to
Comply with
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrate preparations affecting performance of bentonite waterproofing.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of bentonite waterproofing.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Verify that substrate is complete and that all work that will penetrate waterproofing is complete
and rigidly installed. Verify locations of waterproofing termination.
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate work in the vicinity of waterproofing to ensure proper conditions for installing the
waterproofing system and to prevent damage to waterproofing after installation.
B.
Formed Concrete Surfaces: Remove fins and projections. Fill voids, rock pockets, form-tie
holes, and other defects with bentonite mastic or cementitious patching material according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Horizontal Concrete Surfaces: Remove debris, standing water, oily substances, mud, and
similar substances that could impair the bonding ability of concrete or the effectiveness of
waterproofing. Fill voids, cracks greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm), honeycomb areas, and other
defects with bentonite mastic or cementitious patching material according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
D.
Excavation Support and Protection or Stable Excavation: If water is seeping, use plastic sheets
or other suitable means to prevent wetting the bentonite waterproofing. Fill minor gaps and
spaces 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider with wood, metal, concrete, or other appropriate filling
material. Cover or fill large voids and crevices with cement mortar according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3
GENERAL INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
A.
Install Waterproofing System with the woven side (dark gray) of the geotextile liner facing the
concrete to be waterproofed in both horizontal and vertical applications.
B.
Prevent bentonite waterproofing products from hydrating before material is contained with
overburden or backfill. When threat of rain is imminent, installed bentonite products not already
contained by overburden or backfill should be covered with polyethylene sheeting to decrease
the chance of hydration. Remove polyethylene prior to overburden or backfill operations.
3.4
UNDER SLAB INSTALLATION
A.
Reinforced concrete slab(s) on compacted grade shall be a minimum of 4" thick. Install under
all footings, elevator pits and grade beams unless specifically indicated otherwise.
B.
At all penetrations provide with a 1/2" layer of granular bentonite extending around each a
minimum radius of 6".
C.
Place directly on properly prepared substrate (dark gray woven geotextile side up facing
installer) with adjoining edges overlapped a minimum of 4". Stagger sheet end seams a
minimum of 24". Mechanically fasten or staple as required to prevent movement from
construction operations or concrete placement. When the slab is poured in sections, extend a
minimum 12" beyond the slab edge to enable proper overlapping.
D.
Cut bentonite to fit snugly around penetrations. Around base of penetrations trowel 3/4" thick
fillet of mastic and extend mastic onto membrane. Around base of pile caps trowel 2" thick fillet
of mastic and extend the mastic onto membrane.
E.
Provide a minimum of 12" overlap between underslab and vertical wall waterproofing by either
extending the membrane beyond the form or turning it up in the form and securing.
F.
Inspect finished membrane installation and repair any damaged material prior to concrete
placement. Assure that membrane is not displaced during concrete placement.
3.5
BACKFILLED POURED-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALLS
A.
Place bentonite mastic along the wall/footing intersection with ends "butted" together to form
a continuous installation. Where indicated and where waterproofing is not indicated to wrap
pile caps.
B.
Trowel 3/4" thick bentonite mastic fillet at all inside corner transitions.
C.
Starting at the base of the wall at foundation, install sheet horizontally (dark gray woven
geotextile against the wall) covering the bentonite tubes and extending onto the foundation a
minimum of 6". Attach membrane using washer-headed mechanical fasteners centered 24"
around the edge. Stagger all vertical overlap seams a minimum of 24".
D.
At all penetrations provide 3/4" cant of bentonite mastic. Extend bentonite mastic 1/4" thick
over substrate a minimum radius of 6" around penetration. Cut membrane to fit snugly around
penetrations.
E.
Terminate at grade with metal termination bar fastened 12" on center. Cover top edge of
membrane with 1/2" thick, 2" wide layer of bentonite mastic.
F.
Inspect finished installation and repair any damaged material prior to backfill placement.
Assure that membrane is not displaced during backfill placement or soil compaction.
3.6
PREFABRICATED DRAINAGE COMPOSITE INSTALLATION
A.
Foundation Walls:
1.
2.
Starting at the base of the wall, place base-drain horizontally oriented with the open core
side up and the 2 inch flap of fabric side against the wall. Install the base-drain over
waterproofing membrane, using methods approved by the waterproofing material
manufacturer. Typical attachment methods include general construction adhesive, twosided tape or washer-head fasteners. No matter which attachment method is used, the 2
inch fabric flap along the top edge should be secured. Use couplers and corner fittings,
as required, to form a continuous installation. Install discharge outlet fittings to connect
with discharge pipes where indicated and as required to relieve wall every 50 feet.
Install Molded Sheet Drainage Panels with plastic core side toward the wall where the
bottom core overlaps the 2 inch fabric flap of the drain and abuts the base-drain plastic
core. Apply sheet drainage panels over waterproofing membrane, using methods
approved by the waterproofing material manufacturer. Typical attachment methods
include construction adhesive, two-sided tape or washer-headed fasteners. Place the
extra fabric flap of the sheet drainage over the front of the base-drain to cover the open
top edge and then secure the extra fabric flap with general construction adhesive or duct
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.7
tape.
Install subsequent rolls of sheet drainage panels to finished grade or as shown on the
drawings. Connect adjacent drainage panels by pulling the filter fabric back to expose
two rows of core dimples and then interlocking the core dimples with the installed sheet.
With the next course, the flangeless sheet edge shall be placed over the top flange edge
of the sheet below the butted dimple to dimple. All connections shall be completed in
shingle fashion so that water will flow with the overlap and not against it. Overlap extra
fabric in direction of water flow and secure with construction adhesive or duct tape. Wrap
all panel termination edges with the filter fabric flap by tucking fabric behind the core.
For inside and outside corners, abut adjoining drainage composite at the corner. Cover
open core with extra fabric to prevent intrusion of soil into core.
Around protrusions, cut drainage composite to fit and wrap extra filter fabric around open
edge of core to prevent soil intrusion into core.
Secure drainage sheet to wall at grade with termination bar mechanically fastened 12
inches on center with the fabric wrap behind the exposed core to prevent intrusion of soil
into the core.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspection: Arrange for manufacturer's representative to inspect completed installation and
provide written report that installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
B.
Remove and replace applications of bentonite waterproofing where inspection indicates
that it does not comply with specified requirements.
Backfilling:
Closely coordinate drainage composite installation with backfill operations
conducted under Division 2 Section "Earthwork". Care should be used during backfill operation
to avoid damage to the drainage system. Follow generally accepted practices for backfilling
and compaction. Unless indicated otherwise, backfill should be added in 6 inch to 12 inch lifts
and compacted to a minimum 85 % Modified Proctor density.
END OF SECTION 07170
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Note: Sound attenuation blanket shall be installed in all interior partitions throughout the building.
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade.
Concealed building insulation.
Sound attenuation insulation.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in cavity walls and
masonry cells.
Division 7 Section "Built-up Asphalt Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing
construction.
Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a
perimeter fire-resistive joint system.
Division 9 Sections “Portland Cement Plaster", "Gypsum Board Assemblies", and
"Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of
insulation specified by referencing this Section.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation."
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass
fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test
performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products
per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on
comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling,
or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm
air velocity.
Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth,
delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation
with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent
relative humidity in the dark.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency for insulation products.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project
site before installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:
1.
Type X, 1.30 lb/cu. ft.; with tongue and groove panel joints.
2.2
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25
and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
B.
Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets
in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
9-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 30 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets
without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
B.
Where slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following
thicknesses, provide blankets in batt form with thermal resistances indicated:
1.
2.4
3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate
location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E.
For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units
to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make
up total thickness.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER and UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
A.
On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
1.
B.
On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1.
C.
3.5
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade
line.
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches from the exterior
edge of slab inward.
Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying
protection course with joints butted.
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to
edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C.
Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
D.
Install board insulation in metal stud framed construction where indicated on Drawings
according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.7
Retain insulation at brick veneer finish installation with Adjustable Masonry-Veneer
Anchors. Horizontal joints of insulation board shall be tightly joined tongue and groove
panel edges. Seal all joints and voids in installed board insulation with spray expanding
foam as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
Retain insulation at other exterior finish systems with hot-dipped galvanized steel or
stainless steel self-drilling screws at fastener spacing and pattern as recommended by
the insulation manufacturer. Horizontal joints of insulation board shall be tightly joined
tongue and groove panel edges. Seal all joints and voids in installed board insulation
with spray expanding foam as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,
and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to
abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
SECTION 07411 - METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Standing-seam metal roof panels.
Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for steel roof deck supporting metal roof panels.
Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed metal framing
supporting metal wall panels.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed copings, flashings,
roof drainage systems, and other sheet metal work not part of metal roof panel
assemblies.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants not otherwise specified in
this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous
metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight
roofing system.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B.
Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area
when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
2.
3.
Test-Pressure Difference: Positive and negative 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. .
Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. and
the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive
wind-pressure difference.
Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure
difference.
C.
Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the
following test-pressure difference:
1.
2.
3.
Test-Pressure Difference: 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, but not less than
6.24 lbf/sq. ft. and not more than 12.0 lbf/sq. ft.
Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 lbf/sq. ft. and
the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive
wind-pressure difference.
Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure
difference.
D.
Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.
E.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for winduplift-resistance class indicated.
1.
F.
FMG Listing:
Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with
requirements in FMG 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FMG's
"Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials
with FMG markings.
1.
2.
G.
Uplift Rating: UL 90.
Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
Hail Resistance: MH.
Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the
effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1.
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:
a.
2.
3.
H.
Snow Loads: 35 lbf/sq. ft.
Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind and snow loads with
vertical deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
1.5
Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
roof panel and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge
conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings,
closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and fieldassembled work.
1.
Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2
inches per 12 inches:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal roof panel indicated with factory-applied
color finishes.
1.
D.
Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Flashing and trim.
Built-in Gutters.
Snow guards.
Metal Roof and Soffit Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners,
clips, closures, and other metal roof panel accessories.
Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
Accessories: 12-inch long Samples for each type of accessory.
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and
coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
Roof panels and attachments.
Roof-mounted items including penetrations, lighting fixtures and snow guards.
F.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
G.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
H.
Field quality-control reports.
I.
Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
D.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
Obtain each type of metal roof panels from single source from single
1.
2.
E.
Mockups:
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
3.
F.
Build mockup of typical roof eave, including soffit; approximately four panels wide by full
eave width, including underlayment, attachments, and accessories.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.7
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, metal roof panel Installer, metal roof panel manufacturer's representative,
deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal roof panels
including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
Examine deck substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness
and attachment to structural members.
Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing.
Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels.
Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing
and inspecting if applicable.
Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel assembly during and after
installation.
Review roof observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation.
Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be
damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and
handling.
B.
Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and surface damage.
C.
Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels
in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D.
Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof
panels by field measurements before fabrication.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
B.
Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks,
parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
1.10
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
B.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
C.
Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's
standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof
panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty
period.
1.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PANEL MATERIALS
A.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1.
2.
3.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation;
structural quality.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a.
4.
B.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
Panel Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and
remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.
Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slipresisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt
adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1.
2.
B.
2.3
Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
1.
2.
Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch .
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dens-Dek by Georgia-Pacific
Corporation.
B.
2.4
Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates
complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate
board to substrate.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded
studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factoryapplied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
B.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.5
STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A.
General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically
attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure
plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.
1.
2.
B.
Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with
ASTM E 1514.
Aluminum Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply
with ASTM E 1637.
Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels : Formed with vertical ribs at
panel edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically
attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and
engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Englert Inc.,
System S2500 with PERMA Color 2000 finish in Charcoal Gray; CG-30.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 24 guage nominal thickness.
a.
b.
3.
Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.
a.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer.
Color: Charcoal Gray; CG-30.
Material: zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
Joint Type: As standard with manufacturer.
Panel Coverage: 16 inches.
Panel Height: 2.0 inches.
METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A.
General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to
supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight
installation.
B.
Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Perforated panels formed with vertical panel edges and flat
pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.
1.
2.
2.7
Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal roof panels.
Panel Coverage: 16 inches.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as
required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units,
ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.8
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof
panels.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating,
minimum 0.018 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to
provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners,
bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish
system as adjacent metal roof panels.
SNOW GUARDS
A.
Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating
metal roof panels, and complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring.
1.
Seam-Mounted, Two Rail-Type Snow Guards: Aluminum rails held in place by aluminum
snowguard block and flag and stainless-steel screw clamps attached to vertical ribs of
standing-seam metal roof panels.
a.
2.9
Aluminum Finish: Powder coated to match standing seam roof finish.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible,
by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural
requirements.
B.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length
of panel.
C.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.10
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
End Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.
Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for
application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking
and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
C.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel
installation.
D.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of
interfering with insulation attachment.
B.
Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof
panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
3.3
Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with
requirements for assemblies indicated.
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply over entire roof
area to receive metal roofing, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of
not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than
3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
B.
Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.
C.
Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.4
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or
restricted by shipping limitations.
B.
Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location
for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction.
Predrill panels for fasteners.
1.
2.
C.
Install metal roof panels as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of
factory-authorized representative.
Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted.
Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge and hip caps.
Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of
all openings.
Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
End Splices: Locate panel end splices over, but not attached to, structural supports.
Stagger panel end splices to avoid a four-panel splice condition.
Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels.
Fasteners:
1.
E.
Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at eave.
Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal
movement.
Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and
galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. Use stainless-steel
fasteners for components fastened into treated wood substrates (fire retardant and
pressure treated materials).
Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place,
using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.
F.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying
rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as
recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
1.
G.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and
sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.5
Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact
wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips
at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer
tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1.
B.
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to
form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in
waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
2.
3.7
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would
not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).
SNOW GUARD INSTALLATION
A.
Rail-Type Snow Guards: Attach rail supports to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels
with clamps or set screws. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels.
1.
3.8
Provide one rows of snow guards with two rails, at locations indicated on Drawings;
provide rail supports at each standing seam.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
3.9
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4
inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining
faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.
B.
Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do
not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.10
CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B.
Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07411
SECTION 07415 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes metal-faced composite wall panels.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed metal framing
supporting metal-faced composite wall panels.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed flashings and other
sheet metal work not part of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies.
DEFINITION
A.
1.4
Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panel Assembly: Metal-faced composite wall panels, attachment
system components, miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete
weathertight wall system.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall comply with
performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation,
or other defects in construction.
B.
Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of wall area
when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
C.
Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
D.
Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. .
Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. .
Structural Performance: Provide metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies capable of
withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:
1.
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:
a.
b.
Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. , acting inward or outward.
Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 1
2.
E.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
1.5
Deflection Limits: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind
loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.
Temperature Change (Range): Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material
surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of
metal-faced composite wall panel and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal-faced composite wall panels;
details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory-, shop-,
and field-assembled work.
1.
Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2
inches per 12 inches:
a.
b.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal-faced composite wall panel indicated with
factory-applied color finishes.
1.
2.
D.
Flashing and trim.
Anchorage systems.
Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full
range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1.
Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include
fasteners, closures, and other metal-faced composite wall panel accessories.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Composite Panels: Include four-way joint.
Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
Accessories: 12-inch long Samples for each type of accessory.
Exposed Gaskets: 12 inches long.
Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint
sealants in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material
matching the appearance of metal-faced composite wall panels adjacent to joint sealants.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 2
E.
Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wall panels and attachments.
Girts and stud framing.
Wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.
F.
Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
G.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
H.
Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal-faced composite wall panel from single source
from single manufacturer.
D.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will
contact joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing indicated in subparagraphs
below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
joint sealants to joint substrates.
Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal-faced composite wall panels identical
to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
F.
Mockups:
Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
G.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, metal-faced composite wall panel Installer, metal-faced composite wall
panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose
work interfaces with or affects metal-faced composite wall panels including installers of
doors, windows, and louvers.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 3
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.7
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Review methods and procedures related to metal-faced composite wall panel installation,
including manufacturer's written instructions.
Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that will affect metal-faced composite wall panels.
Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and
inspections if applicable.
Review temporary protection requirements for metal-faced composite wall panel
assembly during and after installation.
Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal-faced composite wall
panel installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver components, sheets, metal-faced composite wall panels, and other manufactured items
so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal-faced composite wall panels for
protection during transportation and handling.
B.
Unload, store, and erect metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C.
Store metal-faced composite wall panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal-faced composite wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive
slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal-faced composite wall panels in contact with
other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Do not allow
storage space to exceed 120 deg F.
D.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal-faced composite wall panel for period of panel
installation.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal-faced composite wall panels to be performed according to
manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by
field measurements before metal-faced composite wall panel fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim,
and construction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 4
1.10
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
B.
Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal-faced composite wall panels that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PANEL MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with
temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
1.
2.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:
a.
3.
B.
Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
Panel Sealants:
1.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal-faced
composite wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by panel
manufacturer.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 5
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A.
Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance
unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections 0.064-inch nominal thickness.
C.
Zee Clips: 0.079-inch nominal thickness.
D.
Base or Sill Angles: 0.079-inch nominal thickness.
E.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:
1.
2.
F.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch wide flange.
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
2.3
Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.
Depth: As indicated.
Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.
Depth: As required.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with nominal thickness
of 0.040 inch.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch diameter wire.
Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to
substrates.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type
of use and finish indicated.
B.
Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal-faced composite wall panels by means of plastic caps or factoryapplied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.4
METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
A.
General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal-faced composite wall panels fabricated
from two metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic
core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment system
components and accessories required for weathertight system.
1.
Fire-Retardant Core: Noncombustible, with the following surface-burning characteristics
as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
b.
Flame-Spread Index: 15 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 105 or less.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 6
2.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels : Formed with 0.020-inch thick, coil-coated aluminum
sheet facings.
1.
2.
3.
Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch .
Core: Fire retardant.
Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer.
a.
C.
Color: Drylac #49/13660; RAL 1019.
Attachment System Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.
1.
2.5
Alcan Composites USA Inc.; Alucobond.
Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond .
ALPOLIC, Division of Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc.; ALPOLIC.
CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formabond Wall System.
Include manufacturer's standard panel stiffeners, panel clips and anchor channels.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal-faced composite
wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metalfaced composite wall panels unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing
and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings,
rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same
finish system as adjacent metal-faced composite wall panels.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal-faced composite wall panels and accessories at the factory
to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as
necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing.
Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B.
Fabricate metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on
interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C.
Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no
glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no
displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.
1.
2.
3.
Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp
and buckle.
Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or
protrusion of core material.
Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits,
attached to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 7
4.
Dimensional Tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flatlock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer.
a.
2.7
Length: Plus 0.375 inch.
Width: Plus 0.188 inch.
Thickness: Plus or minus 0.008 inch.
Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width.
Squareness: 0.2 inch maximum.
Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or
metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer for application, but not less than
thickness of metal being secured.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within onehalf of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal-faced composite wall panel supports, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer.
Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal-faced composite wall
panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels before
panel installation.
C.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall
panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal-faced composite
wall panel manufacturer's written instructions.
METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install metal-faced composite wall panels according to manufacturer's written
instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels
perpendicular to girts and subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor panels and other
components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal-faced composite wall panels.
Flash and seal metal-faced composite wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Do not
begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by panels are
installed.
Install flashing and trim as metal-faced composite wall panel work proceeds.
Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
Fasteners:
1.
Aluminum Wall Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed
to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
interior.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 9
C.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal-faced composite wall panel
manufacturer.
D.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weathertight performance of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies. Provide types of
gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by panel
manufacturer.
1.
E.
Attachment System Installation, General: Install attachment system required to support metalfaced composite wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including
subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.
1.
2.
F.
Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material
joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by
composite panels are installed.
Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at each metal-faced composite wall panel joint
at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-andreturned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners.
1.
3.4
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant backing and
sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1.
B.
Install components required for a complete metal-faced composite wall panel assembly
including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips, and similar items.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1.
2.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to
form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in
waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would
not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 10
3.5
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
3.6
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal-faced composite wall panel units within installed
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as
indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance with
system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at minimum differential pressure
of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure as defined by SEI/ASCE 7, but not
less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
C.
Metal-faced composite wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
D.
Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal-faced composite
wall panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clean finished
surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during
construction.
B.
After metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C.
Replace metal-faced composite wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07415
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
07415 - 11
SECTION 07460 - SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for building wrap.
Division 6 Section "Exterior Finish Carpentry” for finish panels and exterior trim.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing, gutters, and other sheet
metal work.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification:
1.
12-inch long-by-actual-width Sample of siding.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of siding, signed by product manufacturer.
D.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Siding: Obtain siding, including related accessories, through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B.
Mockup: Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects.
1.
C.
1.5
Fiber-cement siding.
Build mockup approximately 48 inches long by 60 inches high. Include inside corner on
one end.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
SIDING
07460 - 1
A.
1.6
Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if
existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
SEQUENCING
A.
1.8
Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading, or otherwise
deteriorating beyond normal weathering.
1.
1.9
Warranty Period: 50 years for fiber cement siding and 15 years for manufacturer
provided finish from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Furnish full lengths of siding in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SIDING
A.
Fiber-Cement Siding: Siding made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos
fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when
tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: James Hardie Siding Products; Hardiplank Lap siding with
ColorPlus prefinished painted finish; ColorPlus Prefinished Siding - JH20-30; Khaki
Brown.
Horizontal Pattern: Boards 6-1/4 to 6-1/2 inches wide in plain style.
a.
Texture: Smooth.
SIDING
07460 - 2
3.
4.
2.2
Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.
Factory Finish: Manufacturer's prefinished paint system.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.
1.
Finish for Aluminum Flashing: High-performance organic finish, same color as siding.
B.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant:
Single-component urethane joint sealant complying with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Uses M, G, A,
and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates.
C.
Fasteners:
1.
2.
For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a
minimum of 1/4 inch or 3 screw-threads into substrate.
For fastening fiber-cement siding, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of siding. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. Use a 1-1/4-inch
starter strip at first course of siding to maintain siding face angle. Predrill fastener holes in
cement lap siding. Provide 15# building felt flashing behind butt joints of siding; lap over siding
course below minimum of 1-inch (trim to insure that building felt flashing is not visible). Provide
1/8-inch spacing at butt joints between siding and where siding abuts fixed materials (trim
boards); fill joints with continuous sealant. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of
prevailing wind.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with
new materials complying with specified requirements.
SIDING
07460 - 3
B.
Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07460
SIDING
07460 - 4
SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Built-up asphalt roofing system.
Roof insulation.
Division 5 Section "Steel Deck".
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood, cants, curbs, and blocking.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings, and counterflashings.
Division 7 Section "Roof Expansion Assemblies."
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for roof drains.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
B.
Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at
which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mopping application and 75 centipoise for mechanical
application, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F, measured at the mop cart or mechanical
spreader immediately before application.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not
permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,
and exposure to weather without failure.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based
on testing and field experience.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 1
C.
FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply
with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in
FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify
materials with FMG markings.
1.
2.
1.5
Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
Hail Resistance: MH.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system.
attachments to other Work.
1.
2.
3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations.
Tapered insulation, including slopes.
Insulation fastening patterns.
C.
Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is
approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
D.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1.
Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
E.
Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system.
G.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system.
H.
Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
I.
Inspection Report:
roofing installation.
1.6
Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FMG approval for roofing
system identical to that used for this Project.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roofing system manufacturer.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 2
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by
UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1.
2.
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.7
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of
roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions
for storage.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1.
1.8
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which
roofing system is a part.
Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D.
Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 3
A.
1.9
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
1.
2.
B.
Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, substrate board walkway products and other components of roofing
system.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty signed by the Installer, covering
Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane,
base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof
pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:
1.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Built-up Asphalt Roofing:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Firestone Building Products Company.
GAF Materials Corporation.
Johns Manville International, Inc.
ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES
A.
2.3
Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
B.
Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6164, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet;
granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified and as follows:
1.
2.4
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Granule Color: White.
ASPHALT MATERIALS
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 4
A.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B.
Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by built-up roofing system
manufacturer for application.
2.5
AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with built-up roofing.
B.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
C.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen, nonhardening, nonmigrating,
nonskinning, and nondrying.
D.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to
substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing
system manufacturer.
E.
Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
F.
Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D 1863, No. 6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, water-worn gravel or
crushed stone, free of sharp edges.
G.
Miscellaneous Accessories:
system manufacturer.
2.6
Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing
SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A.
Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, Type
X, 5/8 inch thick.
1.
B.
2.7
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Deck" by GeorgiaPacific Corporation.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck.
ROOF INSULATION
A.
General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses
indicated.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 5
B.
Base Roof Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation, ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glassfiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
C.
Cover Board: Perlite Board Insulation, ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic
fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated.
D.
Tapered Insulation:
Perlite Board Insulation; provide factory-tapered insulation boards
fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches , unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with membrane roofing.
B.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C.
Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board.
D.
Cover Board: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board, 3/4 inch thick, with top surface seal-coated.
E.
Substrate Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch wide, coated, glass-fiber joint tape.
2.9
WALKWAYS
A.
Walkway Pads: Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip-resisting pads,
manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 3/4
inch thick, minimum.
1.
Pad Size: 36-inches x 36 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck comply with
requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck."
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 6
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
3.3
SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1.
3.4
Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in
FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B.
Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4
inch with insulation.
1.
Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where
overall insulation thickness is 1-1/2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction.
F.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
G.
Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
H.
Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first
layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for
fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.
1.
2.
Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 7
I.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches
in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. Tape joints if
required by roofing system manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.5
Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm
Resistance Classification.
Apply hot roofing asphalt to underside and immediately bond cover board to substrate.
ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for
the Application of Built-up Roofing."
1.
Install roofing system BU-I-A-G4-A, according to specification-plate classifications in
NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" and requirements in this
Section.
B.
Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for
installing built-up roofing system.
C.
Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets
are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast.
1.
2.
3.
Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets
and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt
with joints and edges sealed.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
D.
Asphalt Heating: Heat roofing asphalt and apply within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous
temperature unless otherwise required by roofing system manufacturer. Do not raise roofing
asphalt temperature above equiviscous temperature range more than one hour before time of
application. Do not exceed roofing asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature limits
during roofing asphalt heating. Do not heat roofing asphalt within 25 deg F of flash point.
Discard roofing asphalt maintained at a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature for
more than 4 hours.
E.
Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering
building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.
3.6
ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
Install four ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching.
Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout
thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and
terminate beyond cants.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 8
1.
B.
Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofing membrane, base flashing,
and stripping, flood-coat roof surface with 60 lb/100 sq. ft. of hot roofing asphalt. While flood
coat is hot and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform course:
1.
2.
3.7
Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required
by roofing system manufacturer, to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets
touching.
Aggregate Weight: 400 lb/100 sq. ft.
If aggregate surfacing is delayed, promptly apply glaze coat of hot roofing asphalt at a
rate of 10 lb/100 sq. ft.
FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and
at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.
Backer Sheet Application: Install backer sheet and adhere to substrate in a solid
mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid mopping of hot
roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F. Apply hot roofing asphalt to back of
flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system manufacturer.
B.
Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and
4 inches onto field of roofing membrane.
C.
Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
1.
D.
Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal
flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing.
1.
E.
Flashing-Sheet Stripping: Install flashing-sheet stripping in a continuous coating of
asphalt roofing cement or in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less
than 425 deg F, and extend onto roofing membrane.
Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch metal flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed
roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of 4 inches
beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal
flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.
1.
3.8
Seal top termination of base flashing.
Install flashing-sheet stripping by same method as installing base flashing.
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of
manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkway pads in additional flood coat of
hot roofing asphalt.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 9
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B.
Test Cuts: Before flood coating and surfacing built-up roofing membrane, test specimens will
be removed to evaluate problems observed during quality-assurance inspections of roofing
membrane as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Approximate quantities of components within roofing membrane will be determined
according to ASTM D 3617.
Test specimens will be examined for interply voids according to ASTM D 3617 and to
comply with criteria established in Appendix 3 of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control
Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing."
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1.
Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
D.
Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.10
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Pre-Final Inspection Survey: The A/E shall notify the Owner, Contractor and Roofing Contractor
(in writing) that he has inspected the roof(s) and find it (them) sufficiently complete to permit a
roofing survey. In no case shall the survey be made earlier that forty days before the
Substantial Completion Inspection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Owner shall engage the services of an experienced, independent roof survey
inspection service or laboratory to survey the roof(s). The service shall use infrared or
nuclear moisture detection methods, except if the method used requires roof probes or
cuts, it shall not void the Contractors two year guarantee and manufacturer standard
warranty/guarantee.
The Roofing Contractor shall cooperate and assist the inspection service by making and
repairing the required cores, test cuts, or probes in such a way that manufacturer's and
Contractor's warranty/guarantee are not voided.
A copy of the survey report shall be delivered to the BCOM no later than ten days before
the Substantial Completion Inspection. Also, copies of all survey reports shall be
delivered to the Owner, A/E, Contractor, and Roofing Contractor.
The Owner shall pay for the service except that if the survey shows roofing deficiencies
caused by improper materials, poor workmanship, or Contractor negligence, the
Contractor, at his expense, shall repair or replace the roof(s) and provide additional
surveys until the roofing work complies with the contract documents. All corrective work
shall be completed before the final inspection.
Acceptance of the roofing system shall be contingent on a roofing survey report that
indicates the presence of no detrimental amount of moisture; for example, moisture that
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 10
6.
B.
Final Inspection:
inspection:
1.
2.
3.
3.10
would cause a significant lowering of the thermal resistance of the roof, separation of
roofing plies, blisters, etc.
Insulation that has lost more than 20% of its dry thermal resistance (R-value) and any
materials covering the insulation shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the
Owner.
Deliver the following to the Owner's representative at the time of final
A copy of the (general) contractors and roofing contractors two-year guarantee.
A copy of the roofing manufacturers warranty/guarantee.
A copy of the manufacturer's certification that roofing materials comply with specified
ASTM standard.
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
Substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
END OF SECTION 07511
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511 - 11
SECTION 07533 - VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions of
the Construction Contract, Commonwealth of Virginia and Division 1 Specification Sections
(General Requirements), apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Tray-type vegetated roof assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Captured Water: Water that is retained in the drainage layer of a vegetated roof assembly after
new water additions have ceased and that cannot escape the roof except through evaporation
or plant transpiration.
B.
Finish Elevation: Elevation of finished growing-media surface of planting area.
C.
Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
D.
Plant, Plants, Plant Material: Vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground
covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
E.
Growing Medium: Manufactured, lightweight soil mixture that promotes good growing
conditions for specific varieties of plants.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each vegetated roof assembly and each component, including each growing
medium.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
C.
Shop Drawings: For vegetated roof assembly. Include roof plans, slopes, and drain locations;
details of vegetated roof assembly and accessories; depth of growing media; and attachments
to other work.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each of the following components of vegetated roof assembly:
1.
Preplanted Vegetative Mat: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
2.
Growing Media: 1-pint (0.5-liter) of each growing medium, in sealed plastic bags labeled
with content and source. Each Sample shall be typical of the lots of growing media to be
furnished. Provide an accurate representation of texture and composition.
3.
Moisture-Retention Mat: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
4.
Molded-Sheet Drainage Modules: One in each size.
5.
Protection Fabric: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
6.
Drainage Gravel: 1-pint (0.5-liter) in sealed plastic bags labeled with content and source.
7.
Root Barrier: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
8.
Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
9.
Edge Retainer: Manufacturer's standard size to verify configuration and color selected.
E.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
F.
Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and
complying with the following:
1.
Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.
2.
Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory, according to methods established
by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
G.
Product Test Reports: For each growing medium, including complete analysis demonstrating
compliance with specified requirements.
H.
Field quality-control reports.
I.
Maintenance Data: Recommended maintenance plan including procedures for inspection and
care of vegetated roof assembly and plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of
required warranty and maintenance periods.
J.
Warranty: Sample of each special warranty, including connection to EPDM roofing warranty.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified vegetated roof assembly Installer, approved, authorized, or
licensed by membrane roofing manufacturer, whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of vegetated roofs.
1.
Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on
Project site when work is in progress.
2.
Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the
Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
3.
Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor personnel assigned to the work shall
have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare
Network:
a.
Certified Landscape Technician – Exterior designated “CLT Exterior”.
b.
Certified Ornamental Landscape Professional, designated “COLP.”
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain vegetated roof assembly components, growing medium, geotextiles
and accessories from single manufacturer.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing
weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance
with state and federal laws if applicable.
B.
Bulk Materials:
1.
Do not dump or store bulk materials on or near structures, utilities, walkways and
pavements, or existing roof areas or plants.
2.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
discharge of debris-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3.
Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with product certificates.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when optimum results may be obtained. Apply
products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.8
WARRANTIES
A.
This vegetative roofing assembly warranty must integrate with the EPDM roofing warranty, and
not invalidate the roofing warranty.
B.
Special Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly: Installer agrees to repair or replace vegetated
roof assembly and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Failure includes, but is not limited to, ponding water or prolonged wetness of growing
medium caused as a result of failure of the assembly to properly drain.
2.
Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion for System (not
including plantings.).
C.
Special Warranty for Plant Growth: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and
accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
1.
Foliage Cover: Planted materials shall grow to achieve and maintain at least 80 percent
foliage cover over planting area commencing 24 months after planting, through the
duration of this warranty.
2.
Failures include, but are not limited to, death and unsatisfactory growth except for defects
resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, neglect by Owner, or incidents that
are beyond Contractor's control.
3.
Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion:
a.
Ground Covers, Perennials, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: Two years.
4.
Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:
a.
Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the
succeeding planting season.
b.
Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at
end of warranty period.
1.9
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of vegetated roof
assembly Installer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. Maintain as required in
Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings
are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than the following maintenance
period:
1.
Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From vegetated roof assembly Installer approved by
membrane roofing manufacturer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period)
maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State
services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS
A.
Moisture-Retention and Drainage Products:
1.
Moisture-Retention Mat: Manufacturer's standard water-retaining fabric manufactured
from recycled synthetic fibers.
2.
Molded-Sheet Drainage Modules: Manufacturer's standard drainage board formed from
geotextile-faced, molded-plastic sheet with a geotextile face and “cups” of the molded
sheet facing upward like small reservoirs to retain water while allowing excess water to
drain away below the board.
B.
Root Barrier: Manufacturer's standard black plastic sheet manufactured from recycled
polyethylene or polypropylene plastic; formulated to resist root growth and bacteria.
C.
Recycled Content: Provide material with recycled content so postconsumer recycled content
plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 60 percent by weight.
2.2
VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES
A.
Tray-Type Vegetated Roof Assembly:
Modular assembly consisting of manufacturer's
standard, pre-planted trays for field-assembly adjacent to and interlocking with each other over
membrane roofing. The Tray System must be integrated with the membrane roofing warranty
and meet all requirements for that warranty.
B.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, tray-type vegetated roof systems
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following basis of
design:
a.
Carlisle GreenGrid Module System.
2.
Tray Depth, Nominal: 4 inches (100 mm)
3.
Tray Size 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm)
4.
Assembly Weight: Maximum 15 lb/sq. ft. (73 kg/sq. m) , including growing medium and
plants and saturated with captured water, but not including weight of roofing system.
5.
Plantings: As shown on landscaping drawings.
2.3
MANUFACTURED GROWING MEDIA
A.
2.4
Growing Medium: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's lightweight, manufactured soil
mixture designed for plants indicated on Drawings.
1.
General Condition at Time of Planting: Free of stones 1/2 inch (13 mm) or larger in any
dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint,
paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building
debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid,
and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of weeds and other botanical
pests; not infested with nematodes, grubs, or other pests or pest eggs; free of diseasecausing plant pathogens and other undesirable organisms; friable and with sufficient
structure to give good tilth and aeration.
2.
Maximum Media Water-Retention: ASTM E 2399, 65 percent by volume for basic
growing-medium mixture at maximum media density.
3.
Water Permeability: ASTM E 2399, .021. (cm/s) for basic growing-medium mixture at
maximum media density.
4.
Organic Material Content: ASTM F 1647, Method A, organic material as measured using
the loss-on-ignition procedure.
a.
Minimum: 6 percent.
b.
Maximum: 10 percent.
5.
Chemical Properties: Meet German Landscaping and Landscape Developemnt Research
Society “Guidelines for the Planning, Execution and Upkeep of Green-Roof Sites”..
ACCESSORIES
A.
Protection Board: As recommended by membrane roofing manufacturer.
B.
Edge Retainer: Assembly manufacturer's connections and edging with drainage openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine each area to receive vegetated roof assembly for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
Verify that membrane roofing is in place, secure, and flush along all seams.
2.
Verify that perimeter and other flashings are in place and secure along entire lengths
where they will be covered by vegetated roof assembly.
B.
Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing and protecting membrane roofing but before placing overlaying
construction. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with
potable water.
1.
Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (65 mm), with a minimum depth of 1 inch (25
mm) and a maximum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50 mm) of
clearance from top of sheet flashings.
2.
Flood each area for 24 hours.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D.
Inspect growing medium. If growing medium is contaminated by foreign or deleterious material
or liquid, remove growing medium and contamination and replace with new growing medium.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
General: Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and areas from
damage caused by installation.
B.
Protection Course: Cover membrane roofing with protection board with butted and fully taped
joints before membrane roofing is subject to vegetated roof assembly installation work.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install vegetated roof assembly according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Small Plant Stabilization: Install erosion-control fabric over planting area to secure small plants
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
PLANTING
A.
Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,
turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in growing medium within a
planting area.
B.
Do not mix or place growing medium during frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.
C.
Suspend spreading, grading, and planting operations during periods of excessive moisture until
the moisture content in growing medium reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
D.
Uniformly moisten an excessively dry growing medium that is too dusty or not workable.
E.
Planting Plants: Perform planting as specified in Division 2 Section 02490 “except as
otherwise required by vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's written instructions. Perform
digging carefully so as to prevent damage to membrane roofing below the vegetated roof
assembly.
3.5
RETAINER INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
Install connectors to tie modules together, and edge retainer according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage Division 07 membrane roofing manufacturer's authorized
service representative to provide full-time inspection of vegetated roof assembly installation and
prepare inspection reports.
B.
Correct deficiencies in work that do not comply with requirements.
3.7
PLANT MAINTENANCE
A.
General: During maintenance period, maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering,
weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing devices,
resetting plants to proper elevations or vertical position, and performing other operations as
required to establish healthy, viable plantings.
B.
Replace growing medium that becomes displaced or eroded because of settling or other
processes.
C.
Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and growing medium free
of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever
possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical
controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control
agents.
D.
Use only products and methods acceptable to membrane roofing manufacturer.
3.8
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
During planting and maintenance, keep adjacent areas and construction clean and maintain
work area in an orderly condition.
B.
Protect vegetated roof assemblies from damage due to planting operations and operations of
other contractors and trades. Repair or replace damaged vegetated roof assemblies.
END OF SECTION 07533
ECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Formed Products:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
Formed equipment support flashing.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood, curbs, and blocking.
Division 7 Section "Built-up Asphalt Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim
integral with membrane roofing.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Roofing" for custom-formed sheet metal flashing and trim
integral with sheet metal roofing.
Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof specialties not
part of sheet metal flashing and trim.
Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof
hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements
from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1.
1.4
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,
including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between
shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of
expansion and contraction.
Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
Details of special conditions.
Details of connections to adjoining work.
Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches .
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and
in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.
Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other
exposed accessories.
Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
E.
Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
F.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose
work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing
materials, roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment.
Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.
Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
4.
5.
1.6
Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and
condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing.
Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B.
Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight
and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim
installation.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METALS
A.
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet:
annealed.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1.
2.
3.
ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation;
structural quality.
Surface: Smooth, flat.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a.
Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
4.
5.
2.2
Color: Match metal roofing color.
Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slipresisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt
adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1.
2.
B.
2.3
Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F.
Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a.
b.
2.
3.
C.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being
fastened.
Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
Solder:
1.
For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
D.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim
and remain watertight.
F.
Butyl Sealant:
ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
H.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.4
MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A.
Through-Wall Ribbed Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for
embedment in masonry with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an
integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face
to receive counterflashing.
1.
B.
Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factorymitered and -welded corners and junctions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick.
Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top
edge.
Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
Accessories:
a.
b.
5.
2.5
Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure
flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips:
Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
metal.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
D.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant
concealed within joints.
E.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
G.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
2.6
ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, with riveted and soldered joints, complete
with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum
96-inch long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate gutters with built-in expansion joints and gutter-end expansion joints at walls.
Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
B.
Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with
metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1.
2.
3.
Fabricated Downspout Style: SMACNA figure designation 1-32B; 4-inches by 6-inches.
Fabricated Hanger Style: SMACNA figure designation 1-35C.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
C.
Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch (24 gage) thick.
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to
exterior, 4-inch wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or
tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. Fabricate from
the following materials:
1.
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
2.7
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop): Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch wide, joint cover plates.
1.
2.
Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch wide, concealed backup plate.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
B.
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight.
1.
2.
3.
Coping Profile: SMACNA figure designation 3-4A.
Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch wide, concealed backup plate.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
C.
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.8
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
G.
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
F.
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
E.
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick.
Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
D.
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Through-Wall Flashing: Locate below cast-stone copings, typical. Fabricate continuous
flashings in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections. Fabricate from
the following materials:
1.
2.9
Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
Prefinished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
B.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.
B.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of
underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing
underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not
less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 31/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
Install sealant tape where indicated.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1.
Coat back side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating
where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2.
Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of self-adhering sheet underlayment and cover with a slip
sheet.
C.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4
inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws and/or metal decking not less than
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E.
Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
1.
2.
F.
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin
edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pretinned surface would show in completed Work.
1.
2.
3.4
Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for
stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning
and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning
and neutralization.
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B.
Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal expansion.
Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
1.
Install self-adhering sheet underlayment and cover with a slip sheet in built-in gutter
trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap
sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches.
Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Install slip sheet over
underlayment.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.
1.
2.
D.
Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate
hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
Connect downspouts to underground drainage system, as indicated.
Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support
scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered
edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
1.
3.5
Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron flashing.
Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 24
inches apart.
Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet
apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal with elastomeric sealant to
scupper.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet
metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of
roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.
C.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
1.
Interlock bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch
centers.
D.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install
stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches
and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and
sealant or lead wedges and sealant.
F.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to
pipes that penetrate roof.
3.6
MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
3.7
Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with
installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances
specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
3.8
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
E.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07620
SECTION 07716 - ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Metal-flanged, bellows-type roof expansion assemblies.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wooden curbs for mounting roof expansion
assemblies.
Division 7 Section "Built-up Asphalt Roofing."
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated sheet
metal expansion-joint systems, flashing, and other sheet metal items.
Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems in
construction other than roofs.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
General: Provide roof expansion assemblies that, when installed, remain watertight within
movement limitations specified by manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, joints, splices, locations of joints
and splices, intersections, transitions, fittings, and attachments to other work. Where joint
assemblies change planes, provide isometric drawings depicting how components interconnect
to achieve continuity.
C.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For roof expansion assemblies.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Installer of roof membrane.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain metal-flanged, bellows-type roof expansion assemblies approved by
roofing membrane manufacturer and that are part of roofing membrane warranty.
ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
07716 - 1
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of roof
expansion assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
1.
D.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-barrier assemblies with fire-test-response
characteristics not less than that of adjacent construction, as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Assemblies shall be capable of anticipated
movement while maintaining fire rating. Identify assemblies with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
2.
1.6
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: UL 2079.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
SCHEDULING
A.
1.7
Coordinate delivery and installation of roof expansion assemblies to prevent damage and
provide timely integration of units with roofing membranes and flashing.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to
repair or replace roof expansion assemblies that leak, deteriorate in excess of rates specified in
manufacturer's published product literature, or otherwise fail to perform within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
2.2
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness, minimum
0.015 inch thick.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Roof Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II.
B.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and to
remain watertight.
C.
Flexible Cellular Sponge or Expanded Rubber: ASTM D 1056.
D.
Silicone Extrusions: Classified according to ASTM D 2000, UV stabilized, and do not propagate
flame.
ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
07716 - 2
E.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to
withstand design loads.
1.
2.3
Exposed Penetrating Fasteners:
color of sheet metal.
Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching
FIRE BARRIERS
A.
2.4
Fire Barriers: Devices complying with requirements specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance"
Article for fire-test-response characteristics and designed for dynamic structural movement
without material degradation or fatigue when tested according to ASTM E 1399. Provide roof
expansion assemblies with manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible fire-barrier seals in
back of joint system at locations indicated to provide fire-resistance rating not less than rating of
adjacent construction.
BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
A.
Metal-Flanged, Bellows-Type Roof Expansion Assemblies: Provide manufacturer's standard
assemblies of sizes and types indicated, with prefabricated units for corner and joint
intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions including those to other building expansion
joints, splicing units, adhesives, coatings, and other components as recommended by roof
expansion assembly manufacturer for complete installation. Fabricate assemblies specifically
for roof-to-wall, curb-to-curb and curb-to-wall applications.
B.
Provide assemblies consisting of exposed polymeric sheet over foam bellows, securely
anchored at both edges to 3- to 4-inch wide sheet metal nailing flanges, either flat or angle
formed to fit cant or curbs as required. Insulate bellows with closed-cell, flexible rubber or
plastic foam not less than 5/16 inch thick; adhere bellows to underside of polymeric sheet.
1.
2.
3.
Polymeric Sheet: Manufacturer's standard compatible with indicated roofing materials.
Metal Flanges: Stainless steel, minimum 0.015 inch thick.
Fire Barrier: Provide manufacturer's standard fire barrier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion
assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof expansion assembly materials and associated work so complete
assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements.
C.
Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of roof
expansion assembly, including transitions and end joints.
ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
07716 - 3
D.
Extend roof expansion assemblies over curbs, and other elements in the construction profile,
with factory-fabricated intersections and transitions to provide continuous, uninterrupted,
waterproof roof expansion assemblies.
1.
Install factory-fabricated transitions between roof expansion assemblies and building
architectural joint systems, specified in Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems,"
to provide continuous, uninterrupted, watertight construction.
E.
Splice roof expansion assemblies with materials provided by roof expansion assembly
manufacturer for this purpose, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to provide
continuous, uninterrupted, waterproof roof expansion assemblies.
F.
Provide uniform profile of roof expansion assembly throughout length of each installation; do not
stretch polymeric sheets.
G.
Install mineral-fiber blanket insulation to fill joint space within joint and moisture barrier.
H.
Bed anchorage flanges in cement or sealant recommended by manufacturer and securely nail
to curbs and cant strips as recommended by manufacturer but not less than 6 inches o.c.
I.
Anchor roof expansion assemblies complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensures that roof expansion assemblies are without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07716
ROOF EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES
07716 - 4
SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Roof curbs.
Equipment supports.
Roof hatches.
Roof supports.
Roof walkways.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and
stairs for access to roof hatches.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood cants, and wood blocking.
Division 7 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for preformed metal roofing and snow guards.
Division 7 low-slope roofing Sections for roofing accessories.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal
flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal
trim and accessories.
Division 7 Section "Roof Expansion Assemblies" for manufactured roof expansion-joint
covers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of
roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roofmounted items. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,
piping, and conduit.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 1
D.
1.4
Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied finish required and for each type of roof
accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for
fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent
damage.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.
1.8
With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt roof
drainage routes and roof expansion joints.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied finishes within specified warranty period.
1.
Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL MATERIALS
A.
Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and
prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 2
1.
2.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated.
Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (Three-Coat Fluoropolymer):
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturer's written instructions.
a.
Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretrat, and apply coating to exposed metal surface to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers’ written instructions.
1.
2.
Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours.
Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours.
B.
Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished.
C.
Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A
123/A 123M.
D.
Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M.
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 1 inch thick.
B.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, 1 inch thick.
C.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
D.
Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
1.
Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.
E.
Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed
fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to
exterior exposed fasteners.
F.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or
flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
G.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
H.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
I.
Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel
application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 3
2.3
ROOF CURBS
A.
Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, internally reinforced and capable of supporting
superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be
supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral
metal cant and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions
with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
1.
2.
2.4
Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch (1.32 mm) thick.
Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base
flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to
minimum height of 12 inches , unless otherwise indicated.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, internally reinforced and capable of
supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction
to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral metal
cant and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with
rough-in information and Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
1.
2.
2.5
Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch (1.32 mm) thick.
Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches , unless otherwise indicated.
ROOF HATCHES
A.
Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall
curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with
welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight
perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. external and 20-lbf/sq. ft.
internal loads.
Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 36 by 72 inches. .
Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick.
Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.
Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as
outer metal lid.
Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as
metal curb.
On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.
Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches , unless otherwise indicated.
Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with height
constant.
Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge
system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on
full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position.
a.
b.
c.
Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.
Material and Finish: Steel tube, galvanized.
Diameter: Pipe with 1-5/8-inch OD tube.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 4
2.6
GRAVITY VENTILATORS
A.
Low-Profile, Cylindrical-Style Gravity Ventilators: Manufacturer's standard unit fabricated from
the following materials, with manufacturer's standard welded or sealed mechanical joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Provide integral base flange, vent cylinder, cylinder bird screen, and rain cap.
Dimensions: Provide minimum of 3 square feet of venting.
Insect Screens: Manufacturer's standard mesh with rewireable frame.
Vent Cylinder, Base Flange, and Rain-Cap Material: Galvanized steel sheet, of
manufacturer's standard thickness.
PIPE FLASHING SYSTEM - MULTIPLE OPENINGS
A.
Pipe Flashing System - Multiple Openings: Pipe flashing system shall include an insulated,
prefabricated roof curb, a laminated acrylic coated ABS plastic cover with pre-punched
mounting holes and molded sealing ring on the collared opening, and an EPDM compression
molded rubber cap; cap shall have multiple conically shaped nipples field trimmable for varying
penetration diameters.
Provide stainless steel snaplock swivel clamps for each pipe
penetration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.
Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory
installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, and fastener disengagement.
B.
Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories
directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and
cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 5
2.
Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory
manufacturers for waterproof performance.
D.
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
E.
Roof Curb Installation:
1.
F.
Equipment Support Installation:
1.
G.
2.
3.3
Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level.
Roof Hatch Installation:
1.
H.
Set roof curb so top surface of roof curb is level.
Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean
and lubricate joints and hardware.
Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
TOUCH UP
A.
Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance
with Division 9 painting Sections.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 6
SECTION 07811 - SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Concealed SFRM.
Exposed SFRM.
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for surface conditions required for structural steel
receiving SFRM.
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire-resistance-rated
firestopping systems.
Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistance-rated joint systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.
B.
Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind
other construction when the Work is completed.
C.
Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the Work
is completed, that are accessible through suspended ceilings, that are in elevator shafts and
machine rooms, and that are in mechanical rooms.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:
1.
2.
Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM.
Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the following:
a.
Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency.
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 1
E.
Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following:
1.
2.
3.
Materials have been tested for bond with substrates.
Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate
primers and coatings.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for proposed SFRM.
G.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM.
H.
Field quality-control test reports.
I.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM
manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products
according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to
Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the
buyer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or
manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test
methods.
1.
2.
D.
Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test
for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.
1.
E.
SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification
marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing
requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive
materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling,
rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.
Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not
found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response characteristics
indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 2
1.
2.
F.
1.6
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory for SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method
specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if
applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.
B.
Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and
discard materials whose shelf life has expired.
C.
Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove
from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is
40 deg F (4 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain
temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product
application.
B.
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means
or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thoroughly.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other
Sections to comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the
environment.
Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive
material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity,
temperature, and ventilation.
Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage
likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.
Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if
any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply
fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed;
prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material.
Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping
has been completed.
Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and
other items penetrating fire protection are in place.
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 3
7.
8.
1.9
Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireresistive material until application of fire protection is completed.
Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has
been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective
applications.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling;
or delaminating of SFRM from substrates.
Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and
Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than
those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes
not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCEALED SFRM
A.
Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:
1.
B.
Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of
inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by
pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at spray nozzle to form a damp, as-applied
product.
Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to
attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with
each property as follows:
1.
2.
Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) for average and individual densities, or greater if
required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical
Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated
according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm), per ASTM E 605:
a.
b.
Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) or
more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness
minus 0.25 inch (6 mm).
Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch
(25 mm) but more than 0.375 inch (9 mm), the minimum allowable individual
thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch (9 mm) or 75 percent of the design
thickness.
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 4
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory
testing of 0.75-inch (19-mm) minimum thickness of SFRM.
Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. (35.9 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum
thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch (19 mm) and minimum dry density shall be
as specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m).
Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760.
Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours per
ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch (19 mm),
maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m), test specimens are not prepurged by
mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
b.
10.
2.2
No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs
whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft.
(240 kg/cu. m).
Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
EXPOSED SFRM
A.
Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Exposed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or
chloride-free formulation of portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates
mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
Exposed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of
inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by
pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at spray nozzle to form a damp, as-applied
product.
Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to
attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with
each property as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance
ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5,
"Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 22 lb/cu. ft. (352
kg/cu. m).
Bond Strength: 434 lbf/sq. ft. (21 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736.
Compressive Strength: 51 lbf/sq. in. (351 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 761.
Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) per ASTM E 859.
Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 5
8.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
b.
9.
2.3
Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B.
Sealer for Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible, tinted
protective coating recommended in writing by manufacturer of sprayed-fiber fire-resistive
material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is
in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related
materials and construction are specified.
Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale,
loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or
other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with
substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and
similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.
B.
Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.
C.
Verify that roof construction and related work are completed.
D.
Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to
verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during
application.
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 6
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt,
oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible
primers, paints, and encapsulants.
C.
Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible
shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.
D.
For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect
uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections and
fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.
3.3
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive
material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fireresistance ratings indicated.
B.
Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article
and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers,
topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test
results.
C.
Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.
Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive
covering in a single course.
D.
Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.
E.
Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM over
which they are applied.
3.4
APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM
A.
Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve
fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and
densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.
B.
Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to obtain
designated fire-resistance rating.
C.
Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
D.
Apply sealer to concealed SFRM.
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 7
3.5
APPLICATION, EXPOSED SFRM
A.
Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fireresistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities
if indicated.
1.
B.
Apply exposed cementitious SFRM to produce the following finish:
1.
C.
3.6
For steel beams and bracing, provide a thickness of not less than 1 inch (25 mm).
Even, spray-textured finish, produced by rolling flat surfaces of fire-protected members
with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.
Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspection and prepare reports:
1.
B.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
1.
C.
SFRM.
Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take
place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed
with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed
applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or
exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. (93-sq. m) area,
or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in.
(0.093-sq. m) sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) per
ASTM E 605.
Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural
members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame
beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12
measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.
Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from
sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and
structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A,
Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each
10,000-sq. ft. (929 sq. m) area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion
from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction
and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.
a.
b.
Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members
on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fireresistive material.
If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 8
coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance
criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736.
5.
If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and
inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of
noncompliance.
D.
Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion
and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
E.
Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that
thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.
3.7
CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR
A.
Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B.
Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C.
Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire
protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any
damaged or removed areas.
D.
Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
END OF SECTION 07811
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 - 9
SECTION 07816 – INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Spray applied intumescent fireproofing on exterior structural steel.
B.
Preparation of surfaces and protection of adjacent surfaces.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05120 – Structural Steel: Requirements for substrates receiving sprayed fireresistive materials.
B.
Section 07810 – Applied Fireproofing: Requirements for and application of mineral fiber
and cementitious fireproofing.
REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
ASTM D 256 – Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Plastics.
ASTM D 638 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
ASTM D 695 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
ASTM D 696 – Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion
of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C with a Vitreous Silica
Dilatomer.
ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulting Materials.
ASTM D 1002 – Standard Test Method for Apparent Shear Strength of Single-LapJoint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal-to-Metal).
ASTM D 1044 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Transparent Plstics to
Surface Abrasion.
ASTM D 2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer
Hardness.
ASTM D 4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers.
ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
ASTM E 605 – Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed FireResistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members.
ASTM E 760 – Standard Test Method for Effect of Impact on Bonding of Sprayed
Fire-Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members.
ASTM F 433 – Standard Practice for Evaluating Thermal Conductivity of Gasket
Materials.
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
07816 - 1
B.
The Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC):
SSPC-SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning.
SSPC-SP 2 – Hand Tool Cleaning.
SSPC-SP 3 – Power Tool Cleaning.
SSPC-SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01330 “Submittal Procedures”.
B.
Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
1.6
UL Design Listings for specific applications required.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
Field application manual.
C.
Samples: Two sets of samples representing anticipated texture and finish.
D.
Certification: Obtain and submit certification by authority having jurisdiction that fireproofing
products are acceptable.
E.
Installer’s qualification statement indicating installer is approved by the manufacturer as an
installer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistive Ratings: As indicated by UL Fire Resistance Directory designation.
B.
Mock-up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and
application workmanship:
1.
Finish at least 100 sq ft (9 sq m) in area designated by Architect.
2.
Evaluate mock-up for compliance with specified requirements, including thickness
and finish texture.
3.
Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
4.
Accepted mock-up may be incorporated into the work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
07816 - 2
1.7
PROJECTION CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits.
1.
2.
3.
1.8
When ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees (4 degrees C), follow
manufacturer’s instructions for cold weather installation.
Do not install when substrate temperature is less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C)
above the dew point.
Maintain ventilation after application of fireproofing in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B.
Provide vapor-tight temporary enclosures to separate occupied areas from areas where
fireproofing is being installed.
C.
Coordinate sequence of work with other installers of work that needs to penetrate
fireproofing, to avoid unnecessary damage and patching.
D.
Coordinate sequence of work with other installers of work that would obstruct access to
surfaces to be fireproofed.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty for intumescent fireproofing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Fireproofing – General: Provide materials identical to those qualified by testing by
Underwriters Laboratories for the fire resistance ratings indicated.
B.
Exterior Fireproofing for Steel: Solvent-based, single-component, factory-mixed, asbestosfree, thin-film intumescent coating, having uniform applied texture.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 15, smoke developed index
of 40, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Dry Density; 68 lb/cu ft (1090 kg/cu m), average, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 605.
Hardness: 65 to 70, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240 using Durometer
D.
Bond Strength: 375 psi (2585 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D 4541 when set and dry.
Bond Impact Resistance: No cracking, flaking, or delamination, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 760.
Abrasion Resistance: 0.40 g loss, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1044 for
1,000 cycles.
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
07816 - 3
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Impact Resistance: 0.55 ft-lb/inch (0.010 J/m) of notice, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 256.
Compressive Strength: 2,100 psi (14.5 MPa), when tested in accordance with ASTM
D 695.
Flexural Strength: 1,420 psi (9.7 MPa), when tested in accordance with ASTM
D 790.
Modulus of Elasticity: 158,000 psi (1090 MPa), when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 790.
Tensile Strength: 756 psi (5212 kPa), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638.
Lap Shear Strength: 371 psi (2557 kPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1002.
Solids by Weight: 65 percent plus/minus 2 percent.
Weight: 10.5 plus/minus 0.2 lb/gal (1.3 plus/minus 0.02 kg/L.)
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 1.44 x 10-5 in/in/deg F (2.59 x 10-5 mm/mm/degC),
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 696.
Thermal Conductivity: 3.0 BTU inch/(hr sq ft degF) (0.43/W/m K), when tested in
accordance with ASTM F33.
C.
Reinforcement: As required by tested assembly.
D.
Primer: As recommended by manufacturer, to suit substrate.
E.
Topcoat: Provide topcoat in accordance with Section 09911 “Exterior Painting”.
1.
Color: As selected by Architect.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C.
Verify that substrates are ready to receive fireproofing.
D.
Ensure that all primers applied beneath fireproofing are compatible with the applied
fireproofing.
E.
Verify that items that need to penetrate the fireproofing film are in place, including clips,
hangers, supports, and sleeves.
F.
Verify that other work that would obstruct access to surfaces to be fireproofed has not yet
been installed.
G.
Where fireproofing is to be exposed to view as a finished surface, verify that surfaces are
smooth, without voids, cracks, or projections.
H.
Start of work constitutes acceptance of substrates.
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
07816 - 4
3.2
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Clean surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose materials, and other matter that may affect
bond of fireproofing.
D.
Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and SSPC-1, SSPC-2,
SSPC-3, or SSPC-6 as required to obtain substrate suitable for installation of fireproofing.
E.
Seal penetrations and open ended fireproofing terminations as required by manufacturer.
F.
Install durable protective coverings on floors and adjacent walls and ceilings, to protect
them from overspray, fall-out, and dusting.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Prime all surfaces unless existing primer is suitable and undamaged and compatible with
fireproofing.
C.
Install fireproofing in sufficient thickness to achieve fire rating indicated. Use as many
passes as necessary to cover with a monolithic coating of uniform hardness, density, and
texture.
1.
D.
3.4
3.5
Roll smooth the finished surface.
Remove fireproofing from surfaces not specifically required to be fireproofed.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed by Owner’s independent testing agency.
B.
Correct defective work and provide further inspection and testing to verify compliance, at no
cost to Owner.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean fireproofing surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Remove excess material, overspray, droppings, and debris.
C.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
07816 - 5
D.
Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
E.
Where fireproofing is subsequently cut away to facilitate installation of other work, patch
fireproofing to same thickness and texture after installation of other work at no cost to
Owner.
END OF SECTION 07816
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
07816 - 6
SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fireresistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
Division 13 Sections specifying fire-suppression piping penetrations.
Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including
both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration
firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated.
1.
2.
B.
Fire-resistance-rated walls.
Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies.
Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per ASTM E 814:
1.
2.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated,
but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating
items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a.
b.
C.
Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
07841 - 1
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.4
For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moistureresistant through-penetration firestop systems.
For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting
floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems
not requiring removal of insulation.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction
condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item.
Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences
compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
1.
C.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for
construction and penetrating items.
Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration
firestop system, along with the following information:
1.
2.
3.
Types of penetrating items.
Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
E.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop
system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991,
"Approval of Firestop Contractors."
B.
Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fireresistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply
with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
07841 - 2
1.
2.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a.
b.
Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference
to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:
1)
1.6
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened
containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and
inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural
means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
through-penetration firestop systems.
C.
Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop
system installations; con